GBSS13.0 Optional Feature Description 05 (20120606) PDF

GBSS13.
0 Optional Feature
Description
Issue
04
Date
2012-03-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the commercial contract made between
Huawei and the customer. All or partial products, services and features described in this document may not
be within the purchased scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise agreed by the contract, all
statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties,
guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Page 2 of 341
GBSS13.0 Optional Feature Description
Public
Contents
1 Voice&Service.............................................................................................................................. 10
1.1 Crystal Voice .................................................................................................................................................. 10
1.1.1 GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate ...................................................................................................... 10
1.1.2 GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC) .................................................................................. 11
1.1.3 GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) .............................................................................. 14
1.1.4 GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) ................................................................................ 15
1.1.5 GBFD-115701 TFO .............................................................................................................................. 16
1.1.6 GBFD-115702 TrFO ............................................................................................................................. 18
1.1.7 GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) ....................................................................... 20
1.1.8 GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) ......................................................... 21
1.1.9 GBFD-115711 EVAD ........................................................................................................................... 22
1.1.10 GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index (VQI) ......................................................................................... 24
1.1.11 GBFD-115708 Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing ....................................................................... 25
1.2 AMR Package................................................................................................................................................. 26
1.2.1 GBFD-115501 AMR FR ....................................................................................................................... 26
1.2.2 GBFD-115502 AMR HR ...................................................................................................................... 28
1.2.3 GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control ..................................................................................................... 30
1.2.4 GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment .............................................................................. 31
1.2.5 GBFD-115505 AMR Radio Link Timer ............................................................................................... 32
1.2.6 GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment .................................................... 33
1.2.7 GBFD-115507 WB AMR...................................................................................................................... 35
1.3 Voice Capacity................................................................................................................................................ 36
1.3.1 GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech .......................................................................................................... 36
1.3.2 GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR .................................................................. 37
1.3.3 GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation ........................................................................................ 39
1.3.4 GBFD-115830 VAMOS ........................................................................................................................ 40
1.3.5 GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification ...................................................................................... 42
1.3.6 GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution ......................................................................................... 43
1.4 Cell Broadcast ................................................................................................................................................ 44
1.4.1 GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) ............................................................. 44
1.4.2 GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast ............................................................................................ 45
1.5 GSM Trunking ............................................................................................................................................... 46
1.5.1 GBFD-510301 Public Voice Group Call Service .................................................................................. 46

Page 3 of 341
Public
1.5.2 GBFD-510303 Late Group Channel Assignment ................................................................................. 48

1.5.3 GBFD-510305 Single Channel Group Call Originating ....................................................................... 49
1.5.4 GBFD-510306 Talker Identification ..................................................................................................... 50
1.5.5 GBFD-510307 Group Call EMLPP ...................................................................................................... 51
1.5.6 GBFD-510308 Fast Group Call Setup .................................................................................................. 52
1.5.7 GBFD-510309 Group Call Reliability Enhancing ................................................................................ 53
1.5.8 GBFD-510302 Public Voice Broadcast Service .................................................................................... 54
1.5.9 GBFD-510304 Late Broadcast Channel Assignment ............................................................................ 55
1.5.10 GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay ............................................................................................................. 56
1.6 LCS ................................................................................................................................................................ 58
1.6.1 GBFD-115401 NSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA) ................................................................................... 58
1.6.2 GBFD-115402 BSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA) ................................................................................... 59
1.6.3 GBFD-115403 Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) ............................................................................... 60
1.6.4 GBFD-115404 Lb Interface .................................................................................................................. 60
1.7 VIP Service..................................................................................................................................................... 62
1.7.1 GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation ................................................................................................... 62
1.7.2 GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP) ..................................... 63
1.7.3 GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority ............................................................................ 65
1.7.4 GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority ............................................................................. 66
1.7.5 GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority ................................................................................................... 67
2 Packet Service .............................................................................................................................. 69

2.1 PS Prime Service ............................................................................................................................................ 69
2.1.1 GBFD-114101 GPRS ............................................................................................................................ 69
2.1.2 GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I .......................................................................................... 70
2.1.3 GBFD-118901 CS-3/CS-4 .................................................................................................................... 72
2.1.4 GBFD-114201 EGPRS ......................................................................................................................... 73
2.1.5 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment ........................................................................................ 75
2.1.6 GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR .................................................................................................................. 77
2.1.7 GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access .................................................................................................. 78
2.1.8 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS ................................................................. 79
2.1.9 GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF .................................................................................................. 81
2.1.10 GBFD-119204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding ....................................................... 82
2.1.11 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency ............................................................ 83
2.1.12 GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching ....................................................................................... 84
2.1.13 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing .............................................................................................................. 86
2.1.14 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels .......................................... 87
2.2 PS Service Enhancment ................................................................................................................................. 88
2.2.1 GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR) ................................................................................................... 88
2.2.2 GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP............................................................................................................ 90
2.2.3 GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management .................................................................................. 91
2.2.4 GBFD-119905 PoC QoS ....................................................................................................................... 92

Page 4 of 341
Public
2.2.5 GBFD-119906 Conversational QoS ...................................................................................................... 94

2.2.6 GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) ............................................................... 95
2.2.7 GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) ...................................................................... 97
2.2.8 GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status (PSI) ................................................................................................... 98
2.2.9 GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination ............................................................................................. 99
2.2.10 GBFD-119502 PS Handover ............................................................................................................. 100
2.2.11 GBFD-119503 Early TBF Establishment .......................................................................................... 101
2.2.12 GBFD-119504 PS Power Control ..................................................................................................... 102
2.2.13 GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds .................................................. 103
2.2.14 GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRS Time slot multiplexing priority ........................................................ 104
2.2.15 GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) ...................................................................... 105
2.2.16 GBFD-119402 MS High Multislot Classes ....................................................................................... 106
2.2.17 GBFD-114151 DTM ......................................................................................................................... 108
2.2.18 GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM ........................................................................................................... 110
2.2.19 GBFD-119404 HMC DTM ............................................................................................................... 111
2.2.20 GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data .............................................................................. 113
2.3 EDGE Evolution .......................................................................................................................................... 114
2.3.1 GBFD-510801 MSRD ........................................................................................................................ 114
2.3.2 GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink ......................................................................................... 115
2.3.3 GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A ..................................................................................................... 116
2.3.4 GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A ................................................................................................ 118
2.3.5 GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction ..................................................................................................... 120
3 Smart MBB ................................................................................................................................. 123

3.1 Smartphone Solution .................................................................................................................................... 123
3.1.1 GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs ......................................................................................................... 123
3.1.2 GBFD-511502 Layered Paging ........................................................................................................... 124
4 Green ........................................................................................................................................... 126

4.1 Power Consumption Saving ......................................................................................................................... 126
4.1.1 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm ..................................................................... 126
4.1.2 GBFD-117602 Active Power Control ................................................................................................. 127
4.1.3 GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC .............................................................................................. 128
4.1.4 GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink .......................................................... 130
4.1.5 GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink .............................................................. 131
4.1.6 GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown .............................................................. 132
4.1.7 GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level ................................ 134
4.1.8 GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass ...................................................................................... 135
4.1.9 GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control .................................................................................... 136
4.1.10 GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type ........................................................... 137
4.1.11 GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control ................................................................................................... 139
4.1.12 GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization ............................................... 140
4.1.13 GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off .......................................................................................... 141

Page 5 of 341
Public
4.1.14 GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment ........................................................................... 142

4.1.15 GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation ............................................................ 143
5 Topology&Transmission ......................................................................................................... 146

5.1 Transmission Efficiency ............................................................................................................................... 146
5.1.1 GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on Abis Interface .................................................................... 146
5.1.2 GBFD-117301 Flex Abis .................................................................................................................... 147
5.1.3 GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch ...................................................................................................... 148
5.1.4 GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization ................................................................................ 151
5.1.5 GBFD-112013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution .................................................................. 153
5.1.6 GBFD-116901 Flex Ater ..................................................................................................................... 154
5.1.7 GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch ...................................................................................................... 156
5.1.8 GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission ................................................................................. 159
5.1.1 GBFD-511201 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching ............................................................. 161
5.1.2 GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points ................................................................................. 163
5.2 IP Tansmission ............................................................................................................................................. 164
5.2.1 GBFD-118606 Clock Over IP ............................................................................................................. 164
5.2.2 GBFD-118620 Clock over IP Support 1588V2 .................................................................................. 166
5.2.3 GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet................................................................................................. 168
5.2.4 GBFD-118601 Abis over IP ................................................................................................................ 169
5.2.5 GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 ..................................................................................................... 172
5.2.6 GBFD-118604 Abis MUX .................................................................................................................. 174
5.2.7 GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC .................................................................................................................. 176
5.2.8 A IPGBFD-118602 A over IP .............................................................................................................. 177
5.2.9 GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 .......................................................................................................... 180
5.2.10 GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission ................................................................................ 183
5.2.11 GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface ........................................................... 184
5.2.12 Gb IPGBFD-118603 Gb over IP ....................................................................................................... 185
5.2.13 GBFD-118605 IP QoS ...................................................................................................................... 187
5.2.14 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor ........................................................................................... 191
5.2.15 GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM .......................................................................................................... 192
5.3 Satellite Transmission .................................................................................................................................. 194
5.3.1 GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface ................................................................. 194
5.3.2 GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface ...................................................................... 195
5.3.3 GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface .................................................................. 196
5.3.4 GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.................................................................... 197
5.4 RAN Sharing ................................................................................................................................................ 198
5.4.1 GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing .............................................................................................................. 198
5.4.2 GBFD-118704 Abis Independent Transmission .................................................................................. 199
5.4.3 GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell .................................................................................................... 200
5.4.4 GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based Handover ................................................................................................ 202
6 Site Solution ............................................................................................................................... 204

Page 6 of 341
Public
6.1 PICO Solution .............................................................................................................................................. 204

6.1.1 GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning ............................................................ 204
6.1.2 GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization................................................................................................ 205
6.1.3 GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning ................................................................................. 206
6.1.4 GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption ............................................................................................... 208
6.1.5 GBFD-510605 PICO Access Control List (ACL) ............................................................................... 209
6.1.6 GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode ................................................................................................. 209
6.1.7 GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization ................................................................................... 210
6.1.8 GBFD-510608 PICO Transceiver Redundancy .................................................................................. 211
6.2 EasyGSM Solution ....................................................................................................................................... 212
6.2.1 GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning .............................................. 212
6.2.2 GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning ............................................................. 214
6.2.3 GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization ........................ 215
6.2.4 GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off ............................................................................... 216
6.2.5 GBFD-510706 Local User Management ............................................................................................ 217
6.2.6 GBFD-111613 Weather Adaptive Power Management ....................................................................... 219
7 Network Performance .............................................................................................................. 221

7.1 Coverage Enhancement ................................................................................................................................ 221
7.1.1 GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology) .................................................................................. 221
7.1.2 GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity ...................................................................................................... 222
7.1.3 GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver Diversity .......................................................................................... 223
7.1.4 GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity ...................................................................................... 224
7.1.5 GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology) ................................................................. 225
7.1.6 GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage ........................................................................................ 227
7.1.7 GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing ............................................................................................. 228
7.1.8 GBFD-114001 Extended Cell ............................................................................................................. 230
7.2 Capacity Improvement ................................................................................................................................. 232
7.2.1 GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell ........................................................................................................... 232
7.2.2 GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell ........................................................................................................... 233
7.2.3 GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-band Network ................................................................................... 235
7.2.4 GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO ................................................................................................................. 236
7.2.5 GBFD-115801 ICC ............................................................................................................................. 237
7.2.6 GBFD-115821 EICC ........................................................................................................................... 238
7.2.7 GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) ............................................... 239
7.2.8 GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping ............................................................................ 241
7.2.9 GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping ...................................................................................... 242
7.2.10 GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing..................................................................... 244
7.2.11 GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation) ....................................................... 245
7.2.12 GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network ..................................................................................... 247
7.2.13 GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization ....................................................................................... 250
7.3 High Speed Moblility ................................................................................................................................... 251

Page 7 of 341
Public
7.3.1 GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) .................................................................... 251

7.3.2 GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover .................................................................................................. 252
7.3.3 GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover .................................................................................................. 253
7.3.4 GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell ............................................................................................................ 254
7.4 Intra-System Mobility Management ............................................................................................................ 256
7.4.1 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover ............................................................................................... 256
7.4.2 GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment ....................................................................................... 257
7.4.3 GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) ..................................................................... 258
7.4.4 GBFD-117101 BTS Power Lift for Handover .................................................................................... 260
7.5 GSM & WCDMA Interoperability ............................................................................................................... 261
7.5.1 GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability ................................................................................. 261
7.5.2 GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover .................................................................. 262
7.5.3 GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover ...................................................................... 263
7.5.4 GBFD-114323 GSM/WCDMA Cell Reselection Based on MS State ................................................ 264
7.5.5 GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release ..................................................... 266
7.5.6 GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g ............................................................ 267
7.5.7 GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA .......... 268
7.5.8 GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g ................................................. 270
7.5.9 GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g .................................................. 272
7.6 GSM & LTE Interoperability ....................................................................................................................... 273
7.6.1 GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE .................................................................. 273
7.6.2 GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage ........................................ 275
7.6.3 GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality ........................................... 276
7.6.4 GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load ....................................... 278
7.6.5 GBFD-511305 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Mode Priority................................. 279
7.6.6 GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover ..................................................................... 281
7.6.7 GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE ................................................................................... 283
7.6.8 GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE ................................................................................ 284
7.6.9 GBFD-511309 SRVCC ....................................................................................................................... 285
7.6.10 GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover ................................................ 287
7.6.11 GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release ........................................................... 288
7.6.12 GBFD-511313 CSFB ........................................................................................................................ 289
7.7 GSM & TD-SCDMA Interoperability .......................................................................................................... 290
7.7.1 GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability ............................................................................ 290
7.7.2 GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA ........................................................ 292
7.7.3 GBFD-511402 Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g ... 293
7.7.4 GBFD-511403 Extended BCCH ......................................................................................................... 295
8 Network Security ...................................................................................................................... 296

8.1 Security ........................................................................................................................................................ 296
8.1.1 GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm .......................................................................... 296
8.1.2 GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm .......................................................................................... 297

Page 8 of 341
Public
8.1.3 GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization .......................................................................... 298

8.1.4 GBFD-113522 Encrypted Network Management ............................................................................... 299
8.2 Reliability ..................................................................................................................................................... 301
8.2.1 GBFD-117801 Ring Topology ............................................................................................................ 301
8.2.2 GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation ....................................................................................................... 303
8.2.3 GBFD-117401 MSC Pool ................................................................................................................... 305
8.2.4 GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool ................................................................................................................. 307
8.2.5 GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass ................................................................................................................ 309
8.2.6 GBFD-113721 Robust Air Interface Signalling .................................................................................. 310
8.2.7 GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup ......................................................................................... 312
8.2.8 GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy .............................................................................................. 313
8.2.9 GBFD-113726 TC POOL ................................................................................................................... 314
8.2.10 GBFD-113728 OML Backup ............................................................................................................ 316
8.2.11 GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC) .................................................................................... 317
9 O&M Experience ....................................................................................................................... 319

9.1 O&M ............................................................................................................................................................ 319
9.1.1 GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking ....................................................................... 319
9.1.2 GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection ...................................................................................... 320
9.1.3 GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing ............................................................................. 322
9.1.4 GBFD-510901 GSM/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization ................................................. 324
9.2 Visualization & Data Collection ................................................................................................................... 326
9.2.1 GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation .................................................... 326
10 Acronyms and Abbreviations ............................................................................................... 328

Page 9 of 341
Public
Voice&Service
1.1 Crystal Voice

1.1.1 GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate
Availability
This feature is introduced in GBSS6.1.
Summary
The enhanced full rate (EFR) is an improved speech coding scheme. The quality of the speech
using EFR is better than that of the speech using FR.
Benefits
The user experience is improved because the voice quality in the EFR that uses the FR
channel resource approaches or even exceeds the voice quality in the ADPCM.
Description
The EFR is an improved speech coding scheme, which works at the rate of 12.2 kbit/s. The
quality of the voice using the FR channel resource in the EFR scheme approaches or even
exceeds the voice quality in the ADPCM scheme.
The EFR has good anti-noise performance. If the quality of the Um interface is good, you can
obtain the voice quality as good as the voice quality of the traditional wired telephone even if
there is a lot of background noise. Therefore, in the same air conditions, the subscriber can
perceive a better voice quality in the EFR than in the FR. In addition, the rate of the EFR is
lower than that of the FR (13 kbit/s). Thus, the BER sensitivity of EFR is lower than that of
FR. In this manner, the data can be transmitted more reliably on the Abis interface, which
further improves the voice quality.
The EFR is also compatible with the highest rate of the narrowband AMR.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1

Page 10 of 341
Public
The EFR is introduced in GBSS8.1 and it is used in A over TDM transmission.

If the EFR feature is supported by the MS and the BSC but not supported by the MSC, the
EFR feature can be forcibly enabled on the BSC. In this manner, the used speech version is
shielded on the MSC side to avoid assignment or handover failure. The forced EFR function
is mainly applied in the areas with poor voice quality to improve the voice quality.
GBSS13.0
E-coder is introduced in GBSS13.0 and it is used in A over TDM transmission.
E-coder improves the EFR speech quality by using the enhanced spectrum technique and LSP
exact-calculate technique. In this way, E-coder increases the Mean Opinion Score (MOS) by
0.05 to 0.12. E-coder, however, introduces an algorithm delay of 5 ms to an EFR encoder. In
A over IP or TFO, E-coder is not supported.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware
None
Impacts on the BTS hardware
Refer to the BTS dependency in the Feature List.
Dependency on other GBSS features
None
Dependency on other NEs
The MS must support this feature.
1.1.2 GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC)

Availability
Summary
This feature improves the user experience by checking the speech signals and then adjusting
the sound volume according to certain rules to keep the sound volume within the comfort
range.
Benefits
This feature can level out the difference between the sound volumes controlled by different
terminal manufacturers and thus balance the receive level adaptation of subscribers in
different areas. In this manner, the subscriber can perceive better voice quality.
Description
The ALC algorithm automatically controls the receive level. By evaluating the receive level
of the input signal, the ALC feature controls the gains of the input signal, adjusts the output
signal to a certain target receive level, and maintains the stability and comprehensibility of the

Page 11 of 341
Public
signal receive level. Thus, the subscriber can perceive comfort sound volume and good voice
quality.
The ALC has the following three modes:
Fixed level mode

The receive level of the signal is adjusted to a fixed target value based on the receive
level of the input voice.
Adaptive level mode

The receive level of the signal is adaptively adjusted to a value within a pre-determined
range based on the receive level of the input voice.
Fixed gain mode

The sound volume of the input signal is raised or lowered in a fixed proportion based on
the original sound volume.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.
GBSS12.0
The anti-clip (ACLP) algorithm is introduced in GBSS12.0.
The ACLP algorithm first corrects the signals with relatively great amplitude, quickly repairs
the speech wave, and then adjusts the volume. This improves the user experience.
The ACLP algorithm calculates the energy and spectrum characteristics of input speech
signals in real time. If too-high-level signals suffer from amplitude limiting and therefore
introduce distorted noises, the ACLP algorithm filters out distorted noises and performs
nonlinear volume adjustments to repair the signal wave according to spectrum characteristics.
In this manner, the user experience towards the voice quality is improved.

Page 12 of 341
Public
The volume is acceptable

but the distortion
remains.
The volume is too
great and signals are
distorted due to
amplitude limiting.
Repair the distorted

signals.
The volume is
acceptable and the
distortion is decreased.
The function of measuring and collecting statistics on signal levels online is introduced.
In GBSS12.0, the ALC algorithm can be used to measure and collect statistics on signal levels
online so that operators can monitor signal levels and learn the distribution of signal levels to
determine whether to enable the ALC algorithm for cells.
Dependency
None
This feature and the following features are mutually exclusive:
GBFD-118602 A over IP
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO

Page 13 of 341
Public
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch
None
1.1.3 GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)

Availability
Summary
The AEC identifies and cancels the acoustic echo after comparing the main features of
downlink voice and those of uplink voice after a period of delay.
Benefits
The AEC can reduce the acoustic echo generated by the MS, thus improving the network
voice quality and the user experience.
Description
The acoustic echo refers to the situation that the sound wave from one MS speaker is reflected
to the microphone (MIC) and the speech signal is sent back to the other MS because of the
characteristics of the MS. The acoustic echo generated by the MS is mainly related to the fact
that the MS speaker is too close to the MIC and thus the sound wave attenuation is
insufficient.
During the call, the input voice from the CN is retained through the AEC module of the TC.
After a period of delay, the remote input voice from the CN is compared with the local voice
from the MS. If the codes of similar characteristics exist, it is considered that the local voice
is the echo of the remote voice. Then, the echo is handled nonlinearly and replaced with
comfort noise. In this manner, the original voice from the MIC is canceled, and thus the user
experience is improved.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The AEC algorithm performance is optimized.
Dependency
None

Page 14 of 341
Public

GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO
None
1.1.4 GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)

Availability
Summary
The ANR feature constrains the background noise during the call, reduces the receive level of
the noise, and thus increases the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
Benefits
By suppressing the background noise during the call, the ANR makes the voice clear, thus
improving the user experience.
Description
The ANR distinguishes voice information from background noise based on the characteristics
of the input speech signal in different time domains and frequency domains. Then, the ANR
reduces and suppresses the background noise according to a certain algorithm. By reducing
the receive level of the noise and increasing the SNR, the ANR improves the user experience
without affecting the authentic voice.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.
Dependency
None

Page 15 of 341
Public

GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO
None
1.1.5 GBFD-115701 TFO

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the TFO frames are transparently transmitted and encoding/decoding is
bypassed through the bit stealing scheme between the TCs at two ends. Thus, the process of
encoding/decoding is reduced once.
Benefits
The speech signals are deteriorated with each encoding/decoding. Thus, using TFO to bypass
encoding/decoding can improve the voice quality. In the case of encoding/decoding of lower
rate, the voice quality is more evidently improved.
Description
For traditional mobile network system without TFO, the voice signal is encoded by the MS on
one side and transmitted over the radio interface. The signal is then decoded by the first TC
unit. The decoded PCM data flow is transmitted to the second TC unit through the 64 kbit/s
transmission link for encoding. After being encoded, the data is transmitted to the MS on the
other side over the radio interface for decoding. During the whole conversation, the speech is
transcoded two times, which is called tandem operation.
Transcoding Functions
PLMN A
MS/UE
Encoding
Transcoding
Function
Transcoding
Function
Compressed Speech
Decoding
ITU-T G.711 A-Law/-Law
Encoding
PLMN B
MS/UE
Compressed Speech
Decoding
The TFO feature can reduce the speech signal degradation caused by tandem operation, thus
improving the voice quality. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same speech

Page 16 of 341
Public
version, the TFO link is established through the in-band signaling negotiation. In addition, the
least significant bit (or the second least significant bit) is stolen to seize the 8 kbit/s (or 16
kbit/s) sublink of the PCM transmission link for transparent transmission of TFO frames and
bypass TC encoding/decoding. In this manner, the speech signal is encoded at the MS
initiating the call and decoded at the MS terminating the call for only once. Thus, the
degradation of the speech signals due to tandem operation is reduced and the voice quality is
improved. This process is called tandem free operation (TFO).
Transcoding Functions Bypassed
PLMN A
MS/UE
Transcoding
Function
Transcoding
Function
PLMN B
Compressed Speech
Encoding
MS/UE
Decoding
Enhancement
GBSS 8.1
The AMR TFO is supported.
GBSS9.0
Conversion between the FR and HR in the TFO: During the negotiation of the TFO, if the
channel (FR or HR) used by the called party is different from the channel (HR or FR) used by
the calling party, the call is handed over from the FR channel to an HR channel before the
TFO. This feature improves the voice quality of the HR call.
Dependency
None
When a call using TFO feature, the following features can't be used together:
GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC)
GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)
GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment
GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch AMR Rate Adaptation Under BTS Local Switch
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch AMR Rate Adaptation Under BSC Local Switch

Page 17 of 341
Public
None
1.1.6 GBFD-115702 TrFO

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the calling MS and called MS use the same speech coding scheme. Thus,
the speech signal is coded at the calling MS once and decoded at the called MS once. This can
solve the problem that the TRAU repeatedly codes and decodes the speech signal.
Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
The TrFO feature enables the calling MS and called MS to use the same speech coding,
which prevents the repeated coding and decoding during the MS-MS call process. This
provides better speech quality for users.
In addition, the TRAU is not involved in the TrFO, thus saving the TC resources.
Repeated coding and decoding
Description
In the traditional MS-MS call process where the TFO/TrFO is not adopted, the speech
signal is coded at the calling MS, transmitted on the Um interface, and is then decoded at
the first TRAU. The decoded PCM data flow is transmitted on the 64 kbit/s link to the
second TRAU for coding and is then transmitted on the Um interface to the called MS
for decoding. In the MS-MS call process, the coding and decoding are continually
performed twice. This is referred to as repeated coding and decoding.
Overview of TrFO
The TrFO feature enables the calling MS and called MS to use the same speech coding.
Thus, the speech signal is coded at the calling MS only once and decoded at the called
MS only once. This solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeated coding and
decoding, thus improving the signal quality.
In the GSM network, the coding capability of each cell can be dynamically configured.
The coding scheme of the Um interface is determined by the BSS. When implementing
the TrFO, the MSC server selects the speech version supported by the cells where the
calling MS and called MS are located based on the coding capability of the cells. Then,
the MSC sets the expected speech version to a highest value. In this way, the TrFO can
be successfully implemented.
1) The BSC selects the speech version according to the Preferred Codec List carried in
the assignment request sent by the MSC.
2) To improve the success rate of TrFO, the BSC sends the Complete Layer 3
Information message carrying the coding schemes supported by the cells to the MSC.
3) To perform the TrFO services on the established calls, the MSC sends the INTERNAL
HANDOVER ENQUIRY message carrying the specified Speech Codec to the BSC to
trigger the intra-BSC handover.
Differences between TrFO and TFO

Page 18 of 341
Public
Both TrFO and TFO use the speech compression in the CN. Both features avoid the
repeated code conversions during the MS-MS call and improve the QoS. The two
features, however, are different from each other. TFO is enabled, disabled, and controlled
by the TRAU after a call is established. When the encoder and decoder use the same
coding/decoding scheme, the TFO is enabled to transmit the compressed speech. TrFO,
however, does not require the TRAU. It uses the OoBTC to negotiate the
coding/decoding type of both the calling MS and called MS before the call is established.
Then, the compressed speech is transmitted after the call is established.
If the requirement for TrFO is not met, it takes some time to configure the TRAU for
restoring the PCM coding/decoding. Without the TRAU, the call fails. In TFO, however,
the PCM coding is immediately used when the requirement for TFO is not met. Thus, the
speech quality is not affected.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature depends on the following features:
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115711 EVAD

The CN must support this feature.

Page 19 of 341
Public
1.1.7 GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)

Availability
Summary
Through the assessment of the background noise of the local end and the speech level of the
peer end, this feature adaptively increases the speech volume of the peer end if the
background noise of the local end is heavy. Thus, the ratio of the peer end speech to the
background noise of the local end is increased and the speech quality is improved.
Benefits
Good speech quality is a basic requirement for a superior network. It is also the basic
requirement of the customer and helps in testing the product of the equipment manufacturers.
The problems such as acoustic echo, background noise, and packet loss must be solved to
ensure the speech quality. In addition, the gain of the signals should be controlled. Different
manufacturers have different algorithms and features to solve these problems.
Huawei GBSS uses the ANC feature to improve the speech quality in the scenarios with
heavy background noise such as in the downtown, marketplace, and cinema. Thus, the user
satisfaction is increased and a network with enhanced performance is provided.
Description
The ANC compensates the noise through the algorithm. Through the assessment of the
background noise of the local end and the speech level of the peer end, this feature adaptively
increases the speech volume of the peer end if the background noise of the local end is heavy.
Thus, the ratio of the peer end speech to the background noise of the local end is increased so
that the listener can clearly hear the speaker.
This feature is disabled by default. The ANC threshold is the ratio of the peer end speech to
the background noise of the local end, which can be manually configured. The maximum
adjustment range is the maximum gain of the ANC, which can also be manually configured.
For the speech handling, refer to the ITU-T G.169 specifications.
This feature is a feature of the TC devices and cannot be used together with the TrFO or TFO.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 20 of 341
Public
It is recommended working with the following features:

GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO
None
1.1.8 GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment

(EPLC)
Availability
Summary
This feature applies to the EFR, AMR FR, and AMR HR speech versions.
When the BSS receives the speech coding, the frames of the lost packets can be recovered and
compensated through the algorithm. Thus, the anti-interference capabilities of the EFR, AMR
FR, and AMR HR speech versions and the speech quality are improved.
Benefits
With this feature, the frames of the lost packets can be recovered and compensated. This, to a
certain extent, solves the problem of speech frame loss during transmission and in a poor
radio environment. Thus, the speech quality is improved, the user satisfaction is improved,
and a network with enhanced performance is provided.
In the case of packet loss of different severity levels, the MOS can be increased by 0~0.2.
Description
The problems such as acoustic echo, background noise, and packet loss must be handled to
ensure the speech quality. In addition, the gain of the signals should be controlled. Different
manufacturers have different algorithms and features to solve these problems.
This feature uses the patented algorithm to restore the lost frames during the transmission and
in a poor radio environment based on the information about the previous frame. This
implements the compensation for the frames of the lost packets.

Page 21 of 341
Public
This feature is a feature of the TC devices. It is used to process the AMR and EFR speech and
controlled by a switch. This feature cannot be used together with the TrFO or TFO because
the TC is not involved in the TrFO or TFO.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
The packet loss prediction algorithm is optimized so that the received voice gets closer to the
original voice in fidelity, improving user experience.
Dependency
None
GBFD-115501 AMR FR or GBFD-115502 AMR HR or GBFD-113301 EFR
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO
None
1.1.9 GBFD-115711 EVAD

Availability
Summary
This feature helps telecom operators promote their value-added music services.

Page 22 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature enhances the encoding effect of music (such as ring back tone (RBT) service and
voice information service) that uses the EFR, AMR FR, or AMR HR codecs and therefore
improves the user experience.
Description
The earlier Voice Activity Detection (VAD) algorithm may consider soft music as silence and
mistakenly encode music in the downlink. This affects user experience.
The Huawei proprietary Enhanced VAD (EVAD) algorithm increase music recognition
accuracy. It greatly reduces the probability that music is mistakenly considered as silence,
improving user experience.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Dependency on other features of the GBSS
GBFD-115501 AMR FR or GBFD-115502 AMR HR or GBFD-113301 EFR
GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
If EVAD is enabled for a call, the following features cannot be enabled at the same time:
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO
This feature cannot be used with any of the following features:

None

Page 23 of 341
Public
1.1.10 GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index (VQI)

Availability
Summary
The voice quality index (VQI) feature provides a direct method of measuring the voice quality
of the radio network. By measuring the uplink VQI and downlink VQI, the voice quality of
the network is quantified, which provides a reference for future network optimization.
Benefits
The VQI can measure the voice quality of the network rapidly and effectively and thus
provide a reference for network optimization.
Description
The VQI establishes the mapping between the radio network performance and voice quality.
The VQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the parameters
related to the radio quality of the uplink/downlink speech signals. The MOS analysis method
is applied in VQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to assess the quality of the
middle-rate and low-rate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1 to 5.
Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11 levels.
The VQI is obtained through the analysis of the BER, FER, LFE, and CODE of the
uplink/downlink speech signal. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate the
identification of the voice problem and network optimization.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Downlink VQI depends on the following feature:
GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)

Page 24 of 341
Public
1.1.11 GBFD-115708 Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing

Availability
Summary
This feature automatically repairs the bit-error speech frames over the Um interface, thus
improving the voice quality. The feature is implemented by applying an enhanced decoding
technique to the Um interface.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the voice quality. The improvement is more significant when the
carrier-to-interference ratio (C/I) is low.
Description
When the bit error rate (BER) is high and the C/I is low, voice quality will deteriorate if
bit-error voice frames are discarded. To solve this problem, an enhanced decoding technique
is adopted to repair the erroneous speech frames over the Um interface. This technique
increases the success rate of voice decoding, thus improving the voice quality under low C/I.
After this feature is applied, the mean opinion score (MOS) can be increased by 0.1 to 0.2
under low C/I.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None

Page 25 of 341
Public
1.2 AMR Package

1.2.1 GBFD-115501 AMR FR
Availability
Summary
In a situation where interference is likely to occur, better voice quality can be provided if the
system uses AMR FR. In the same conditions, the voice quality in AMR FR is the same as or
better than the voice quality in EFR.
Benefits
This feature has the following benefits:
Increases the capacity of the system in physical areas.
Enhances the anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse.
Improves the network indexes in an increasingly complex radio environment in

combination with the frequency hopping technology.
Provides a better voice quality for the subscriber.
Description
The AMR is an integration of multiple voice encoding/decoding rates. With different
encoding/decoding rates, the voice code streams of different rates are yielded. The AMR
enables the BTS and MS to select an appropriate encoding/decoding algorithm and to adjust
the encoding rate based on the specific radio environment. Therefore, the voice quality of the
entire wireless communication system is improved.
When there is a lot of interference on the radio channels, better voice quality can be provided
in AMR FR than in EFR or FR. In addition, the system in AMR FR has a higher
anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse.
In the wireless communication system, the higher the original speech rate involved in channel
encoding, the more the information about the speech characteristics carried in the coded
stream and thus the higher the fidelity of the speech. However, the redundant information in
the coded stream decreases, and thus the coded stream becomes more interference sensitive.
In a poor wireless communication environment, bit errors occur easily and the speech frames
may be lost. Thus, voices may be discontinuous. If the original speech rate involved in
channel encoding is reduced, more redundant information is carried in the coded stream. Then
the coded stream has strong anti-interference and error correction capabilities. Thus, the
continuity of voice can be improved.
The AMR FR provides a selection of multiple coding rates from 4.75 kbit/s to 12.2 kbit/s, as
listed in the following table.
Channel
Coding Rate
TCH/AFS
12.2 kbit/s

Page 26 of 341
Public
Channel
Coding Rate
10.2 kbit/s
7.95 kbit/s
7.40 kbit/s
6.70 kbit/s
5.90 kbit/s
5.15 kbit/s
4.75 kbit/s
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The anti-interference capability of signaling transmission is enhanced in GBSS8.1.
If the original speech rate involved in channel encoding is reduced, the coded stream can
contain more redundant information. Then the coded stream has stronger anti-interference and
error correction capabilities and the voice continuity is improved as a result. The signaling
transmission performance, however, is not improved. After this feature is enabled, the
transmit power is increased during signaling transmission to increase the success rate of
signaling transmission. This can avoid voice interruption concerned with signaling
transmission in poor radio environment.
GBSS13.0
E-coder improves the AMR FR speech quality by using the enhanced spectrum technique and
LSP exact-calculate technique. In this way, E-coder increases the Mean Opinion Score (MOS)
by 0.05 to 0.12. In A over IP or TFO, E-coder is not supported.
Dependency
None
GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control
The MS and the CN must support this feature.

Page 27 of 341
Public
1.2.2 GBFD-115502 AMR HR

Availability
Summary
system uses AMR HR. In the same conditions, the voice quality in AMR HR is the same as or
better than that in HR. If the AMR HR feature is enabled, the half-rate speech feature must be
enabled at the same time.
Benefits
Increases the capacity of the system in physical areas.
Enhances the anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse.
Improves the network indexes in an increasingly complex radio environment in

combination with the frequency hopping technology.
Provides a better voice quality for the subscriber.
Description
system uses the AMR HR. In the same conditions, the voice quality in AMR HR is the same
as or better than that in HR. Therefore, if the communication quality meets the requirements,
the AMR HR can be widely used to increase the system capacity. When much interference
exists and the voice quality decreases, the system automatically switches to the AMR FR so
that the voice quality and the system capacity are balanced in real time. In this manner, the
system can provide good voice quality to subscribers when the system capacity is increased.
The AMR HR provides a selection of multiple coding rates, as listed in the following table.
Channel
Coding Rate
TCH/AHS
7.40 kbit/s
6.70 kbit/s
5.90 kbit/s
5.15 kbit/s
4.75 kbit/s
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The TCH/AHS 7.95 kbit/s coding rate is supported in GBSS8.1.

Page 28 of 341
Public
The BTS using the Abis over IP or Abis transmission optimization function can provide the
speech services with the coding rate of AMR HR 7.95 kbit/s. The following table lists
multiple coding rates of the AMR HR.
Channel
Coding Rate
TCH/AHS
7.95 kbit/s
7.40 kbit/s
6.70 kbit/s
5.90 kbit/s
5.15 kbit/s
4.75 kbit/s
Enhanced anti-interference capability of signaling transmission: If the original speech rate

involved in channel encoding is reduced, the coded stream can contain more redundant
information. Then the coded stream has stronger anti-interference and error correction
capabilities and the voice continuity is improved as a result. The signaling transmission
performance, however, is not improved. After this feature is enabled, the transmit power is
increased during signaling transmission to increase the success rate of signaling transmission.
This can avoid voice interruption due to signaling transmission in poor radio environment.
GBSS13.0
E-coder improves the AMR HR speech quality by using the enhanced spectrum technique and
LSP exact-calculate technique. In this way, E-coder increases the Mean Opinion Score (MOS)
by 0.05 to 0.12. In A over IP or TFO, E-coder is not supported.
Dependency
None
This feature depends on:
GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control

Page 29 of 341
Public
1.2.3 GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control

Availability
Summary
Using different AMR power control algorithms, this feature can provide better
anti-interference capability, larger network capacity, and better voice quality.
Benefits
Reduces the transmit power and prolongs the standby time of the MS.
Reduces the network interference and improves the frequency usage.
Improves the network quality.
Description
The AMR speech codec can select one of the coding rates according to the radio channel
quality to achieve an optimized combination of speech coding rate and channel coding rate. In
this manner, the AMR speech codec can provide the best voice quality in the current radio
environment and meet the communication requirements in various radio environments. The
coded stream contains more redundant information. Then the coded stream has stronger
anti-interference and error correction capabilities and the voice continuity is improved as a
result. The system automatically decides whether to adopt the AMR. If the system uses the
AMR, the power control strategy for the AMR calling is different from that for the non-AMR
calling. In this manner, the network interference is reduced, the BTS transmit power is saved,
and the standby time of MS is prolonged.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-115501 AMR FR
GBFD-115502 AMR HR

Page 30 of 341
Public
None
1.2.4 GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment

Availability
Summary
Through the dynamic adjustment of AMR HR and AMR FR, the cell capacity and the voice
quality are balanced.
Benefits
Less maintenance work is required because the system can automatically adjust the ratio
of AMR FR to AMR HR based on the network capacity and quality.
This feature expands the network capacity and reduces the network deployment cost
without degrading the voice quality.
Description
Through the dynamic adjustment of AMR HR and AMR FR, this feature helps to balance the
cell capacity and the voice quality.
After completing the initial voice coding after setting up a call, the BSS calculates the radio
quality index (RQI) based on the uplink signal quality measured by the BTS. Then, based on
the uplink quality, the code sets activated by the BSC, and the corresponding thresholds, the
system determines the encoding/decoding scheme used for the uplink. In addition, the system
dynamically adjusts the voice coding rate in the uplink, and informs the MS to use the
selected voice coding rate. According to the RQI and parameters such as network capacity, the
BSS decides whether to enable the AMR FR/HR dynamic adjustment in the cell to balance
the voice quality and the cell capacity.
The AMR FR/HR dynamic adjustment in different radio environments and capacity
configurations helps to balance the voice quality and the cell capacity. Before enabling the
AMR FR/HR dynamic adjustment feature, you must enable the half rate speech and AMR HR
features.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Page 31 of 341
Public
None
None
1.2.5 GBFD-115505 AMR Radio Link Timer

Availability
Summary
The radio link timer is used for the detection of the radio link quality. When the timer expires
due to poor radio link quality, the system deactivates the radio channel and interrupts the
conversation. In this manner, the timer can improve the channel utilization and prevent
channels with poor quality from occupying radio channel resources for a long time.
Benefits
Prolongs the duration of the AMR voice service with high anti-interference capability
and thus reduces the call drop rate by setting the radio link timer of AMR voice service
and that of non-AMR voice service separately.
Improves the user experience and increases the operators' revenue by prolonging the
AMR call duration in the network of poor radio link quality.
Description
This feature provides a special radio link timer for AMR calls. AMR calls enjoy higher
robustness than common calls. Therefore, when a common call fails due to poor radio link
quality, the AMR voice service can maintain good conversation quality. If the radio link timer
of the AMR call and that of a common call are set to the same value, the chance of AMR call
drop increases and the user experience is deteriorated. In this case, you should set the AMR
radio link timer to a greater value so that the AMR call endures the poor radio environment
and the call drop rate is reduced.
You can configure the radio link timers for the AMR HR and the AMR FR separately.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 32 of 341
Public
None
None
1.2.6 GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive

Adjustment
Availability
Summary
Through the setting of the target voice quality and the real-time monitoring of the current
voice quality, the GBSS devices can adjust the coding rate adjustment threshold so that the
AMR speech can select an appropriate coding rate to enable the voice quality to approach the
target voice quality.
Benefits
Enables the AMR speech to select an appropriate coding rate.
Ensures the performance of the AMR speech.
Description
The AMR speech rate set consists of multiple coding rates. Based on the measured receive
level, receive quality, and carrier-to-interference ratio, and in combination with the algorithm,
the BTS and MS adjust the AMR call control parameters to select a speech source coding rate
that adapts to the existing radio environment. The appropriate selection helps achieve an
optimal combination of the channel quality and speech coding rate and improve the voice
quality to the greatest extent in the existing radio environment.
Generally, network planning engineers set the AMR speech coding rate adjustment threshold
to a fixed value after assessing the radio channel quality. If the radio channel quality changes
or the network planning engineers assessment of the radio channel quality is inaccurate, the
AMR speech will fail to select an appropriate coding rate. The AMR voice quality is then
affected.
Based on the setting of the target voice quality and the real-time monitoring of the current
voice quality, this feature adjusts the coding rate adjustment threshold so that an appropriate
coding rate can be selected to ensure the AMR voice quality.
The AMR coding rate adjustment threshold involves the adjustment threshold on the uplink
and the adjustment threshold on the downlink.
Uplink: After comparing the uplink quality indication with the coding rate adjustment
threshold, the BTS obtains an appropriate coding rate for the MS. Then, the BTS sends this
coding rate to the MS through the in-band signaling for adjusting the coding rate.
Downlink: After comparing the downlink quality indication with the coding rate adjustment
threshold, the MS obtains an appropriate coding rate for the BTS. Then, the MS sends this
coding rate to the BTS through the in-band signaling. The BTS comprehensively considers
Page 33 of 341
Public
the restrictions on the network side and then adjusts the downlink coding rate. Meanwhile, the
BTS notifies the MS of the selected downlink coding rate so that the MS uses the same
coding rate for decoding.
GBSS8.1 supports the AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment on the uplink.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment on the downlink: The AMR coding rate
threshold is used to control the selection of the AMR coding rate. When the threshold is fixed,
the AMR speech cannot select an appropriate coding rate if the radio channel quality changes
or the network planning engineers assessment of the radio channel quality is inaccurate. The
AMR voice quality is then affected.
This feature enhancement supports the adaptive adjustment of the AMR coding rate
adjustment threshold on the downlink based on the speech quality. The BTS obtains the frame
erase ratio (FER) of the current call based on the enhanced measurement report (EMR)
submitted by the MS and then estimates the speech quality (SQ). If the estimated speech
quality is distinct from the target speech quality, you can infer that the configured threshold is
inappropriate. Then, the GBSS adjusts the threshold based on certain algorithm. The BTS
sends the adjusted AMR coding rate threshold to the MS through the robust AMR traffic
synchronized control channel (RATSCCH). Subsequently, the MS adjusts the AMR coding
rate during the call on the basis of this coding rate adjustment threshold.
Dependency
None
Dependency on other functions of the GBSS
AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment on the downlink depends on the following
feature:
GBFD-115501 AMR FR
GBFD-115502 AMR HR
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features:
GBFD-115701 TFO

Page 34 of 341
Public
None
1.2.7 GBFD-115507 WB AMR

Availability
Summary
Wide Band AMR (WB AMR) is a coding scheme, which significantly improves the speech
quality. WB AMR supports the rates of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s.
Benefits
Compared with the narrow band AMR, WB AMR achieves better speech quality.
Because the speech quality is improved, subscribers tend to spend more time on the call.
This increases the revenue of the operators.
The better speech quality of WB AMR than that of PSTN assists the wireless operators
in prompting subscribers of fixed networks to switch over to wireless networks.
Description
WB AMR is a coding scheme that can significantly improve speech quality. With WB AMR,
the sampling rate is increased to 16 kHz and the speech frequency range is extended to 0.057
kHz. WB AMR provides clear and loud voice and high-quality speech compared with the
narrow band AMR with the sampling rate of 8 kHz and the speech frequency range between
200 Hz and 3400 Hz.
WB AMR adopts the Guassian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) mode and supports the rates
of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s on full-rate TCHs.
To achieve ideal speech quality, the end-to-end WB AMR call should be implemented. The
one-end WB AMR call requires two-time PCM codec, which adversely affects the speech
quality. When the end-to-end WB AMR and the TFO are used together, a call needs only
one-time codec, which helps to maintain high speech quality. If the end-to-end WB AMR call
cannot be established, the BSC will set up an AMR FR call instead of the one-end WB AMR
call because the speech quality and robustness of the one-end WB AMR call are not
necessarily better than those of the AMR FR call. Huawei BSS equipment supports the WB
AMR feature in Abis over TDM, Abis over IP, and Abis over HDLC transmission modes.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 35 of 341
Public

None
The MS, BTS, and MGW/MSC server must support this feature.
1.3 Voice Capacity

1.3.1 GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the speech coding rate is reduced to half the full-rate speech coding rate
through a new speech coding algorithm. In this manner, the physical channel carrying the
service of one MS is able to carry the services of two MSs.
Benefits
This feature enables the operator to expand the network capacity and improve the frequency
usage without increasing the hardware investment. In addition, a higher traffic volume can be
carried on an E1.
Description
With the increase of the GSM subscribers, the frequency resources of the existing GSM
network are insufficient. The half-rate service helps increase the number of speech channels
configured for one TRX. This increases the frequency usage without greatly reducing the
voice quality and expands the network capacity without increasing the hardware investment.
The half-rate service has the following benefits:
Saving the resource on the Um interface

The half-rate speech coding rate is reduced to half the full-rate speech coding rate
through the new coding algorithm. In addition, the multiframes on the Um interface are
used by two MSs with one MS receiving the even-numbered multiframes and the other
MS receiving the odd-numbered multiframes. In this manner, the physical channel that
supports one MS in the full-rate service can carry two MSs in the half-rate service. The
entire network interference is reduced because fewer timeslots are seized.
Saving the resource on the Abis interface

In half-rate service, one 16 kbit/s channel carries two calls on the Abis terrestrial circuit.
In this manner, a higher traffic volume is carried on the terrestrial link. The load on the
RSL, however, is heavy because one TRX carries a higher traffic volume. Therefore,
when configuring signaling multiplexing, use the 2:1 mode instead of the 4:1 mode.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0

Page 36 of 341
Public
The half-rate service can be used to save the resources on the Ater interface.
When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the 8 kbit/s circuit is allocated to the half-rate call over
the Ater interface. In this manner, the transmission resources on the Ater interface are saved.
GBSS8.1
The half-rate channel is preferentially allocated when transmission resource congestion occurs
on the Abis interface.
The half-rate channel is allocated based on the resource congestion condition on the Abis
interface. The load on the Abis interface is calculated in real time. When the resources on the
Abis interface are congested, the BSC preferentially allocates a half-rate speech channel to a
call to relieve the resource congestion.
The dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels is triggered when resource
congestion occurs on the Um or Abis interface.
The dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels is triggered based on the
resource congestion condition on the Um or Abis interface. When the resources are congested,
the conversion from the full-rate call to the half-rate call can relieve the congestion.
Dependency
None
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis
GBFD-116901 Flex Ater
The MS and the MSC must support this feature.
1.3.2 GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the full-rate (FR) channels and the half-rate (HR) channels are dynamically
converted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell
during the call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested
whereas the other type of channel is idle can be prevented.

Page 37 of 341
Public
Benefits
Improves the channel usage because the channel is adjusted according to the requirement
of the call.
Reduces the workload of the network OM personnel because the full-rate channel and
the half-rate channel are automatically converted.
Description
If the half-rate channel is configured, the full-rate channel and the half-rate channel are
dynamically converted as required to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels
and HR channels in a cell during the call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of
channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle can be prevented. In addition,
the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell can be controlled through related
parameters.
During the call, the channel is allocated based on the resources in the MS, MSC, and BSC. If
a half-rate channel is required but is unavailable, a full-rate channel is converted into two
half-rate channels. If a full-rate channel is required but is unavailable, the half-rate channels
are converted into full-rate channels.
Each time a call is released, the attributes of the channel are not changed and the converted
channel is not immediately switched back to its original form. If the load of the cell is normal,
the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell are maintained at a certain value
through the automatic adjustment of the calls. The conversion between the half-rate channels
and the full-rate channels occurs when the load of the cell is high or when the congestion
occurs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature depends on the following feature:
GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
None

Page 38 of 341
Public
1.3.3 GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the established calls can be handed over between half-rate channels and
full-rate channels based on the usage of channel resources. In this manner, the balance
between the network quality and the cell capacity is maintained.
Benefits
When the traffic volume is low, calls are handed over from half-rate channels to full-rate
channels, thus improving the voice quality.
When the TCHs in a cell are insufficient, calls are handed over from full-rate channels to
half-rate channels, thus increasing the cell capacity.
Description
During call establishment, the network assigns a half-rate or a full-rate channel to the call
based on the usage of the cell resources. In the case of a long-duration call, the usage of the
cell resources may change: During the call establishment phase, if the TCH seizure rate is
high, a half-rate channel is assigned to the call. After the call lasts for a period, many calls are
released and the TCH seizure rate decreases. In this case, TCHs in the cell are sufficient and a
full-rate channel can be assigned to the call to improve the voice quality. If the TCH seizure
rate is low during the call establishment, a full-rate TCH may be assigned to the call. After the
call lasts for a period, many calls access the cell and the TCH seizure rate increases. In this
case, the available TCHs in the cell are insufficient.
If the dynamic adjustment between full-rate and half-rate channels is enabled, the
half-rate/full-rate channels of established calls can be adjusted based on the usage of cell
resources. When the TCHs in a cell are sufficient, full-rate channels are preferably assigned to
new calls and calls with poor communication quality can be handed over from half-rate
channels to full-rate channels, thus improving the communication quality. When the TCHs in
a cell are insufficient, half-rate channels are preferably assigned to new calls and calls with
good communication quality may be handed over from full-rate channels to half-rate channels,
thus increasing the cell capacity.
When this feature is enabled, the half-rate speech feature needs to be enabled at the same
time.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 39 of 341
Public

None
None
1.3.4 GBFD-115830 VAMOS

Availability
Summary
Voice services over Adaptive Multi-user Orthogonal Subchannels (VAMOS) is a feature based
on which two users are multiplexed onto one HR channel to increase network capacity.
VAMOS helps increase the network capacity.
Benefits
In a network where refarming is applied and speech channels are insufficient, the GSM
network capacity can be increased through software without changing the existing GSM
network architecture. The network capacity increase by VAMOS is 20% in the scenarios that
100% SAIC MS penetration rate and 4x3 frequency reuse pattern.
Description
VAMOS is a technology to increase GSM network capacity.The network capacity is increased
by using half rate(HR) channels and can be increased further by VAMOS based on the full
rate(FR) channels. Tests tell that the VAMOS performance depends on the penetration rate of
the MS and the frequency reuse pattern.
VAMOS degrades network quality while increasing network capacity. This must be tolerated
by the operator. According to the network quality standard specified in 3GPP, when the frame
error rate (FER) of 95% users is lower than 3% and the speech version is AHS5.9, the
network capacity gains brought by VAMOS are listed as in the following table.
Frequency Reuse Pattern
MS Penetration
1/3
3/9
4/12
SAIC penetration rate 50%
5%-10%
7%-12%
10%-15%
7%-15%
10%-18%
15%-22%
10%-20%
15%-25%
20%-30%

Page 40 of 341
Public
The preceding table tells that the network capacity is not increased when the frequency reuse
is tight. Therefore, VAMOS can be enabled only when the frequency reuse is loose. The
network need to support uplink dual-receive.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
It depends on the following features:
GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
GBFD-115502 AMR HR or GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC
TDM transmission:GBFD-117301 Flex AbisIP transmission:GBFD-118601 Abis over
IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
This feature is recommended working with the following features:

GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm
GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm
GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell
GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
GBFD-117002 IBCA
GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell

Page 41 of 341
Public

MS
1.3.5 GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification

Availability
Summary
Mute SAIC MS Identification is a function based on which the SAIC-capable MSs that do not
report their SAIC capability to the BSS are identified so that the MSs can use VAMOS.
Benefits
This feature helps identify the MS capability correctly so that the SAIC-capable MSs can use
VAMOS. This increases the number of MSs that use VAMOS, thus increasing the network
capacity.
Description
Some mute SAIC MSs support SAIC but do not report the SAIC capability to the BSS. As a
result, the number of MSs that can be multiplexed by VAMOS is smaller than what it actually
is, and thus the network capacity is limited.
This feature helps distinguish SAIC-capable MSs from SAIC-incapable MSs so that the
SAIC-capable MSs can use VAMOS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature is used together with the following features:
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
GBFD-115701 TFO

Page 42 of 341
Public
GBFD-115702 TrFO
1.3.6 GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution

Availability
Summary
VAMOS Call Drop Solution is a function based on which call drops do not occur when the
MS is paired with VAMOS so that the system capacity and voice quality are not affected.
Benefits
With this feature, call drops no longer occur when the SAIC-capable MS use VAMOS. In this
manner, the network capacity is increased and services remain normal.
Description
Mainstream multi-mode MSs report the SAIC capability to the BSS. Call drops, however,
frequently occur when the MSs use VAMOS. Tests tell that this is caused by defective
automatic frequency control (AFC) of the MSs in the case of VAMOS multiplexing. This
feature prevents call drops of SAIC-capable MSs.
This feature involves the following processes:
1. The BSS distinguishes the normal SAIC-capable MSs (that experience call drops) from the
defective ones (that do not experience call drops).
2. Processing is performed on the defective ones that do not experience call drops in the case
of VAMOS multiplexing.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature is used together with the following features:
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
Page 43 of 341
Public

GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO
1.4 Cell Broadcast

1.4.1 GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)
Availability
Summary
The short message service cell broadcast (SMSCB) is a teleservice (TS23) through which all
the MSs in the specified area can periodically receive messages.
Benefits
The SMSCB can increase the revenue of the operator by providing weather forecast, stock
information, and sales promotion information based on the location of the MS.
Description
The SMSCB is a teleservice that periodically broadcasts messages to all the MSs in a
specified area. Based on different settings, the MS can continuously or discontinuously
receive short messages, such as weather forecast and traffic information.
The SMSCB allows all the MSs in a specified area to receive short messages. The area may
cover one or more cells, or the entire PLMN. The short messages from the cell broadcast
center (CBC) are managed and scheduled in the CDB of the BSC, which sends the short
messages to the BTS. The BTS then broadcasts the messages to all the MSs in a specified area
at certain intervals.
The CDB receives and stores the short messages, schedules and sends the messages according
to a certain algorithm, and responds to the query from the CBC.
The MS can receive the messages in DRX mode. That is, the MS can work discontinuously.
Through a scheduling message, the BSC notifies the MS that no short message is sent during

Page 44 of 341
Public
a period. Therefore, the MS needs to receive the short messages only in the specified period
and need not detect the messages continuously. Thus, the power consumption is reduced.
The SMSCB supports the BTS flow control. That is, the order in which the short messages are
sent is scheduled by the CDB, but the sending of the messages is implemented by the BTS.
Each TRX of the BTS maintains one message buffer and periodically sends the cell broadcast
short message on a specified channel. When the messages are not sent in time, the BTS
reports the out-of-synchronization situation to the BSC through a LOAD IND message. By
controlling the BTS flow, the CDB maintains the balance of the cell broadcast system and
thus meets the requirements of the message sending.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive:
GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast
The CBC should be used.
1.4.2 GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast

Availability
Summary
This feature is implemented by using a built-in cell broadcast processing module in the BSC
in the case that a CBC is not used.
Benefits
Without a CBC, Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature supports the most commonly used
standard cell broadcast services with low equipment costs and low OM costs, thus reducing
the operator's CAPEX.
Description
With the SMSCB function, short messages are broadcast to all MSs in one or several cells, or
even in the entire PLMN. The MSs can receive the broadcast messages continuously or
discontinuously.
Page 45 of 341
Public
Generally, a CBC is responsible for managing and scheduling the SMSCB.

Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature is performed through a built-in cell broadcast
processing module in the BSC, thus reducing the equipment costs.
Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature is performed to broadcast messages such as the cell
name, weather forecast, and social welfare messages. These functions are described as
follows:
Information broadcast function

Messages are broadcast, such as the BTS name, cell name, weather forecast, and any
character string with a maximum of 80 characters.
Information timing broadcast function

Cell broadcast messages are sent at specified intervals during a specified period of time.
Information management function

The MML commands are used to start or stop sending the broadcast messages in
specified cells or all cells, or stop sending a specified cell broadcast message. In addition,
the cell broadcast status can be viewed by running the MML commands.
In any period of time, a maximum of 16 cell broadcast short messages can be sent
simultaneously in one cell.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
A maximum of 64 cell broadcast short messages can be sent simultaneously in one cell.
Dependency
None
GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).
None
1.5 GSM Trunking

1.5.1 GBFD-510301 Public Voice Group Call Service
Availability

Page 46 of 341
Public
Summary
The public voice group call service (VGCS) adopts the half-duplex mode and provides voice
services for a group of pre-defined MSs in a pre-defined area.
Benefits
With this feature, operators can provide a new half-duplex voice service for a group of
subscribers to meet the requirement of dispatching service. This service focuses on enterprise
users and government users. This service is called GSM Digital Trunking or Public Access
Mobile Radio (PAMR). Compared with multiparty communication service, VGCS can greatly
reduce the occupancy of radio channels and improve the utilization of radio channel
resources.
Description
VGCS simultaneously provides voice services for a group of MSs in a pre-defined area in
half-duplex mode.
The network side defines the group call number, group members and coverage area. The MS
who has the permission can dial the group call number to initiate a group call. All the group
members within the coverage area can be informed to join the group call. One of the group
members can press and hold PTT on the mobile phone to speak to others. During this period,
other members can only listen but cannot talk by pressing PTT. Other group members can
speak by pressing PTT only after the talker releases PTT. When the conversation is complete,
the VGCS originator terminates the call by pressing the on-hook key and then all the group
members hang up.
In addition, the VGCS provides dispatcher service. The dispatcher is a special user of the
fixed network or the mobile network defined by the network side. The dispatcher has the
permission to talk at any time during a VGCS call and originates or terminates a VGCS call
authorized by the network side.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-118601 Abis IP(Not exclusive in GBSS13.0 and later version)
This feature should be supported by the MSC, HLR, and MS.

Page 47 of 341
Public
1.5.2 GBFD-510303 Late Group Channel Assignment

Availability
Summary
After a VGCS call is established, if no group member involved in the call is in the cell within
the predefined coverage area, the VGCS traffic channel is not assigned. If a group member
accesses the cell during the VGCS call, then the network side assigns a traffic channel for the
call.
Benefits
This feature effectively saves the radio channel resources when operators promote
VGCS-based services.
Description
During VGCS, the voice of the talker is sent to other group members through the VGCS
channel of the cell. If no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the coverage
area, the VGCS channel is actually idle.
With this feature, the network side sends a VGCS call notice periodically in each cell within
the coverage area and the cell in which group members exist receives the response of the MS.
Then, the network side assigns a VGCS channel for the cell and notifies the group members
to join the VGCS call. The cells that do not respond are not assigned VGCS channels.
In addition, the network side periodically detects the MSs of all the cells within the coverage
area. If no group member involved in the VGCS call exists in a cell due to some reason, for
example, outgoing cell handover, the network side releases the VGCS channel assigned to the
cell.
Dependency
None

Page 48 of 341
Public
1.5.3 GBFD-510305 Single Channel Group Call Originating

Availability
Summary
When a VGCS/VBS call is originated, only one TCH is occupied.
Benefits
When a VGCS/VBS call is originated, the originating cell needs only one TCH. This
improves the utilization of frequency resources, reducing the congestion rate of TCHs during
busy hours, and enhancing the QoS of network.
Description
When a VGCS/VBS call is originated, the originating cell requires two TCHs by default,
where one TCH is a VGCS/VBS channel and the other TCH is used for the originator to talk
before a VGCS/VBS call is established. After the VGCS/VBS call is established, the network
switches the originator to the VGCS/VBS channel and then releases the TCH that is assigned
initially. This is called dual-channel group call originating.
In the single channel group call originating mode, the BSS switches the VGCS/VBS
originator from the SDCCH to the VGCS/VBS channel directly. In the entire VGCS/VBS
originating phase, no more traffic channels are occupied.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 49 of 341
Public
1.5.4 GBFD-510306 Talker Identification

Availability
Summary
During a VGCS/VBS call, the real-time information of the current talker is displayed on each
MS of the subscriber involved in the call.
Benefits
Talker identification is a supplementary function of GSM Digital Trunking services, which
enables the MSs involved in a VGCS call to display the information regarding the talker such
as telephone number, subscriber name, and priority within the group. In this way, the group
members can obtain the real-time information of the current talker and determine whether to
initiate PTT preemption within the group.
Description
Like the function of Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP), talker identification
allows the information of the current talker to be displayed in real time on the MSs in the
VGCS/VBS. The information includes telephone number (subscriber name in the phonebook)
and priority.
During a VGCS/VBS call, the network side periodically broadcasts the talk information
including the MSISDN of the talker and the priorities of group members in the cell within the
coverage area. After receiving the information, the MSs of other subscribers display the
information of the current talker, including the MSISDN (or subscriber name in the
phonebook) and priority in the group. After the talker terminates the conversation, the
network side broadcasts the information periodically without the content of the talker and
then other group members remove the information displayed on the MSs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 50 of 341
Public

This feature complies with Huawei private protocol and should be supported by the
MSC/VLR, HLR, and MS.
1.5.5 GBFD-510307 Group Call EMLPP

Availability
Summary
Group call eMLPP ensures timely service for the VGCS/VBS/point-to-point call subscribers
with high eMLPP priority by means of service/resource preemption.
Benefits
This feature allows operators to provide the VGCS on different levels, thus improving the
user satisfaction.
This feature enables operators to quickly respond to requirements during emergencies,
thereby guaranteeing the communications services, and fulfilling their social responsibility.
Description
The eMLPP feature allows the network to use different policies such as queuing, preemption,
and directed retry according to the calls with different priorities when the network resources
are seized. Group call eMLPP are categorized into seven priorities: A, B, and 0-4.
A: highest, for network internal use
B: for network internal use
0: for subscription
1: for subscription
2: for subscription
3: for subscription
4: lowest, for subscription
A and B are the highest priorities, which are used for the network maintenance. When
defining subscribers, operators must define the eMLPP priorities of the subscribers and the
VGCS group respectively.
Group call eMLPP consists of service preemption and resource preemption.
Service preemption
During a VGCS call or point-to-point call, the MS determines whether to accept the new
call (including a paging to the MS or a VGCS/VBS call) based on the priorities of these
two calls. If the MS supports service preemption, the MS determines whether to join a
call with high priority.
Resource preemption

Page 51 of 341
Public
If network resources (such as processing capability, signaling channels, and traffic

channels) are insufficient, calls with high priorities do not release network resources. In
this case, new calls with high priorities can queue or even preempt the resources seized
by the calls with low priorities. For details, see the description of GBFD-115001
Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP).
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
1.5.6 GBFD-510308 Fast Group Call Setup

Availability
Summary
Fast group call setup can shorten the time of VGCS/VBS establishment by optimizing the
signaling process for establishing VGCS/VBS calls and the related data configurations.
Benefits
Fast group call setup ensures the VGCS/VBS scheduling efficiency on some special occasions
and meets the requirements of the VGCS/VBS subscribers.
Description
On some special occasions, the time of VGCS/VBS establishment needs to be shortened to
ensure the VGCS/VBS scheduling efficiency. To shorten the time of setting up group calls,
the signaling process for establishing VGCS/VBS calls and the related data configurations are
optimized.
Immediate assignment optimization: If the fast group call setup mode is adopted, the SABM
frame contains the IMMEDIATE SETUP message when an MS originates a VGCS call. Thus,

Page 52 of 341
Public
the subsequent SETUP process can be omitted and the time of setting up VGCS calls is
shortened. The BSS optimizes the channel assignment procedure by using the "Immediate
TCH Assignment" and "Immediate Assignment Optimization" signaling procedures. In
addition, the signaling interworking process between the BSC and the BTS is simplified,
before the BSS sends the immediate assignment command to the MS. At the same time, the
bandwidth of the TCH is far greater than that of the SDCCH. Hence, the MS sets up a link on
the TCH quickly and easily.
NCH block number optimization: Configuring a large number of blocks occupied by the NCH
in a cell ensures message are sent on the Um interface quickly and speeds up the VGCS call
establishment.
Other procedure optimization: Omitting some procedures such as authentication, ciphering, or
TMSI reassignment can speed up the group call establishment.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
1.5.7 GBFD-510309 Group Call Reliability Enhancing

Availability
Summary
When the BTS is disconnected from the network, the BTS still supports the VGCS/VBS calls
for specified fixed group numbers within the coverage area.
Benefits
Based on this feature, when the BTS is disconnected from the network due to accident or
disaster, operators can still provide VGCS/VBS service in the area covered by the BTS, thus
enhancing user experience and brand image of the product.

Page 53 of 341
Public
Description
In addition to the system-specific reliability mechanisms such as active/standby switchover
and resource pool, Huawei GBSS VGCS/VBS also provides fail soft capability for the
VGCS/VBS feature to improve its reliability.
After the BTS is disconnected from the network, the BTS works in fail soft mode and
supports the VGCS/VBS within the coverage area. A single cell or several cells can be
configured under a BTS. The BTS automatically switches to normal working mode after the
transmission recovers
In fail soft mode, Huawei GBSS supports the regular call initiation. The BTS initiates a
VGCS call that is fixedly configured once the transmission is disrupted. Then, the subscribers
can seize the uplink to talk to the subscribers in other groups within the coverage area of the
BTS. The VGCS call, however, cannot be stopped so that the calls with high priority can be
set up automatically once the transmission is disrupted.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
1.5.8 GBFD-510302 Public Voice Broadcast Service

Availability
Summary
Public voice broadcast service (VBS) adopts the simplex mode and provides
point-to-multipoint voice services for a group of pre-defined MSs in a pre-defined area.

Page 54 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature enables operators to provide a new broadcast-based voice service for the
subscribers and thus increases the revenue.
Description
VBS is a special kind of VGCS. After the network side determines the VBS call number,
group members, and coverage area, the MS who has the authority can dial the call number to
initiate a VBS call. All the group members within the coverage area can be informed to join
the VBS call. Only the originator can talk during a VBS call. The originator can talk without
pressing PTT during the call and other members can hear the voice of the originator. After the
conversation is complete, the originator terminates the VBS call by pressing the on-hook key
and then all the group members hang up.
In addition, the VBS provides dispatcher service. The dispatcher is a special subscriber of the
fixed network or the mobile network defined by the network side. The dispatcher can
originate and terminate a VBS call authorized by the network side. If the dispatcher is not the
originator of the VBS call, no one can talk during the call.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
1.5.9 GBFD-510304 Late Broadcast Channel Assignment

Availability
Summary
After a VBS call is established, if no group member involved in the call is in the cell within
the pre-defined coverage area, the VBS traffic channel is not assigned. If a group member

Page 55 of 341
Public
accesses the cell during the VBS call, then the network side assigns a VBS traffic channel for
the call.
Benefits
This feature effectively saves the radio channel resources when operators promote VBS-based
services.
Description
During a VBS call, the voice of the originator is sent to other group members through the
VBS channel of the cell. If no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the
coverage area, the VBS channel is actually idle.
With this feature, the network side sends a VBS call notice periodically in each cell within the
coverage area and the cell in which group members exist receives the response of the MS.
Then, the network side assigns the VBS channel for the cell and notifies the group members
to join the VBS call. VBS Channel is not assigned to the cells that do not respond.
In addition, the network side periodically detects the MSs of all the cells within the coverage
area during a VBS call. If no group member involved in the VBS call exists in a cell due to
some reason, for example, outgoing cell handover, the network side releases the VGCS
channel assigned to the cell.
Dependency
None
1.5.10 GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay

Availability
Summary
The BSC forwards trunk calls to the trunk server through the call differentiation mechanism,
so that the equipment on the radio access side supports trunk services.

Page 56 of 341
Public
Benefits
Telecom operators can use the existing radio networks to provide trunk services. In other
words, trunk calls are processed as a type of service to eliminate the need for an independent
network. In this way, the radio network investment is decreased and the radio channel
utilization is increased.
Description
This feature is a solution for quickly achieving the trunk function by using the existing GSM
network. The following figure shows the network topology.
When a user initiates a call, the BSC determines whether the service type is trunk call or
public network point-to-point call based on the signaling. If the service type is trunk call, the
BSC forwards it to the trunk server. If the service type is public network point-to-point call,
the BSC forwards it to the MSC on the existing network so that the inheritance of public
network services is ensured. The trunk server does not affect public network services because
it is independent of the MSC on the existing network.
This feature is applicable to the inventory markets of Huawei wireless domain. Only the
addition of one core network and the upgrade of BSC software are required, with the
advantage of fast network construction and low costs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 57 of 341
Public
None
The MS, MSC, and HLR must support this feature.
1.6 LCS
1.6.1 GBFD-115401 NSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA)
Availability
Summary
The built-in serving mobile location center (SMLC) supports the NSS-based Cell ID+TA
location service.
Benefits
The location service (LCS) enables the network to provide various services for an MS based
on the location of the MS. These services include weather forecasts, trip scheduling,
emergency assistance, stock information, business planning, and transport conditions. In this
way, the revenue of operators increases.
Description
LCS is a series of services that is achieved based on locating the position of users in a certain
range, such as locating an emergency call or position information of users for value-added
services. LCS should reach the specified QoS, such as the required accuracy and latency.
Huawei supports NSS-based Cell ID+TA location scheme of the SMLC. The location
precision of this scheme is about 500 meters.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 58 of 341
Public

None
1.6.2 GBFD-115402 BSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA)

Availability
Summary
The built-in SMLC supports the BSS-based Cell ID+TA location service.
Benefits
This feature can provide location services and increase the revenue of operators.
Description
Huawei BSS provides the BSS-based CELL+TA mobile location service. The Cell ID + TA
location is used to estimate the distance between MS and BTS according to current parameter
TA, thus improving the location precision on the basis of Cell ID.
Huawei BSC integrates the SMLC. The interface between BSC and SMLC is an internal
interface. The location precision of this scheme is about 500 meters.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None

Page 59 of 341
Public
1.6.3 GBFD-115403 Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)

Availability
Summary
The location information of the MSs can be directly displayed on the BSC LMT.
Benefits
With this feature, operators can provide location services and increase the revenue.
In addition, LCS helps in disaster relief, routine network optimization, and helps handle
emergency situations and customer queries
Description
Huawei BSS supports the simple mode LCS on the basis of the NSS-based LCS and
BSS-based LCS. The BSC transmits the location results to the BSC LMT by analyzing the
location information. In addition to the location information of the traced MS, the CGI, TA,
longitude and latitude of the cell, azimuth, and error can be provided.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
1.6.4 GBFD-115404 Lb Interface

Availability

Page 60 of 341
Public
Summary
Huawei BSS supports the standard Lb interface and the interconnection between Huawei BSC
and the stand-alone Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC) to provide the location services
for the MS. The location services can be based on the CELL ID+TA mode or the AGPS mode.
Benefits
Huawei BSS interconnects with the stand-alone SMLC to provide the location services
for the MS.
The location services can increase the operator` s revenue. The operator can provide
various location services for an MS based on the location of the MS. These location
services include weather forecasts, trip scheduling, emergency assistance, stock
information, business planning, and transportation information.
Description
The Lb interface is a standard interface between the BSC and SMLC. The SMLC performs
functions such as selecting the location mode and calculating the position of the MS based on
the measurement results provided by the MS or BSC.
Huawei BSS supports the standard Lb interface, and thus can be interconnected with the
SMLC of other vendors to provide the location services in CELL ID+TA mode or AGPS
mode. The Lb interface complies with 3GPP TS 48.071, 3GPP TS 49.031, 3GPP TS 44.031,
and 3GPP TS 03.71.
Figure 1-1 shows the position of the SMLC in the network.
Figure 1-1 Position of the SMLC in the network
HLR
BTS
BSC
BTS
MSC/
VLR
GMLC
LCS
client
Lb
SMLC
Huawei BSS supports message tracing on the Lb interface and provides the traffic statistical
counters related to the location services. Huawei BSS supports flow control on the location
services. When the stand-alone SMLC is overloaded or when the number of location requests
received by the BSC exceeds the predefined threshold, the BSC rejects certain location
requests to ensure the normal operation of the location system.
Generally, Huawei BSC is interconnects with only one SMLC. When the RAN Sharing
feature is enabled, Huawei BSC can be interconnected with four SMLCs of four different
vendors.
Enhancement
None

Page 61 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
None
This feature cannot be enabled with any of the following features at the same time:
GBFD-115401 NSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA) or
GBFD-115402 BSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA) or
GBFD-115403 Simple Mode LCS(Cell ID + TA)
The MS must support the AGPS location services. The core network must support the
location services.
1.7 VIP Service

1.7.1 GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation
Availability
Summary
Resource reservation can reserve a certain number of TCHFs for the high-priority users.
Benefits
With this feature, the channel resources can be reserved for the high-priority users, which
guarantees the QoS for the VIP users and improve user experience.
Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. With this feature,
operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities to increase
the revenue.
Description
With priority-based resource reservation, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for
high-priority users to ensure the QoS.
The reservation of the channel resources in a congested cell prevents the high-priority users
from eMLPP preemption and queuing. Thus, the access rate of high-priority users speeds up
and success rate increases.

Page 62 of 341
Public
In addition, the half-rate service uses a coding mode different from that of the full-rate service
and has a coding rate of 5.6 kbit/s. Thus, after the half-rate service is enabled, the voice
quality of the half-rate service is deteriorated. The MSs of some low-priority users do not
support the half-rate feature. Consequently, in the cells where the half-rate feature is enabled,
these MSs only occupy the TCHFs and have a high voice quality. However, the MSs of some
high-priority users which support the half-rate function. After the half-rate function is enabled
in a cell, the TCHHs are preferably assigned to the MSs. Thus, the high-priority users receive
a low voice quality. The resource reservation feature reserves TCHFs for these high-priority
users to ensure the QoS.
The TCHFs can be reserved for the high-priority users as required. In each channel
assignment, if the users with the priority equal to or higher than the defined high priority and
the reserved channels is sufficient, the TCHFs are directly assigned to the users; if all the
reserved channels are assigned, the preemption flow is performed according to the eMLPP
rule.
If the priority of the user is lower than the defined high priority, the system checks whether
the total number of occupied channels and idle channels is greater than the number of
reserved channels. If the total number of occupied channels and idle channels is greater than
the number of reserved channels, the system initiates the normal call flow; otherwise, the
queuing and preemption flow are performed according to the queuing and eMLPP rule.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature can be used together with GBFD-5001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and
Preemption (EMLPP), which can effectively improve user benefits and satisfaction.
None
1.7.2 GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and

Preemption (EMLPP)
Availability

Page 63 of 341
Public
Summary
The enhanced multi level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) is a supplementary service
that is used to ensure a normal conversation of the subscriber with higher priority by
preemption, queuing, directed retry, and forced handover.
Benefits
This feature ensures the QoS of the VIP subscribers and improves their experience.
This feature allows operators to classify subscribers into different categories. Thus, operators
can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities to increase revenue.
Description
The eMLPP is a supplementary service offered by the GSM system. The eMLPP service
allows a subscriber to initiate calls with different priorities. The network side employs
different channel assignment strategies for the subscribers according to the priorities. If the
network is congested, the call with higher priority is served preferably.
The eMLPP service requires the support from MS to ensure that the subscriber can initiate
calls of different priorities under different situations. A normal conversation of the subscribers
with higher priority is ensured by preemption, queuing, directed retry, and forced handover.
With this service, the high-priority subscribers have an advantage in call establishment rate
and completion rate compared with the lower-priority subscribers according to different
priority configurations in a network.
The eMLPP service provides the following two mechanisms:
Preemption
The MSC determines whether preemption is allowed. Then, the MSC sends an
assignment request or handover request message to the BSC to notify the BSC whether
the preemption is allowed. If the MSC allows for performing the preemption and eMLPP
is enabled, the BSC forcibly switches the call with lowest priority to a neighboring cell
when the TCHs are congested so as to release the resource for the call with high priority.
However, if eMLPP is not enabled, the BSC releases the resource of a low-priority user
directly to ensure that the call with high priority is served normally.
Queuing
The MSC determines whether queuing is allowed. Then, the MSC sends an assignment
request or handover request message to the BSC to notify the BSC whether queuing is
allowed. When the cell has no idle TCH and the MSC allows queuing, the BSC puts the
TCH request into the queue. Then, when idle TCHs are available, the TCH is assigned to
the waiting call in the queue. If the directed retry is allowed, the BSC performs directed
retry before the queue timer expires.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0:
eMLPP Enhancement:
The preemption and queuing functions are enhanced, and thus the utilization of radio
resources is optimized.
When an outgoing BSC better cell handover occurs on a high-priority MS, the BSC notifies
the MSC and the target BSC that they should neither preempt the radio resources that are

Page 64 of 341
Public
allocated to other MSs for the high-priority MS nor queue the high-priority MS. On receiving
the incoming BSC handover request from a high-priority MS, the target BSC checks the type
of the handover. If the handover is a better cell handover, the target BSC neither preempts the
radio resources that are allocated to other MSs for the high-priority MS nor queues the
high-priority MS. In this way, the high-priority MS will never preempt the radio resources
that are allocated to a low-priority MS when the serving cell can provide service for the
high-priority MS.
When an intra-BSC handover (any handover other than better cell handover) occurs on a
high-priority MS, the BSC can preempt the radio resources that are allocated to a low-priority
MS for the high-priority MS. The high-priority MS is queued if the radio resources that are
allocated to a low-priority MS cannot be preempted. In this manner, the BSC ensures the
speech quality of the high-priority MS by preempting the radio resources that are allocated to
a low-priority MS when the serving cell cannot provide good service for the high-priority MS.
Dependency
None
None
The CN and HLR must support this feature.
1.7.3 GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority

Availability
Summary
With this feature, when service congestion occurs in the GBSC, the flow control is started.
The calls in the VIP cells are preferentially processed. Thus, the normal operation of the
GBSC and the call setup success rate of the VIP users are ensured.
Benefits
The operators can apply this feature in areas with a lot of VIP users, such as central business
districts (CBDs), saloon bars, and airports. In this way, the calls made by the VIP users are not
affected even if the BSC system is overloaded because of burst traffic, thus improving the
service quality.
Description
In the GBSC, the system is overloaded if a large number of MS-originated calls are initiated
or the core network initiates a large number of pagings in a short period. To prevent that the

Page 65 of 341
Public
system is overloaded and ensure the normal operation of the system, the GBSC performs the
flow control and discards some access requests and paging messages.
The operators can divide the cells under the BSC into VIP cells and non-VIP cells as required.
When the GBSC system is overloaded, the call requests initiated in the VIP cells are
preferentially handled. The call requests initiated by the users in the non-VIP cells are
processed according to the common flow control algorithm (GBFD-111705 GSM Flow
Control).
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The two features are recommended working together:
GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority
The former one controls uplink flow, and the latter one controls downlink flow.
None
1.7.4 GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority

Availability
Summary
Based on the user priority information in eMLPP, the GBSC performs different flow control
policies for users in the case of network congestion. This ensures service availability for
high-priority users.
Benefits
Service availability is ensured for high-priority users in the case of traffic volume bursts.
Description
When congestion occurs, the BSC determines whether a user is a VIP user or not according to
the eMLPP priority of the user. The BSC preferentially processes the paging messages of VIP

Page 66 of 341
Public
users. It processes the paging messages of non-VIP users according to the flow control
algorithm.
To protect the service of high-priority users from being affected by flow control, the GBSC
uses the priority information in eMLPP to classify the signaling priority in flow control. The
signaling of high-priority users will not be affected by flow control, whereas the signaling of
low-priority users may be discarded due to flow control.
Flow control will be used in channel assignment, handover, and paging procedures.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP)
The two features are recommended working together:
GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority
the former one controls uplink flow, and the latter one controls downlink flow.
None
1.7.5 GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority

Availability
Introduction
This feature enables telecom operators to provide subscribers with differentiated services.
Subscribers are classified into three priority levels: gold, silver, and copper. The bandwidth
and delay requirements of high-priority subscribers are preferentially guaranteed.

Page 67 of 341
Public
Benefits
Based on subscriber priorities, telecom operators provide differentiated services and charge
subscribers based on flexible policies. For example, a telecom operator charges a gold
subscriber based on traffic whereas charges a silver or copper subscriber at a flat rate.
Description
Subscriber priorities are represented by parameters, which are set depending on the traffic
class, ARP, and THP.
If the priority of a subscriber is high, the scheduling priority is also high. As a result, the
subscriber can use services with high bandwidth and low service delay. Interactive,
background, and BE services support differentiated PS services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
A built-in PCU is required.
None
The MS and SGSN must support this feature.

Page 68 of 341
Public
Packet Service
2.1 PS Prime Service

2.1.1 GBFD-114101 GPRS
Availability
Summary
The General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a type of end-to-end packet switched service
based on the GSM technology.
Benefits
By providing the data service to the subscriber, the GPRS increases the operators' revenue and
the proportion of the PS services in the mobile services.
Description
Huawei GPRS is implemented by adding GPRS support nodes (GSNs) and packet control
unit (PCU) on the GSM system and upgrading the software. There are two PCU modes:
built-in PCU and external PCU. The GPRS provides quick access of PS services for the
mobile subscribers. Huawei external PCU is connected to the BSC through the Pb interface.
Huawei GPRS has an open system architecture, which facilitates smooth capacity expansion.
The standard interfaces ensure the device compatibility and supports the QoS features and the
dynamic allocation of radio resources. In addition, the flexible networking and configuration
save a large amount of CAPEX for the operator in the initial phase of the GPRS service
operation. GPRS provides abundant packet services, for example, mobile Internet access,
e-Commerce (e-Bank and e-Currency), cluster management, remote control/remote
measurement, booking system (hotels, theatres, and airplanes), and group services (stock
information publication).
Huawei GPRS implements mainly three functions: managing radio links and resources,
controlling MS access, and providing routing functions for packet data transmission. The
radio link management includes establishment, maintenance, and release of radio links. The
radio resource management includes encoding/decoding, configuration, and multiplexing of

Page 69 of 341
Public
the radio packet channel and conversion between the CS service channels and the PS service
channels. In addition, by controlling the access of the MSs, the GPRS solves the problem of
channel contention and assigns channels for MSs according to the requested QoS. The GPRS
system also provides routes to transmit the packet data to the SGSN and receives the
downlink data from the SGSN.
Huawei GPRS uses 16 kbit/s links on the G-Abis interface. When the CS-3 and CS-4 coding
schemes are used, the rate of one PDCH is 15.6 kbit/s and 21.5 kbit/s respectively. Therefore,
when the radio channel is mapped onto the terrestrial channel, one PDCH in CS-3 and CS-4
coding schemes should be mapped onto two 16 kbit/s links. Using the dynamic additional
sub-timeslot technology, Huawei GPRS solves the transmission problem over the G-Abis
interface when the CS-3 and CS-4 coding schemes are used. The dynamic additional
sub-timeslot technology assigns a main 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot statically and an additional 16
kbit/s sub-timeslot dynamically on the G-Abis interface for each PDCH using CS-3 or CS-4.
The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology has the following features: Any idle 16 kbit/s
sub-timeslot on the G-Abis interface can be used as an additional 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot; the
additional sub-timeslot can be dynamically attached to different main timeslots within the
same site and thus the usage of additional sub-timeslot is increased based on the statistical
multiplexing rule; the additional sub-timeslot does not need to be the neighbor of the main
timeslot; the data packet is assembled and fragmented through software, which avoids the
upgrade of hardware due to different product specifications; dynamical assignment of the
TCH on the Abis interface can reduce the cost of the transmission on the Abis interface and
thus reduce the O&M cost of the equipment.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Embedded PCU should be used, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are
required.
None
2.1.2 GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I

Availability
Summary
The Network Operation Mode I feature together with the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR
and the SGSN support the paging co-ordination function.
Page 70 of 341
Public
Benefits
The Network Operation Mode I together with the Gs interface support paging
co-ordination and the CS paging when the MS is in packet transfer state.
The Network Operation Mode I feature greatly reduces the signaling load between the
MS and the network, thus saving and optimizing the radio resources.
Description
The GSM specifications define three network operation modes according to the paging mode
adopted for CS services and PS services: Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation
Mode II, and Network Operation Mode III. This feature refers to the Network Operation
Mode I.
With this feature, the network sends the CS paging message to the MS on the packet channels.
That is, the network side sends the CS paging message to the MS on the PCCCH, CCCH, or
PACCH. The MS monitors only one paging channel.
If the PCCCH is configured and the MS is in idle state, both the CS paging message and
the PS paging message are sent on the PCCCH.
If the CCCH but not the PCCCH is configured in the cell and the MS is in idle state,
both the CS paging message and the PS paging message are sent on the CCCH.
If the MS is in transfer state, the CS paging message is sent on the PACCH.
The Network Operation Mode I requires the configuration of the Gs interface between the
MSC/VLR and the SGSN because the CS paging message must be transmitted through the
SGSN. For the MS, it listens to only one type of channel to receive the CS paging message.
The Network Operation Mode I feature greatly reduces the signaling load between the MS
and the network, thus saving and optimizing the radio resources.
Using the Network Operation Mode I, the MS receives the CS paging message on the PACCH
when processing the PS services. Then, the MS stops the PS services and initiates the CS
services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
None
The Gs interface should be supported by the CN if the paging co-ordination is supported.
Page 71 of 341
Public
2.1.3 GBFD-118901 CS-3/CS-4

Availability
Summary
The CS-3/CS-4 feature makes use of the capability that the GPRS MS already has, thus
increasing the throughput. The BSC adjusts the coding scheme to a higher level in the area
with low error bit rate according to the transmission quality of the MS.
Benefits
Increases the GPRS service rate, improves the packet service performance in areas where
the EGPRS is not supported, and improves the satisfaction of the subscribers in the
entire GPRS network.
Makes full use of the capability that the GPRS MS already has, chooses more suitable
coding scheme (from CS-1 to CS-4) according to reasonable GPRS link control
algorithm, thus improving the spectrum efficiency.
Description
According to GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes, namely, CS-1,
CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4.
Although the CS-1 and CS-2 coding schemes ensure 100% and 90% cell coverage
respectively and meet the co-channel interference requirement C/I = 19 dB, they only have a
data rate of 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s (containing the head of the RLC block) respectively.
The reason is that the half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks of the CS-1 and CS-2
schemes are used for forward error correction (FEC). This reduces the requirement for C/I
and the transmission rate.
To increase the transmission rate, Huawei provides the CS-3 and CS-4 schemes. The CS-3
and CS-4 schemes provide the transmission rate of 15.6 kbit/s and 21.4 kbit/s (containing the
head of the RLC block) respectively. In addition, the CS-3 and CS-4 schemes have higher
requirements for C/I. During the data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel
encoding/decoding scheme according to the retransmission rate of the RLC blocks transmitted
on the uplink TBF and downlink TBF. This improves the transmission rate on the basis of
guaranteed transmission quality and maximizes the use of radio resources.
This feature supports the dynamic conversion among CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
Page 72 of 341
Public

GBFD-114101 GPRS
None
2.1.4 GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Availability
Summary
The enhanced GPRS (EGPRS) is an enhancement of the GPRS system.
EGPRS uses the 8PSK modulation mode on the RF layer so that the rate of a single channel is
increased. The maximum rate of a single channel is 59.2 kbit/s.
EGPRS adopts new coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9.
EGPRS improves the algorithm for controlling the link quality by modifying of the
RLC/MAC protocol at the link layer.
Benefits
Provides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the delay of PS
services and the congestion rate, thus improving the service quality and enhancing the
user experience.
Attracts more subscribers of PS services and thus increases the operators' revenue by
providing more multimedia services.
Description
Compared with GSM, EDGE supports a higher data transmission rate. EDGE provides a set
of enhanced standards for the GSM interfaces and enables the GSM network to carry 3G
services. EDGE consists of EGPRS and ECSD. EGPRS is an enhancement of the GPRS
system. It improves the rate of data channels. EGPRS improves the data transmission
capability of a single timeslot by adding the 8PSK modulation scheme on the Um interface
and improves the data transmission capability of a single user through multislot binding.
Huawei EGPRS has the following features:
Huawei EGPRS supports the coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9 in the uplink and downlink,
as listed in the following table.

Page 73 of 341
Public
Schem
e
Cod
e
Rate
Heade
r Code
Rate
Modulati
on
Raw
Data
withi
n one
Radio
Block
Famil
y
Mode
RLC
Blocks
per
Radio
Block
(20ms)
MCS-9
1.0
0.36
MCS-8
0.92
MCS-7
MCS-6
BC
S
8PSK
2x592
0.36
2x544
54.4
0.76
0.36
2x448
44.8
0.49
1/3
592
2x1
2
12
544+4
8
MCS-5
0.37
1/3
MCS-4
1.0
0.53
MCS-3
0.85
0.53
GMSK
Tail
Payloa
d
HC
S
2x6
Data
rate
(kbit/
s)
59.2
29.6
27.2
448
22.4
352
17.6
296
14.8
13.6
272+2
4
MCS-2
0.66
0.53
224
11.2
MCS-1
0.53
0.53
176
8.8
2. Support for the incremental redundancy (IR) mechanism in the uplink and downlink
EGPRS adopts two modes for controlling the link quality: link adaptation (LA) and IR.
Compared with GPRS that uses only the LA mode, EGPRS uses both the LA mode and the IR
mode. The working principle of the IR mechanism is as follows: Generally, the transmitter
uses the coding scheme with a high rate for data transmission; however, the coding scheme
with a high rate always has a weak protection capability. If the data is received incorrectly, the
transmitter retransmits additional coding information. The receiver combines the new
information with the historical information and then performs decoding. This procedure is
repeated until the decoding is successful.
3. Support for dynamic adjustment of EGPRS coding schemes in the uplink and downlink
The dynamic adjustment of EGPRS coding schemes is similar to the dynamic adjustment of
GPRS coding schemes. The GBSS sends the system information to the MS. The MS
calculates the bit error probability (BEP) in the downlink and reports the result to the GBSS
through the measurement report. The GBSS then adjusts the EGPRS coding schemes in the
uplink and downlink based on the downlink BEP.
4. Dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology
The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology solves the problem of transmission over the
G-Abis interface using MCS-3 to MCS-9. The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology
statically assigns one main 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot and dynamically assigns one to three
additional 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots on the G-Abis interface for each PDCH using MCS-3 to

Page 74 of 341
Public
MCS9. Using the dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology, the EGPRS BSS need not
upgrade the hardware of the BTS, BSC, and PCU for supporting MCS-3 to MCS-9. In
addition, EGPRS maximizes the multiplexing mode over the G-Abis interface, thus saving the
investment on the transmission devices over the G-Abis interface.
The strategy for allocating the 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots for different EGPRS services is listed in
the following table.
Coding Scheme
Number of 16 kbit/s Timeslots Allocated over the

Abis Interface
MCS-1 to MCS-2
MCS-3 to MCS-6
MCS-7
MCS-8 to MCS-9
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
None
The GSN and the MS must support this feature.
2.1.5 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment

Availability
Summary
With this feature, fixed channels need not be configured for the PS services, the TCH and the
PDCH can be automatically converted as required.

Page 75 of 341
Public
Benefits
Reduces the impact of GPRS services on the GSM speech services, decreases the
maintenance and configuration workload, and increases channel usage and network
capacity.
Improves the performance of the PS services and increases the operators' revenue.
Packet channel types
Description
The PDCH is classified into static PDCH and dynamic PDCH based on the bearer
services (CS services or PS services).
The static PDCH is used for the PS services only.
The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during the initialization process. In the case of packet
access, the TCH and the PDCH can be dynamically converted.
PDCH dynamic adjustment

The static PDCH is used for the PS services only. The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during
the initialization process. When the packet resources are insufficient, the PCU requests
dynamic PDCHs from the BSC for the PS services. When the circuit resources are
insufficient, the BSC requests dynamic PDCHs that are used as TCHs from the PCU.
In this manner, the channel resources are flexibly used as per requirement. Thus, the
usage of resources is increased, and the complexity of PDCH configuration and the
workload of maintenance and configuration are reduced. In addition, the impact of
unreasonable PDCH configuration on the service performance is reduced.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
PDCH Preemption Priority: In the latter period of the GSM network development, the
requirements for the PS services are preferentially met because of the significant increase in
the data service demand. Huawei PCU equipment supports three types of PDCH preemption
priorities: all dynamic channels preemptable, packet control channels unpreemptable, and all
dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable. This application enhancement optimizes
the performance of the PS services by limiting channel preemption of the CS services. The
operators can implement different packet allocation strategies by configuring preemption
priority.
All dynamic channels preemptable: The CS services can preempt all dynamic channels.
Packet control channels unpreemptable: The CS services can preempt all the other dynamic
channels except the packet control channels.
All dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable: The CS services cannot preempt all
the dynamic channels carrying services.
GBSS8.0
Overall Dynamic PDCH Availability: Except for static PDCHs, all the other channels can be
converted in real time based on the situation of the PS services and the CS services. If
required, TCHs can be converted to PDCHs for the PS services. With this application
enhancement, more PDCHs can be converted when the CS services are not busy. This can
alleviate the decrease in the transmission rate due to PDCH multiplexing. This flexible

Page 76 of 341
Public
mechanism can maximize the channel usage and optimize the distribution of PDCHs and
TCHs. In addition, the network planning is simple and thus you can expand the capacity if
required.
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None
2.1.6 GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR

Availability
Summary
As a traditional networking mode, the Gb over FR feature enables the operator to deploy the
network in frame relay (FR) transmission mode between the BSC and the SGSN.
Benefits
This feature is compatible with the CN equipment in the existing network.
This feature enables the operator to fully utilize the existing network in FR transmission
mode.
Description
This feature complies with the 3GPP protocols.
The Gb interface provides connections between the BSS and the SGSN to send the
information related to cell management and handovers in routing areas and transmit the data
between the MS and the SGSN. Traditionally, the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode
to provide the logical link connection. Data is transferred through the network service virtual
connection (NS-VC). The NS-VC is the permanent virtual channel (PVC) in FR.

Page 77 of 341
Public
Huawei GBSS supports the FR networking over the Gb interface in the E1/T1 direct
transmission mode or the FR transmission mode and supports configuration of multiple PVCs
between the BSS and the SGSN. In addition, Huawei BSS manages these PVCs and supports
load sharing among them.
The BSC that supports Gb over FR requires no hardware upgrade. Only software upgrade is
required to deploy the SGSN pool.
The BSC supports the FR transmission mode and the IP transmission mode for the
communication between the BSC and the SGSN. These two modes can work simultaneously.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
None
None
2.1.7 GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access

Availability
Summary
The Packet Channel Request message is an 8- or 11-bit access burst. This feature supports the
11-bit EGPRS access. The 11-bit access burst contains the multislot capability of an MS and
thus enables rapid allocation of more channels. The EGPRS MS supports one-phase 11-bit
access. This shortens the access delay.
Benefits
This feature shortens the access delay and increases the access rate of the EGPRS MS, thus
increasing the subscriber satisfaction.
Description
With this feature, the EGPRS MS can send the 11-bit channel access signaling request. In this
manner, the system implements only one-phase access. That is, the system can immediately

Page 78 of 341
Public
assign signaling for the MS to establish the uplink TBF and then transmit data. Before this
feature is used, two-phase access is required.
Moreover, this feature shortens the time for TBF establishment and improves the performance
of small-sized data transmission (such as the TCP handshake).
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
2.1.8 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the immediate assignment of packets and the uplink assignment of packets
are performed by the BTS instead of the BSC. The BSC pre-allocates the radio resources in
the uplink to the BTS so that the BTS completes the uplink TBF establishment and resource
scheduling in advance.
Benefits
Moving immediate assignment of packets to the BTS can increase the initial access rate
of the PS services and thus improves end user experience.
Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS can improve the performance of the TCP
application such as the FTP downloading by optimizing the rate of sending the TCP
ACK message in the downlink, thus enhancing the user experience.
Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS
Description

Page 79 of 341
Public
Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS is an optimization of the uplink

immediate assignment.
Generally, after the MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS forwards
the message to the BSC to perform the immediate assignment.
To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources
after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When the
MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS uses the resource information
to immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner,
the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message.
Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already accesses the specified channel
and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of the radio resources.
Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS

During the downlink transmission process, if there is data to be transmitted in the uplink,
the uplink channel request information is carried in the PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message to request the uplink TBF establishment. Generally, the MS must
wait for the BTS to forward the channel request information to the BSC to implement the
channel assignment.
To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources
after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When
receiving the channel request of the MS, the BTS uses the resource information to
immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner,
the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message.
Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already establishes the uplink TBF
and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of radio resources. As
a result, the time for the interaction between the BTS and the BSC is saved during the
access of the MS.
This feature significantly reduces uplink access delay in TDM transmission mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None

Page 80 of 341
Public
2.1.9 GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF

Availability
Summary
This feature ensures that the TBF is not released when no data is transmitted. In this manner,
the TBF need not be re-established after the data is transmitted again. Thus, frequent TBF
establishment and releases are avoided.
Benefits
This feature reduces the cost for establishing the uplink TBF, shortens the data transmission
time in the uplink, and increases the uplink rate.
Description
After the uplink data is sent, the common uplink TBF is released immediately whereas the
extended uplink TBF enters the inactive period. If there is new data to be transmitted, the TBF
in inactive period enters the active period for data transmission. If the inactive period timer
expires and there is no data to be transmitted, the TBF is released. The inactive period timer is
an adjustable parameter pertaining to network optimization.
With this feature, the throughput rate of the services with unstable data flow such as webpage
browsing and email sending is improved.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Page 81 of 341
Public
2.1.10 GBFD-119204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS

Coding
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the BSS to support coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9 and dynamically
adjust the coding scheme based on the radio quality.
Benefits
This feature increases the uplink rate of the EGPRS users, enhances the user experience, and
improves the network quality.
Description
The requirements for the radio transmission quality vary with the transmission rate of the
coding schemes. The higher the transmission rate, the higher the requirements for the radio
transmission quality. During the data transmission process, the BSC dynamically adjusts the
coding scheme based on the radio quality to maximize the radio resource usage and the
transmission rate with guaranteed transmission quality.
Currently, the BSS supports nine coding schemes MSC-1 to MCS-9. The aim of this feature is
to dynamically adjust the uplink rate of the EGPRS user based on the network status. With
this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH based on
the uplink measurement report from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH can quickly adapt to
the changes in the radio condition and thus the uplink throughput is increased.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None

Page 82 of 341
Public
2.1.11 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the relative reserved block period (RRBP) frequency is dynamically
adjusted according to the status of the uplink TBF and the downlink TBF. The data blocks
with the RRBP flag in the downlink are sent at different intervals.
Benefits
Optimizes the uplink access rate of PS services, thus improving the performance of the
TCP services such as FTP downloading by increasing the rate of sending the TCP ACK
message. As a result, the user experience is enhanced.
Reduces unnecessary data flow in the uplink and the impact on other users on the same
PDCH.
Description
This feature optimizes the RRBP frequency based on two factors: uplink TBF status and the
phase of delayed downlink TBF release.
Uplink TBF status and RRBP frequency

During the downlink transmission process, the BSC periodically sends data blocks with
RRBP flag to reserve uplink resources for the MS to respond with the PACKET
DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to report the receiving status of the downlink data.
When the MS needs to send data in the uplink but the uplink TBF does not exist, the MS
can carry the channel request information in the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK
message to initiate the access. Therefore, if the frequency of sending the data blocks with
RRBP flag is increased at this time, the access rate of the MS can be increased.
On the other hand, the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message seizes the uplink
bandwidth. Therefore, when the uplink TBF already exists, the uplink expenditure is
reduced and the uplink data bandwidth is increased if the frequency of sending the data
blocks with RRBP flag is reduced.
Phase of delayed downlink TBF release and RRBP frequency

The MS generally has a demand for sending uplink data in the earlier period of the
delayed downlink TBF release after the data transmission in the downlink is complete.
At this time, the BSS system uses a high frequency for sending the data blocks with the
RRBP flag. In the latter period of the delayed downlink TBF release, there is less data to
be sent in the uplink. At this time, the BSS system uses a low frequency for sending the
data blocks with the RRBP flag.
This feature dynamically adjusts the frequency for sending the data blocks with the
RRBP flag based on the uplink TBF status and the phase of delayed downlink TBF
release. When the uplink TBF exists and the delayed TBF release is in the latter period, a
low frequency can be used to save the uplink bandwidth. When the uplink TBF does not
exist and the delayed TBF release is in the earlier period, a high frequency can be used to
increase the uplink access rate of the MS.

Page 83 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
None
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None
2.1.12 GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching

Availability
Summary
The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system uses
the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services and GPRS
uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks with the USF
should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRS downlink data
blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects the downlink
throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate the EGPRS
services from the GPRS services, thus effectively increasing the downlink throughput of the
EGPRS MS.
Benefits
This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS services and the GPRS services use the
same channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire network
performance, and enhancing the user experience.
Description
Types of Preferred Channels for Packet Services

Page 84 of 341
Public
There are five types of preferred channels: EGPRS dedicated channel, EGPRS preferred
channel, common EGPRS channel, GPRS channel, and non-GPRS channel.
EGPRS dedicated channels serve only EGPRS MSs.
EGPRS preferred channels serve EGPRS MSs in preference to GPRS MSs but can be
used by GPRS MSs when the channels are not occupied by EGPRS MSs. When an
EGPRS MS requests an EGPRS preferred channel, the GPRS MSs that occupy the
EGPRS preferred channels should be transferred to other channels. EGPRS MSs and
GPRS MSs cannot use the same EGPRS preferred channel.
Common EGPRS channels serve either GPRS MSs or EGPRS MSs, whichever occupies
the channel first.
GPRS channels serve GPRS MSs. If a cell is not configured with EGPRS channels,
EGPRS MSs in the cell use these channels to process GPRS services.
Non-GPRS channels are channels that are not used for the PS services.
Channel Allocation Principles

When configuring the channel type on the TRX, you can select the channel type from the
GPRS preferred channel types.
When the BSS allocates PDCHs, the preferred channel type varies with the specific
packet services.
For GPRS services, the channels are preferentially assigned in the following order:
GPRS channels, common EGPRS channels, and EGPRS preferred channels.
For EGPRS services, the channels are preferentially assigned in the following order:
EGPRS dedicated channels, EGPRS preferred channels, and common EGPRS channels.
Multiplexing of common EGPRS channels may occur when the GPRS MS uses the
uplink channel and the EGPRS MS uses the downlink channel. To avoid this, you can set
Allow E Down G Up Switch to Close. If you want to avoid this situation do not
configure common EGPRS channels.
Channels should be used based on the type of the preferred channel. For example, if the
channels on the TRX that supports EGPRS are configured as GPRS channels, these
channels can be used for only GPRS services. EGPRS dedicated channels can be
configured only as static channels whereas the other three preferred channels can be
configured as static or dynamic channels.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Page 85 of 341
Public

None
2.1.13 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing

Availability
Summary
Based on the traffic load on the PDCHs, load sharing applies to the dynamic adjustment of the
MS distribution on the PDCHs to improve the channel utilization and single-user PS service
rate.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the channel utilization and PS service rate.
Description
The strategy for load sharing includes the following three parts:
When an MS accesses the network, the system preferentially assigns a TRX with a light load
to the MS to adjust the load distribution between TRXs.
When the MS provides PS services, the system assigns the MS a PDCH or PDCHs with a
light load. The occupancy of channel resources varies during the transmission. For example, if
the MS releases channel resources when the service ends, some TRXs or PDCHs are idle. If
the MS accessing the network is not shifted from the channel with heavy load to the channel
with a light load, the channel resources are wasted. According to the load on the PDCHs, the
BSS shifts the MS carried on the PDCH with a heavy load to the one with a light load. Thus,
load sharing is implemented and the single-user rate increases.
When the channel is released, the system adjusts the load distribution between channels
according to the traffic load on each channel to ensure load balance on the PDCHs, thus
optimally utilizing channel resources.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Load sharing during the release of radio resources: This function enhances the load balance
between TRXs when radio resources are released. Thus, the resources on all the TRXs are
reassigned in the cell. That is, the MSs carried on the TRXs with a heavy load are assigned to
those with a light load, and then the MSs carried on the PDCHs with a heavy load are
assigned to those with a light load so that the load balance between all the TRXs in the cell is
realized and the channel resources are optimally utilized. For example, an MS transmits data
for a long time. During the data transmission, if radio resources are released by other MSs, the
BSC determines whether the TRX used by the MSs that release radio resources is idle. If the
TRX is idle, the MS performing long-time data transmission is reassigned with the channels
on the idle TRX. Thus, the throughput of the MS is increased.

Page 86 of 341
Public
When the traffic load of the GPRS channels decreases, some GPRS MSs are shifted from the
EGPRS channel to the GPRS channels to increase the channel utilization and minimize the
impact on the EGPRS services.
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None
2.1.14 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and

Downlink Channels
Availability
Summary
The uplink and downlink channel adaptive adjustment implements dynamic assignment of the
number of uplink and downlink channels for the MSs based on the uplink and downlink
service data flow.
Benefits
In the case of the services that are processed on both the uplink and downlink such as ping
large packets and Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC), this feature helps to reduce the system
transmission delay.
In the case of the downlink-preferred services such as FTP download, this feature helps
improve the downlink data throughput.
In the case of the uplink-preferred services such as e-mail sending, this feature, used together
with extended dynamic allocation (EDA), helps improve the uplink data throughput.
Description
The BSS measures the data throughput of uplink and downlink of each temporary block flow
(TBF) regularly to determine the current service type of the TBF.

Page 87 of 341
Public
If the downlink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many downlink timeslots
as possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 4+1 DL/UL
timeslot configuration preferentially.
If the uplink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many uplink timeslots as
possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 1+4 DL/UL
timeslot configuration preferentially used together with EDA.
If the service processed on both the uplink and downlink is performed, the BSS tries to assign
the timeslots of uplink and downlink asymmetrically to the MS. For an MS with multislot
class of 12, the BSS uses the 3+2 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None
2.2 PS Service Enhancment

2.2.1 GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR)
Availability
Summary
For the streaming class services, after the QoS mechanism is introduced, the BSC allocates
radio resources according to the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) of the QoS to ensure the data
transmission rate. When the radio resources are insufficient, the subscribers with high priority
can preempt the radio resources of the subscribers with low priority.

Page 88 of 341
Public
Benefits
Ensures sufficient and stable bandwidth for the streaming services.
Ensures preferentially the bandwidth requirement and service experience of the

subscribers with high priority when radio resources are insufficient.
Helps the operator to take flexible charging policies.
Description
This feature supports the packet flow management (PFM) procedure, which manages packet
flow context (PFC). The PFM process includes the establishment, modification, and deletion
of the PFC. In addition, the BSC obtains or modifies the attributes of QoS through the PEM
procedure.
This feature is enabled to support streaming and push to talk over cellular (PoC) services. If
the MS supports GBR, the resources are allocated according to the GBR of the QoS. If the
MS does not support GBR, the resources are allocated according to the BEST EFFORT. The
BSC dynamically allocates Um interface resources to the MS based on the radio environment
so that the bandwidth of the MS is permanently greater than or equal to the GBR. When the
radio resources on the Um interface are insufficient, the GBR is reduced. When the radio
resources on the Um interface are sufficient, the reduced GBR is restored. When the BSC
needs to reduce or restore the GBR, it requests the SGSN to modify the GBRs through the
PFM procedure.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Streaming class service resource preemption: If the BSC cannot offer sufficient transmission
resources for the high-priority subscribers of the streaming class service, the transmission
resources of the low-priority subscribers of the streaming class service will be preempted. If
the radio resources are still insufficient after preemption, the GBR is reduced. If the radio
resources are sufficient, the reduced GBR is restored. This feature ensures that the
high-priority subscribers of the streaming services preferably use the radio resources, thus
reducing the possibility that the packet service access fails due to insufficient radio resources
on the Um interface and improving the user experience.
Dependency
PS-related features are dependent on the following features (the individuals are not listed
here):
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Page 89 of 341
Public

The MS and the SGSN must support this feature.
2.2.2 GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP

Availability
Summary
After the QoS mechanism is introduced, the BSC allocates radio resources to the users
according to the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) of the
QoS. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. To be
compatible with R97/R98 QoS, this feature supports the mapping between R97/98 QoS and
R99 QoS.
Benefits
With this feature, the operator allocates the radio resources according to different service
types and user priorities. As a result, the user with higher priority can seize more bandwidth
and enjoy higher data rate and better quality of service. This feature has the following
benefits:
High-priority users can enjoy more bandwidth whereas low-priority users are subject to
bandwidth constraint.
The bandwidth allocation mechanism is more flexible because the operator can allocate
the radio resources according to different service types and user priorities.
The operator can formulate flexible charging policies.
Description
The BSC allocates the radio resources to the MS according the ARP and THP of the QoS. The
higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth.
Interactive services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP and THP of
the QoS. If the ARPs of the users are the same, the users with higher THP are allocated more
radio resources. If the THPs of the users are the same, the users with higher ARP are allocated
more radio resources.
Other services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP of the QoS. The
users with higher ARP can be allocated more radio resources.
For the services that do not support the QoS, the BSS allocates the radio resources according
to the BEST EFFORT.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Mapping between R97/R98 QoS and R99 QoS: If the MS supports only the R97/R98 QoS,
that is, the MS does not support the GBR, the BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS
according to the 3GPP specifications. After the precedence class of the R97/R98 QoS is
mapped as the ARP of the R99 QoS, the BSC allocates the radio resources based on the ARP.

Page 90 of 341
Public
Configuration of the radio resource allocation priorities: The priorities are configured on the
basis of the service types of the QoS, ARP, and THP. For the services that do not support the
QoS, the priorities are allocated according to the BEST EFFORT. The BSC allocates the radio
resources according to the user priorities. The higher-priority users are allocated more radio
resources. This feature enables the operator to allocate the radio resources according to
different service types and user priorities and thus the bandwidth allocation mechanism is
more flexible.
Dependency
None
The MS and the SGSN must support this feature.
2.2.3 GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the server at the application layer adjusts the transmit rate based on the
bandwidth that can be provided by the radio links, thus avoiding IP packet loss and timeout of
the IP packet transmission. As a result, the performance of the services such as large-sized
email sending, webpage browsing, and file transfer is improved. In addition, the packet
performance is greatly improved when multiple services are processed simultaneously.
Benefits
Improves the downlink throughput when the quality of the radio link is poor.
Reduces the download time when multiple webpages are downloaded simultaneously.
Ensures high bandwidth usage, reduces the delay of the packet service, and enhances the
fairness of the bandwidth seizure of various packet service flows.
Improves the performance of the packet service. For example, when large-sized files are
involved in the packet service, such as FTP downloading and email sending, this feature
shortens the service delay and thus improves the user experience.

Page 91 of 341
Public
Description
Compared with the reactive queue management (a technique which drops the overflowed
packets only when the queue is full), this feature provides active queue management and
real-time monitoring of the buffer queue to monitor the network congestion. Once the
network is congested, the system drops the data packets proactively and adjusts the sending
rate at the TCP sending end to maintain the buffer queue at a certain length to reduce the
congestion.
Therefore, the throughput of the TCP service is maximized, the data buffer size is reduced,
and the interactive time and response time of the services such as webpage browsing are
saved.
In GSM, the packet service uses the TCP/IP protocol in most cases. When multiple
connections co-exist, the strong connection in a system may result in long transmission time
over the weak connection. For example, a subscriber clicks a button on an HTTP webpage
when FTP downloading is in progress. In such a case, a long time elapses before the
corresponding webpage is displayed because the link resource is occupied by the FTP service.
The PS active package management is applicable to scenarios where congestion may occur
because of bandwidth limitation. It can reduce the network congestion caused by the TCP data
flow, so the service throughput is increased and the service delay is decreased.
The PS active package management performs queue management for only interactive services,
background services, and services that do not support the QoS. The queue management is not
performed for real-time services, such as conversational services and streaming services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
2.2.4 GBFD-119905 PoC QoS

Availability

Page 92 of 341
Public
Summary
The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of real-time packet service that has high
bandwidth and delay requirements. To guarantee the service quality and real-time
performance, Huawei GBSS provides the QoS measures such as GBR, reduced data
transmission delay, and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation.
Benefits
This feature guarantees the real-time performance of the PoC service, improves the voice
quality of the PoC service, and enhances the user experience. It provides the operator with
competitive advantages and enables the operator to provide differentiated services for data
service subscribers. It also increases the service revenue.
Description
The PoC service is a type of group call service implemented on the GSM network. The PoC
service adopts the packet switching technology and is carried on the GPRS/EGPRS network.
The PoC service involves subscriber authentication, conversation establishment, media
dispatching, charging, and strategy control, most of which run on the PoC server in the CN.
The PoC signaling and voice data are carried over GPRS/EGPRS. The GBSS transparently
transfers these packets to the CN for further processing. In contrast to the packet service, the
PoC service carries speech signals and requires low transfer delay. If the transfer delay is high,
the user experience is affected. Huawei GBSS is able to identify the PoC service and provides
certain measures to guarantee the QoS. These measures include GBR, reduced data
transmission delay, and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation.
GBR: The resources are allocated based on the GBR. If the GBR cannot be guaranteed, it is
re-negotiated and the resources are then allocated based on the negotiated GBR.
Reduced data transmission delay: The services are scheduled based on the priorities. The
high-priority services are preferably scheduled and the services with the same priority are
scheduled in turn.
Balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation: In most cases, the PoC service requires the
uplink TBF and downlink TBF simultaneously and symmetrical traffic in the uplink and
downlink. Therefore, the balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation enables a similar
number of PDCHs to be allocated in the uplink and downlink if the multislot class of the MS
permits and if the requirements of GBR are met.
Enhancement
None
Dependency

Page 93 of 341
Public

GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR)
2.2.5 GBFD-119906 Conversational QoS

Availability
Summary
Conversational QoS refers to the QoS of conversational services.
This feature means that when an MS subscribes to a network, the services on the MS are
registered as conversational services. The BSC processes the services on the MS as
conversational services according to the registered QoS information, provided that the MS
supports the reduced latency. In this way, the service transmission delay does not exceed 80
ms and the end-to-end delay does not exceed 300 ms, thus meeting the high requirements of
conversational services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming for the transmission delay.
Benefits
With the development of IP-based services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming, the users'
requirements for the service transmission delay become increasingly higher. The QoS of
conversational services can achieve enhanced QoS and improved user experience. The details
are as follows:
Helping operators to achieve enhanced QoS of PS services, improve the competitiveness

of GSM products in the PS domain, and attract more VIP users
Enhancing user experience and improving the core competitiveness of operators
Increasing operators revenues by improving the performance of PS services and

implementing value-added services such as VoIP and PoC
Description
The conversational service is a type of real-time service and has high requirements for the
transmission delay. As specified by the related protocol, the transmission delay of
conversational services cannot exceed 80 ms. In general, to ensure user satisfaction, the
end-to-end delay for VoIP services cannot exceed 300 ms.
Conversational services use the RTTI TBF so that the requirements of the conversation QoS
for transmission delay are met. The scheduling period of radio blocks based on the BTTI TBF
is 20 ms and the scheduling period of radio blocks based on the RTTI TBF is 10 ms. If the
MS does not support the reduced latency, the BSC also allows the MS to run conversational
services. The BSC allocates the BTTI TBF to the MS and tries to meet the requirement of
conversation QoS for the transmission delay. Because the capability of the MS is limited, the
BSC is unable to guarantee that the MS can meet the requirement of conversation QoS for the
transmission delay.

Page 94 of 341
Public
Because PS services are transparently transmitted on the BSC, the BSC cannot exactly
identify the service type of the MS. Therefore, the BSC can determine the service type only
based on the information that the MS registers in the HLR.
The criteria for checking whether the services on the MS meet the QoS of conversational
services are not the actual services running on the MS but the following two conditions:
1.
Whether conversational services are registered during the registration of the MS
2.
Whether the MS supports the reduced latency
Only when the previous two conditions are met, the transmission delay of services on the MS
over the Um interface may meet the requirement of Conversation QoS.
If the MS supports the reduced latency, employ the policy of binding the RTTI feature and the
FANR feature. The RTTI feature can reduce RTT, and the FANR feature can greatly reduce
the response time of the MS in case that the signal quality on the Um interface is poor.
Because the current GBSS version supports the RTTI and FANR feature only in IP/HDLC
transmission mode, Conversation QoS can be optimally supported in IP/HDLC transmission
mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
This feature only applies to IP/HDLC networking scenarios, the PEUa/POUc boards are
needed as Abis interface board, the DPUc boards are needed in GMPS/GEPS subrack.
GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction
2.2.6 GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2)

Availability

Page 95 of 341
Public
Summary
The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet
transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell according to the
measurement report.
Benefits
Based on the receive quality of the MS and receive level of the neighboring cell, this feature
enables the network-controlled MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. Thus, the
subscriber can obtain better packet service, the performance of the packet service in the whole
network is improved, and the resource usage is increased.
Description
In NC2 mode, the network instructs the MS to perform cell reselection. In this manner, the
MS can reselect a better cell because the network has a clearer view of the actual network
condition than the MS does. Thus, a better network performance is achieved.
When the MS is in packet transfer mode, the network helps to reselect a cell with better
receive level and lighter load for the MS based on the measurement report and the network
load condition.
The NC2 is triggered under the following scenarios:
1)
The downlink receive quality of the MS drops rapidly.
2) The reselection does not occur and the number of received packet measurement reports
reaches a certain threshold.
In these cases, the network helps the MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. As a result,
the user experience is enhanced, and the performance of the packet service in the whole
network is improved.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Inter-BSC NC2: The network can select the neighboring cell controlled by another BSC as the
target cell and initiate the cell re-selection procedure.
NC2 based on cell load: When the load of PS services in the cell exceeds a specified threshold,
the MS that meets the requirement of neighboring cell level threshold is reselected to the
neighboring cell with light load.
Support for NC2 of the target cell of the WCDMA system: The network can select the target
cell of the WCDMA system for cell reselection based on the measurement reports.
Dependency
Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.

Page 96 of 341
Public

GBFD-114151 DTMDependency on other NEs
2.2.7 GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

Availability
Summary
NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection. To implement rapid PS access after cell
reselection, the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell
reselection. Therefore, the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized.
Benefits
Increases the cell reselection speed, minimizes the service interruption time due to the
cell reselection, and enhances the user experience.
Caters to the services that have higher requirements for delay and throughput (such as
the streaming service).
Increases the system capacity because the resources of the original cell can be released
rapidly after the cell reselection.
Description
The NACC feature enables the MS to access the new cell rapidly after cell reselection and
perform data transmission without receiving the complete system information.
The NACC feature does not control the cell reselection of the MS, but notifies the network to
send the system information in advance when the MS decides to reselect a cell and delays the
cell reselection. In this manner, this feature increases the cell reselection speed of the MS,
thus greatly reducing the data transmission interruption time due to cell reselection.
Because the cell reselection speed is increased, the MS can rapidly notify the SGSN. The
SGSN can then rapidly detect that the cell reselection occurs. As a result, the resources of the
original cell can be quickly released to other users and thus the system capacity is increased.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Support for resource reservation in the target cell: When the network receives the cell
reselection decision of the MS, it reserves the required radio resources in the target cell to
ensure that the MS can obtain sufficient resources for service recovery after reselection.
Support for NACC between BSCs or between BSC and RNC: This application enhancement
can reduce the delay of cell reselection between BSCs or between the BSC and the RNC. It
requires the BSC to support the RIM procedure to obtain the system information of the
Page 97 of 341
Public
external cell. During cell reselection, if the BSC has the system information of the external
cell, it sends the system information to the MS. Otherwise, the BSC initiates the RIM
procedure to request the system information and save the system information for future use.
Dependency
Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.
GBFD-114101 GPRS or
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
2.2.8 GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status (PSI)

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the MS requests the system information that it requires by sending the
Packet SI Status message to the BSC to reduce the service interruption time or service delay.
Benefits
This feature is used together with the NACC to reduce the interruption time of the packet
service due to cell reselection, thus improving the packet service quality and enhancing the
user experience.
Description
The MS in packet transfer mode notifies the BSC of the system information it requires by
sending the Packet SI Status message to the BSC. The BSC then sends the system information
to the MS on the PACCH. The MS uses the obtained system information for the packet
service being processed to avoid the service interruption or delay.
This feature is used together with the NACC to speed up the cell reselection and reduce the
service interruption time.
Enhancement
None

Page 98 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
None
2.2.9 GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination

Availability
Summary
When no Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is configured and the MS is in
packet transfer state, the network sends CS paging messages through the PACCH. Then, the
MS in packet transfer state can respond to the CS paging message.
Benefits
With this feature, the MS in packet transfer state can receive the CS paging message, thus
avoiding the drop of network paging rate when the PS services are performed.
Description
When the common class B MS is in packet transfer state, it only listens to the paging message
on the PACCH. When no Gs interface is configured, the MS in packet transfer state cannot
respond to the CS paging message because the CS paging message is sent on the PCH. This
problem can be solved through BSS paging coordination.
After the BSC receives a CS paging message over the A or Gb interface, BSS paging
coordination enables the BSC to query whether the MS is performing PS services according
to the IMSI carried in the paging message. If the MS is in packet transfer state, the BSC sends
a paging message to the MS through the PACCH; if the MS is in idle state, the BSC sends a
paging message to the MS through the PCH.
BSS paging coordination is independent of the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and
SGSN and is independent of Network Operation Mode I. The GBSC independently
determines whether the paging message is sent on the PCH or on the PACCH. If no Gs
interface is configured in a network with large amount of PS services, BSS paging
coordination helps increase the paging success rate.
Enhancement
None

Page 99 of 341
Public
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
MS should support.
2.2.10 GBFD-119502 PS Handover

Availability
Summary
The PS handover involves the internal inter-cell handover and the external inter-cell handover
(including the inter-RAT handover).
Benefits
The interruption period of PS services during handover is shortened, thus assuring the QoS of
PS services especially conversational services. Thus, operators can provide more value-added
services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming to increase revenue.
Description
The PS handover complies with the related 3GPP R6 protocols, mainly the 3GPP TS 44.060,
48.018, and 43.129.
Conversational services have high requirement for the interruption period and cell reselection
cannot meet this requirement. With the introduction of PS handover, before the MS is handed
over, radio resources are allocated to the MS in the target cell. This greatly decreases the
latency of cell change and reduces the service interruption period to less than 150 ms. Besides,
PS handover takes into account factors such as the signal level and the load in the neighboring
cells in advance and thus ensures the success rate of PS handover and the throughput of the
new cell. In this way, QoS is assured.
The PS handover involves the internal inter-cell handover and the external handover
(including the inter-RAT handover). In addition, the PS handover involves also the handover
triggered by the MS in NC0 or NC1 mode and the handover triggered by the network side in
NC2 mode.

Page 100 of 341
Public
The GBSS provides performance statistics related to PS handover. Based on the types of PS
handover, measurement counters are classified into intra-RAT handover counters, inter-RAT
handover counters.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
None
2.2.11 GBFD-119503 Early TBF Establishment

Availability
Summary
The early TBF establishment is a function introduced in 3GPP R7. In the early TBF
establishment feature, the TBF is allocated to the MS prior to data transfer. Thus, the service
access delay is shortened.
Benefits
In the early TBF establishment feature, the delay of the uplink data is decreased by as much
as hundreds of milliseconds (about the time for TBF establishment) compared with that in the
traditional TBF establishment. This improves the user experiences of the session services such
as the PoC service and the VoIP service.
Description
The packet transfer delay is a key index of the packet services, particularly the delay sensitive
session services. The early TBF establishment feature supports the pre-allocation of the TBF
before the MS sends data. In this way, the transmission delay of the uplink data is reduced.
Generally, the MS applies for the TBF resources only when the MS has data to transmit. The
BSC then starts to allocate the TBF resources. In the early TBF establishment feature, the
TBF resource application is triggered prior to the data transfer of the MS. The BSC
pre-allocates the uplink TBF resources for the MS and sets the TBF to inactive state. In a

Page 101 of 341
Public
specified period, the MS can send the data directly without the need for establishing the TBF.
After the specified period, the BSC releases the TBF to save the packet transmission
resources.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF
2.2.12 GBFD-119504 PS Power Control

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the BSC to adjust the transmit power of the BTS according to the link
quality of the Um interface. In this way, the desirable link quality can be ensured without
requiring the maximum power on the PDCH. The reduced transmit power of the BTS helps
decrease the interference in the network and lower the power consumption of the BTS.
Benefits
This feature lowers the BTS transmit power without compromising the link quality. In this
way, the network interference and power consumption can be reduced, while the system
capacity can be increased.
Description
PS power control consists of PS downlink closed-loop power control, PS uplink open-loop
power control, and PS uplink closed-loop power control. The function of PS downlink
closed-loop power control is provided by this GBSS12.0 feature. The function of PS uplink
open-loop power control is introduced in GBSS8.0, provided by the basic feature
GBFD-119115 Power Control. The function of PS uplink closed-loop power control is not yet
supported.

Page 102 of 341
Public
When this feature is enabled, the MS measures the quality of each downlink radio block and
then reports the measured quality to the BSC through the PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message. After processing the received information, the BSC performs the PS
downlink power control decision. If the BSC decides to perform power control, it calculates
the power attenuation value by using the PS downlink power control algorithm and then sends
the value to the BTS. Based on the received power attenuation value, the BTS adjusts the
transmit power on the current radio block.
This feature is suitable for a network with densely-scattered sites, high rate of frequency reuse,
and a large number of users. By controlling the transmit power on the PDCH in such a
network, the network interference and power consumption can be reduced, while the system
capacity can be increased.
This feature applies to only the EGPRS services with MCS9 coding scheme, but not to the
GPRS services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
2.2.13 GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two

Thresholds
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performed
according to the traffic load in the cell. This feature ensures the speech quality of the cell,
reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, and
effectively improves the channel utilization.

Page 103 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature improves the CS access performance (indicated by the call setup success rate and
access delay) and PS retainability performance (indicated by the TBF call drop rate in uplink
and downlink).
Description
If the rate of idle channels in a cell is greater than the higher threshold for CS idle channel
rate, the CS traffic in the cell is light. In this case, idle TCHs can be dynamically converted
into PDCHs to improve the throughput of PS services. If the rate of idle channels in a cell is
smaller than the lower threshold for CS idle channel rate, the CS traffic in the cell is heavy. In
this case, PDCHs can be dynamically converted into TCHs to reduce the possibility of CS
services preempting the radio resources of PS services. If the rate of idle channels in a cell is
greater than the lower threshold for CS idle channel rate and at the same time smaller than the
higher threshold for CS idle channel rate, the CS traffic load and PS traffic load in the cell are
balanced. In this case, the dynamic conversion between PDCH and TCH does not need to be
performed. The higher threshold for CS idle channel rate and lower threshold for CS idle
channel rate are configured on the basis of the traffic load in the cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
2.2.14 GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRS Time slot multiplexing

priority
Availability
Summary
When a GPRS user and an EGPRS user are multiplexed onto the same PDCH, the downlink
rate of the EGPRS user can be increased by adjusting the scheduling priority of the EGPRS
user to a level higher than that of the GPRS user. Based on the downlink rate increase, the
service experience of the EGPRS user is improved and the system throughput is increased.

Page 104 of 341
Public
Benefits
Operators can attract users to EGPRS services or GPRS services by adjusting the
multiplexing priorities of GPRS and EGPRS users on the PDCH, thereby increasing the
downlink rate of EGPRS users. Based on the downlink rate increase, the PS service
experience of EGPRS users is improved, and the system throughput is increased.
Description
By setting scheduling weight parameters related to EGPRS and GPRS users in a cell,
operators can adopt different uplink and downlink scheduling strategies for EGPRS users and
GPRS users, thereby improving the service experience of EGPRS users. When an EGPRS
user and a GPRS user are multiplexed onto the same PDCH, the radio block sent in downlink
to the EGPRS user must be in the GMSK modulation mode during the scheduling of the
uplink radio block of the GPRS user. This decreases the downlink rate of the EGPRS user. If
the scheduling priority of the GPRS user is lower than that of the EGPRS user, the number of
times that the downlink radio block of the EGPRS user uses the GMSK modulation mode is
decreased, because scheduling times of the uplink radio block of the GPRS user are less than
the scheduling times of the uplink radio block of the EGPRS user. In addition, the scheduling
times of the downlink radio block of the EGPRS user are more than the scheduling times of
the downlink radio block of the GPRS user. Therefore, the downlink rate of the EGPRS user
and the system throughput are increased.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
2.2.15 GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA)

Availability
Summary
EDA helps assign more timeslots in the uplink to the MS, thus improving the uplink
throughput.

Page 105 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature improves the uplink rate and helps transmit large amount of data in the uplink. In
this way, the user satisfaction is improved.
Description
Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS downlink services outnumber the GPRS/EGPRS uplink services.
However, in some cases, a higher uplink bandwidth is required; for example, a large-sized
email is sent through the GPRS/EGPRS. The EDA feature enables a single MS to be assigned
with four timeslots in the uplink. If the MS high multislot classes feature is supported, the MS
with the high multislot class 34 can be assigned with five timeslots in the uplink, thus meeting
the high bandwidth requirements in the uplink.
EDA is based on the uplink dynamic allocation. The network assigns multiple timeslots in the
uplink to the MS. The MS listens to all the assigned PDCHs. When the MS hears the assigned
USF on the assigned PDCH, the MS uses the uplink block corresponding to this PDCH and
the uplink block corresponding to the assigned PDCH with a greater timeslot number. Once
the MS is able to send uplink blocks, it will not listen to the following assigned channels.
Therefore, the MS can use more uplink channels.
The uplink extended dynamic allocation requires the support from the MS. The MS will
indicate whether it supports GPRS uplink extended dynamic allocation and EGPRS uplink
extended dynamic allocation through the message containing the information about radio
access capability.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
None
MS should support.
2.2.16 GBFD-119402 MS High Multislot Classes

Availability

Page 106 of 341
Public
Summary
High multislot classes ensures that a maximum of five timeslots in the uplink or downlink are
assigned to a single MS, thus improving the uplink or downlink throughput of a single MS.
Benefits
The BSS supports the MS with a high multislot classes of 30 to 34. A maximum of five
timeslots on the downlink can be assigned to an MS. If an MS is of the high multislot class 34,
a maximum of five timeslots in the uplink can be assigned to the MS. Thus, compared with
four timeslots in the uplink or downlink, the throughput is increased by 25%.
Description
The BSS supports the MS with high multislot classes from 30 to 34. A maximum of five
timeslots on the downlink can be assigned to an MS. If the MS is of the high multislot class
34, a maximum of five timeslots in the uplink can be assigned to the MS. For a GPRS MS,
the maximum data rate increases from 85 kbit/s to 107 kbit/s (the throughput at RLC in
theory);for an EGPRS MS, the maximum data rate increases from 236 kbit/s to 296 kbit/s (the
throughput at RLC in theory). The total number of timeslots on both the uplink and downlink
cannot exceed six. That is, if five timeslots on the downlink are assigned to the MS, then only
one timeslot in the uplink can be assigned to the MS. The following table lists the multislot
capacity of MSs with multislot classes 30 to 34:
High Multislot
Class
Maximum
Number of
Downlink
Timeslots
Maximum
Number of
Uplink
Timeslots
Maximum Number
of Timeslots
30
31
32
33
34
For an MS with high multislot classes 32 to 34, if more than two timeslots in the uplink are
assigned to the MS, the feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) is
required.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.

Page 107 of 341
Public

GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
If more than two timeslots in the uplink are required, the GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic
Allocation (EDA) must be used.
2.2.17 GBFD-114151 DTM

Availability
Summary
Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) allows simultaneous transfer of CS service and PS service. That
is, a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during the call conversation .The 3G
network provides concurrent CS service and PS service. With DTM, the subscribers in a GSM
network can enjoy services similar to those provided in a 3G network. In addition, in areas
with insufficient 3G coverage, subscribers can use the services that are similar to 3G services
through the GSM network.
Benefits
DTM supports concurrent CS service and PS service. That is, a subscriber can provide PS
service without affecting the CS service.
With DTM, the concurrent CS services and PS services which are originally available only in
the 3G network are now available in the GSM network.
With the passage of time and development of technology, the data services are becoming the
new area of profit growth. The concurrent CS service and PS service becomes a new
requirement. Without DTM, only the class A mobile phone with complex hardware supports
concurrent CS service and PS service. However, due to its complexity, few manufacturers
provide such mobile phones. The implementation of DTM is a foundation for the extensive
application of data service. With the interaction between the CS services and PS services and
the multimedia services provided by operators, the call duration is prolonged and a large
amount of data traffic is generated. This considerably increases the revenue of operators.
Description
DTM is a 3GPP-defined standard function. This feature implements the simplified operation
function of the class A mobile phone, that is, concurrent CS services and PS services. In DTM
mode, the CS resource (TCH) and PS resource (PDCH) are assigned to the MS
simultaneously. According to the multislot capacity of the MS, different number of channels

Page 108 of 341
Public
in the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the MS to meet the requirement for different
bandwidths. DTM supports MS with multislot class 5 and higher classes. According to the
MS multislot capacity, the BSC assigns two channels in the uplink or downlink to the MS:
one for CS services and the other for PS services. The MS multislot class 9 with DTM can be
assigned with one channel for CS service and two channels for PS service.
PS
CS
PS
PS
CS
CS
PS
PS
CS
CS
PS
PS
CS
Downlink
CS
PS
PS
CS
Uplink
PS
Downlink
Uplink
CLASS 5
CLASS 9
After DTM is enabled, the BSC must support BSS paging coordination in packet transfer
mode if the Network Operation Mode II or III is configured in a cell.
For an MS supporting DTM, when the MS initiates a location update in CS mode, the CS
channels (FACCH or SDCCH) can be used for location update and no PDCH is required. In
this case, the channel resources in PS domain are saved.
In DTM mode, the MS can establish the PS connection only after the PS connection is
established. If an MS providing data service needs to switch to the DTM mode, the TBF must
be released first; then, the MS switches to CS mode and a TBF connection. After that, the MS
switches to DTM mode. The following figure shows the state transition in DTM mode:
Figure 2-1 State transition in DTM mode
Enhancement
None

Page 109 of 341
Public
Dependency
required.
GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination
GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2)
The MSC and MS must support this feature.
2.2.18 GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM

Availability
Summary
Based on the common DTM feature, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth of the uplink PS
services of the MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the
channel assignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink
PDCHs and one downlink PDCH are assigned to the MS.
Benefits
Based on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the uplink rate. Theoretically, the uplink rate
of the EGPRS MS can reach 110 kbit/s. Class11 DTM provides the bandwidth to support
streaming services.
With the Class 11 DTM function, the uplink rate or downlink rate can be increased as per
requirement, thus improving the user experience. In addition, the increased data flow can also
increase the revenues of operators.
Description
In DTM mode, the MS supports both CS service and PS service simultaneously. Besides
supporting the channel combination of Class5 DTM and Class9 DTM, the MS using Class11
DTM can occupy two uplink PDCHs and one downlink PDCH used together with EDA.
When the MS provides mainly the uplink services, Class11 DTM meets the requirements of
the MS more effectively.

Page 110 of 341
Public
PS
CS
PS
CS
Downlink
PS
Uplink
CLASS
11
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114151 DTM
GBFD-119401 EDA
DTM should be supported by the MSC and Class11 DTM should be supported by the MS.
2.2.19 GBFD-119404 HMC DTM

Availability
Summary
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PS
services of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink or downlink PDCHs
respectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech +
3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink.

Page 111 of 341
Public
Benefits
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM triples the uplink and downlink rates. This improves the
user experience and provides bandwidth to support streaming services. In addition, the
increased data flow can also increase the revenues of operators.
Description
The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP protocols are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 31,33, 36-38,
and 4144. The classes higher than class 31 are called High Multislot classes DTM (HMC
DTM). The DTM multislot capacity is in direct proportion to the uplink/downlink rate. The
higher the DTM multislot class supported by the GBSS equipment, the higher the
uplink/downlink rate.
Huawei HMC DTM supports multislot classes 31,33. In other words, based on the multislot
capacity of MS, a maximum of five channels in the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the
MS. The maximum number of channels on both the uplink and downlink is six. Except one
TCH assigned to the speech in the uplink and downlink respectively, a maximum of three
PDCHs in the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the MS.
The following table lists the multislot capacity of MSs with multislot classes 31 to 33:
Multislot class
Maximum number of slots

Rx
Tx
Sum
31
33
For an MS with multislot classes 32 and 33, if more than two channels in the uplink are
assigned to the MS, EDA must be enabled.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.

Page 112 of 341
Public

GBFD-114101 DTM
GBFD-119401 EDA
GBFD-119402 MS High multislot classes
DTM should be supported by the MSC DTM HMC should be supported by the MS.
2.2.20 GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data

Availability
Summary
The GBSS equipment supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with
a high rate of 14.4 kbit/s.
Benefits
Compared with common CS-based PS services, this feature provides PS services with higher
bandwidth.
Description
Huawei GBSS system supports different types of bearer services specified by GSM
specifications. The GBSS provides lower-layer connections and transmits service data to the
upper layer instead of processing these services. Huawei GBSS system supports the transfer
of the PS services on individual speech channels and the CS-based PS services with a high
rate of 14.4 kbit/s.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 113 of 341
Public

None
The MSC must support this feature.
2.3 EDGE Evolution

2.3.1 GBFD-510801 MSRD
Availability
Summary
MSRD is the abbreviation for MS Station Receiver Diversity.
Benefits
The receiver sensitivity of the MS is increased by about 3 dB and the downlink coverage
distance is increased.
In conjunction with the dual-antenna interference cancellation (DAIC) technology, the

MSRD feature improves the anti-interference capability of the downlink, thus expanding
the downlink traffic capacity.
Description
The MSRD feature improves the signal receiving capability of the MS. With the introduction
of the DAIC technology, the MS obtains enhanced channel diversity. In addition, the GMSK
modulation scheme has an equivalent anti-interference capability with the 8-PSK modulation
scheme. Thus, the data rate of the MS is improved and increases system capacity.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.

Page 114 of 341
Public
The MS performing GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink cannot perform

GBFD-510801 MSRD.
2.3.2 GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink

Availability
Summary
Dual Carriers in Downlink is a method of increasing the downlink data rate. By using the
second downlink carrier, the downlink data rate is doubled theoretically.
Benefits
The downlink data rate is greatly increased. In this way, the GSM network can provide
subscribers with data services similar to those provided in a 3G network.
Description
The basic idea of the Dual Carriers in Downlink feature is to increase the number of timeslots
used by the base station to transmit data to an MS in a radio block period. The MS data rate is
increased by increasing the number of reception timeslots. The two carriers must be on the
same frequency band.
Take an MS supporting EGPRS2-A as an example. In a radio block period, the MS can
receive the data on only one carrier and the maximum number of timeslots that can be
assigned is five. Assume that the highest-rate coding scheme DAS12 is used. Then, the data
rate on each timeslot is 98.4 kbit/s, and the maximum data rate of the MS is 98.4 x 5 = 492
kbit/s. With the introduction of the technology of Dual Carriers in Downlink, the MS can
receive the data on two carriers in one radio block period. Therefore, the maximum number of
timeslots is 10. Assume that the DAS12 is used. Then, the maximum data rate of the MS is
98.4 x 10 = 984 kbit/s.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.

Page 115 of 341
Public
The MS performing GBFD-510801 MSRD cannot perform GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in

Downlink.
This feature relies on the following features:
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
2.3.3 GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A

Availability
This feature is available for beta use from GBSS9.0.
Summary
The higher uplink performance for GERAN evolution (HUGE) solution is divided into two
phases: EGPRS2-A and EGPRS2-B.The uplink EGPRS2-A is the first phase of the solution.
With 16QAM modulation, this feature increases the rate of PS services by up to 30% in the
uplink theoretically..
Benefits
The rate of PS services in the uplink is increased greatly. When four timeslots are used for
uplink data transmission, the theoretical rate of EGPRS is increased from 230 kbit/s to 300
kbit/s.
Description
One of the aims of the GSM/EDGE radio access network (GERAN) evolution is to increase
the uplink and downlink rate of PS services. For the 3GPP GERAN, the HUGE solution is
used to increase the data rate in the uplink. With the 16QAM modulation, the GSM/EGPRS
network supports higher uplink data rate.
The uplink EGPRS2-A is the first phase of HUGE. With this feature, the rate of PS services in
the uplink is almost increased by 30% in theory. When four timeslots are used for the uplink
data transmission, the theoretical rate of EGPRS is increased from 230 kbit/s to 300 kbit/s.

Page 116 of 341
Public
The new coding schemes supported by EGPRS2-A are listed in the following table.
UAS-11
UAS-10
UAS-9
UAS-8
UAS-7
MCS Coding Scheme

Modulation Scheme
16QAM
Family
Apad10
Apad10
Bit Rate (kbps/TS)
44.8
51.2
59.2
67.2
76.8
Number of RLC Data Blocks
Payload (octets)
2x56
2x64
2x74
3x56
3x64
This feature only applies to Abis interface IP networking scenarios, including Abis IP over
E1/T1/cSTM-1 and Abis IP over FE / GE. Does not apply to Abis interface TDM networking
scene, that is, Abis TDM over E1/T1/cSTM-1.
Due to less terminal support Uplink EGPRS2-A, this feature is provided for trial, does not
recommend for commercial use.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios, the PEUa / POUc boards are needed as
Abis interface board, the DPUc boards are needed in GMPS / GEPS subrack.
Page 117 of 341
Public

Refer to the BTS Dependency of the feature list
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 or
GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization
This feature should be supported by MS.
2.3.4 GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A

Availability
This feature is available for beta use from GBSS9.0.
Summary
The reduced symbols duration/higher order modulation and Turbo codes (REDHOT) solution
is divided into two phases: downlink EGPRS2-A and downlink EGPRS2-B. The downlink
EGPRS2-A is the first phase of the solution. With 16QAM and 32QAM modulation, this
feature almost doubles the rate of PS services in the downlink theoretically.
Benefits
The rate of PS services on the downlink is almost doubled. When ten timeslots are used on the
downlink, the theoretical data rate of EGPRS is increased from 592 kbit/s to 984 kbit/s.
Description
One of the aims of the GSM/EDGE radio access network (GERAN) evolution is to increase
the uplink and downlink rate of PS services. For the 3GPP GERAN, the REDHOT solution is
used to increase the data rate on the downlink. With higher order modulation (16QAM and
32QAM), high symbol rate (1.2 times), and Turbo codes, the GSM/EGPRS network supports
higher downlink data rate.
The downlink EGPRS2-A is the first phase of REDHOT. With this feature, the rate of PS
services on the downlink is doubled in theory. When ten timeslots are used on the downlink,
the theoretical data rate of EGPRS is increased from 592 kbit/s to 984 kbit/s.

Page 118 of 341
Public
The new coding schemes supported by EGPRS2-A are listed in the following table.
DAS-12
DAS-11
DAS-10
DAS-9
DAS-8
DAS-7
DAS-6
DAS-5
MCS
Coding
Scheme
Modulation
Scheme
8PSK
Family
Ap
Bp
Ap
Bp
Ap
Bp
Bit Rate
(kbps/TS)
22
.4
27.2
32.8
44.8
54.4
65.6
81.6
98.4
Number of
RLC Data
Blocks
Payload
(octets)
1x
56
2x82
3x68
16QA-M
32QAM
1x6
8
1x8
2
2x56
2x68
3x82
Due to less terminal support Uplink EGPRS2-A, this feature is provided for trial, does not
recommend for commercial use.
Enhancement
None

Page 119 of 341
Public
Dependency
required.
This feature should be supported by MS.
2.3.5 GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction

Availability
Summary
The Latency Reduction feature consists of two sub-features: Reduced Transmission Time
Interval (RTTI) and Fast Ack/Nack Report (FANR).
Benefits
This feature reduces the packet transmission latency and thus improves the customer
satisfaction.
Description
Latency reduction is important to GERAN evolution. In GERAN, the conversational services,
such as VoIP and Gaming, require short service latency. For the VoIP service that meets
customer requirements, the end-to-end latency should not exceed 300 ms, and the Frame
Error Rate (FER) should not exceed 2%. If the latency is within the permissible range, data
can be retransmitted to meet the FER requirement, thus improving customer satisfaction. In
addition, short latency can improve the customer experience of interactive and streaming
services.
Two technologies can be used to reduce latency: RTTI and FANR.

Page 120 of 341
Public
RTTI: One radio block is still transmitted over four bursts, whereas two timeslots are
combined. Each timeslot transmits radio blocks of 10 ms TTI. In this way, the four bursts are
transmitted on two consecutive TDMA frames.
With the introduction of RTTI, the transmission latency on the Um interface and the TTI in
the access network are reduced. The TTI is reduced from 130 ms (the basic TTI is 20 ms) to
60 ms (the RTTI is 10 ms), and the single retransmission latency is reduced from 185 ms
(Basic TTI ) to 95 ms (the RTTI is 10 ms).
FANR: Although RTTI can reduce transmission latency, under the existing Ack/Nack
reporting policy, when an RLC data block is erroneous or missing, this problem is not
immediately reported to the sender and another RLC data block is not retransmitted. As a
result, latency is required for assembling RLC data blocks into an LLC PDU. Therefore, an
efficient Ack/Nack feedback policy helps reduce the LLC PDU reassembly latency. Huawei
BSC supports FANR and enables the immediate feedback of data errors and the
retransmission of RLC data blocks. In this way, the LLC PDU reassembly latency is
decreased and the signaling overhead is reduced.

Page 121 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
required.
GBFD-114151 DTM
This feature should be supported by the MS and the BTS.

Page 122 of 341
Public
Smart MBB
3.1 Smartphone Solution

3.1.1 GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs
Availability
Introduction
Based on configuration of BCCH TRX timeslot 0 as the BCCH physical channel, the Multiple
CCCHs feature supports also configuring timeslots 2, 4, and 6 as the BCCH physical channel.
This increases the CCCH capacity within a cell, which improves the paging and random
access capability of the cell.
Benefits
The Multiple CCCHs feature increases the number of CCCHs in a cell, thus improving the
paging and random access capability of the cell.
Description
In GSM networks, BCCH physical channels are divided into the following several types of
logical channels:
Downlink: FCCH, SCH, BCCH, PCH, AGCH, NCH
Uplink: RACH
Of these, the PCH, AGCH, NCH, and RACH are referred to as CCCHs.
One cell is normally configured with a single BCCH physical channel and the BCCH TRX
timeslot 0 is configured as the BCCH physical channel. This Multiple CCCHs feature
supports configuring timeslots 2, 4, and 6 of the BCCH TRX as the BCCH physical channel.
These BCCH physical channels do not include downlink FCCH, SCH, or NCH. They do
include the downlink BCCH, PCH, and AGCH as well as the uplink RACH. The contents sent
over timeslots 0, 2, 4, and 6 BCCH logical channels are identical; however, the PCH, AGCH,
and RACH channels are able to send different contents. Consequently, configuring multiple
BCCH physical channels increases the CCCH capacity.

Page 123 of 341
Public
The BSC broadcasts the configured number of CCCHs to the MS in system information type
3 messages. The MS determines which timeslot to monitor for call information based on its
own IMSI.
Because BCCH physical uplink channels are all RACH channels, configuration of multiple
CCCHs increases the number of RACH channels within the cell. As a result, the Multiple
CCCHs feature also increases the random access capability of the cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Impact on BSC hardware
None
Impact on BTS hardware
None
Dependency on other GBSS functions
None
None
3.1.2 GBFD-511502 Layered Paging

Availability
Introduction
For the first paging, the BSC sends paging messages to the last cell on which the MS camps
and to its neighboring cells. If the first paging fails, the BSC sends paging messages to the
areas specified by the SGSN for the second paging.
Benefits
This feature narrows down the paging areas for packet switched (PS) services. This helps
lighten the CCCH load of the GSM network.
Description
With the rapid development of PS services in recent years, PS paging messages have
accounted for an increasingly large proportion of paging messages than circuit switched (CS)
paging messages. This leads to heavy traffic load on the CCCHs and reduces the success rate
of CS service admission.
PS paging messages are sent on the basis of routing areas (RAs). In live networks, however,
users processing packet services do not cross a large area. In this case, paging resources are

Page 124 of 341
Public
wasted. To save paging resources, Huawei introduces the Layered Paging feature. This feature
enables the BSC to send paging messages to the last cell that an active PS MS camps on and
to its neighboring cells. The BSC initiates the second paging by RAs if the first paging fails.
PS paging does not affect the user experience even though they may be delayed for a certain
period.
Figure 3-1 Layered paging
Enhancement
None
Dependencies
Impact on BSC hardware
None
Impact on BTS hardware
None
Dependency on other GBSS functions
None
None

Page 125 of 341
Public
Green
4.1 Power Consumption Saving

4.1.1 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
Availability
Summary
This feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power
control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration.
Benefits
Improves the efficiency and accuracy of power control.
Reduces the intra-network interference and the power consumption of the MS and BTS.
Increases the network capacity.
Improves the network performance.
Description
Power control is an important method for radio link control. Based on the expected values set
for parameters and the MRs on the uplink/downlink receive level and receive quality sent by
the BTS, the BSC determines whether to adjust the transmit power of the MS and the BTS.
Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit power while maintaining the
transmission quality.
The HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm feature enhances and optimizes the
GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm,
interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of
threshold configuration.
Optimizing the filtering/interpolation of the MR

Page 126 of 341
Public
With this feature introduced, the incorrect MRs obtained at the initial stage of channel
access do not affect the power control algorithm and thus the change in trend of the
transmit power of the MS can be predicted based on the MRs more timely and correctly.
Optimizing the decision algorithm

Based on the filtered receive level and receive quality, this algorithm considers the gain
of the radio channel from frequency hopping, thus improving the accuracy of decisions.
Setting the power control threshold according to the service type

This algorithm sets different power control thresholds for AMRFR services, AMRHR
services, FR services, and HR services to optimize the power control on the AMR.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Support implementing with GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report.
Dependency
None
None
4.1.2 GBFD-117602 Active Power Control

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the uplink power and the downlink power are calculated immediately after
an MS successfully accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is successfully performed.
Then, the network informs the MS of the calculation result of the uplink power. The BTS and
the MS then transmit signals at proper power. Thus, power control is performed immediately.
Benefits
Through the power control of both the BTS and the MS, the system interference is reduced
and the service quality is improved. In addition, as the power consumption of the BTS and
MS is reduced, energy is saved, and the service time of the MS is prolonged.

Page 127 of 341
Public
Description
With this feature, the uplink power and the downlink power are calculated immediately after
an MS successfully accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is successfully performed.
Then, the network informs the MS of the calculation result of the uplink power. The BTS and
the MS transmit signals at proper power. Thus, power control is performed immediately.
Active power control during MS access

When an MS accesses the network, the following power control procedures are
performed:
Calculation of the path loss: According to 3GPP TS 45.005, the path loss of the MS is
obtained on the basis of the transmit power used by the MS when the MS accesses
the network, and the uplink signal strength measured by the BTS.
Calculation of the transmit power: The transmit power of the MS and the BTS is
obtained on the basis of the path loss of the MS and the expected signal strength in
the uplink and downlink.
Execution of power control: When the TCH request is successful or when the MS
accesses the network, power control is performed immediately. This enables the BTS
and the MS to immediately transmit signals at proper power.
Active power control during intra-BSC handover

During the intra-BSC handover, the path loss of the MS is obtained on the basis of the
BCCH signal strength of the target cell recorded by the source cell before the handover
and the transmit power of the BCCH TRX of the target cell.
The calculation of the transmit power and the execution of power control procedures are
the same as those of active power control during MS access.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
4.1.3 GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC

Availability

Page 128 of 341
Public
Summary
The network side performs active power control for the MS supporting single antenna
interference cancellation (SAIC).
Benefits
In the GSM network, the MS can use only a single antenna because of the limitations in size
and cost. Therefore, the co-channel interference cannot be effectively suppressed and the
spectrum efficiency of the GSM system is reduced. Some attributes of interference are known,
for example, channel modulation type and training sequence. Therefore, it is possible to
improve the anti-interference capability of the receiver. The anti-interference technology
called SAIC is defined in the 3GPP R6 protocol for the MS with a single antenna. SAIC can
enhance the anti-interference capability of the downlink, thus increasing the capacity of the
GSM system. With this feature, the network side performs active power control on the MS
supporting SAIC to reduce the interference of the entire network, expand the system capacity,
reduce the transmit power of the BTS, and save the power consumption.
Description
SAIC is an anti-interference technology for suppressing the co-channel interference and
adjacent-channel interference. The SAIC feature applies mainly to the MS with a single
antenna and is used to reduce the impact of the interference reception of downlink signals
through a signal processing technology. Compared with common mobile phones, the MS
supporting SAIC has stronger anti-interference capacity. The network can modify the power
control policy as required to reduce the transmit power of the BTSs, thus reducing the
interference in the entire network.
In downlink power control, the network checks whether the MS supports the SAIC. If the MS
supports the SAIC, the network decreases the upper downlink level threshold and the lower
downlink level threshold according to the Huawei III power control algorithm; the network
increases the UL Qual.Upper Threshold and UL Qual.Lower Threshold, according to the
Huawei II power control algorithm.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 129 of 341
Public
4.1.4 GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink

Availability
Summary
The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink feature can reduce the power consumption
of the BTS and the frequency interference on the Um interface.
Benefits
This feature reduces the power consumption of the BTS and intra-system interference.
From the perspective of the entire network, this feature reduces the frequency
interference, thus increasing the network capacity.
Description
DTX consists of Voice Activity Detection (VAD) and Silence Descriptor (SID). In addition,
the GBSS automatically generates the comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services.
VAD
When the Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit (TRAU) detests through the VAD module
that the data received from the MSC contains no voice information, it clears the voice
flag bit in the encoded TRAU frame. After identifying the flag bit, the BTS disconnects
the downlink until the flag is reset.
SID
The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID
frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and
then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight
continuous bursts.
Comfortable noise
When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set,
the MS is in the intermittent period. To make subscribers feel that the GSM provides
services continuously, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise in the uplink.
With this feature, the TRAU can reduce the power consumption of the BTS, frequency
interference on the Um interface. In downlink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes
subscribers feel that the communication is continuous by providing the MSs with comfortable
noise.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Configuring the DTX according to the voice coding: DTXs for different voice coding can be
configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR (including FR, EFR, and
AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and AMR HR) voice coding
simultaneously, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX separately. The flexible
configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while maintaining the voice quality.

Page 130 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
None
4.1.5 GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink

Availability
Summary
If the encoder of the MS detects through the VAD module that the received voice signal is
environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID, and then the TRAU restores the
comfortable noise accordingly.
Benefits
This feature reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of
the MS.
From the perspective of the entire network, this feature reduces the frequency
interference, thus increasing the network capacity.
Description
The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS and the co-channel interference on
the Um interface.
DTX consists of VAD and SID. In addition, the system automatically generates the
comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services.
VAD
In uplink DTX mode, if the encoder of the MS detects through the VAD module that the
received signal is environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID. When
receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU judges the SID flag. If the SID flag is set, the MS
is in intermittent period. In this case, the TRAU restores the comfortable noise on the
uplink to make subscribers feel that the communication is continuous.
SID
The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID
frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and

Page 131 of 341
Public
then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight
continuous bursts.
Comfortable noise
When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set,
the MS is in the intermittent period. To make subscribers feel that the GSM provides
continuous services, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise on the uplink.
The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS, the co-channel interference on the
Um interface and the power consumption of the MS, and prolong the call duration and
standby time of the MS. In uplink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes subscribers feel
that the communication is continuous by providing the MSs with comfortable noise.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Configuring the DTX independently according to the voice coding: DTXs for different voice
coding can be configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR (including
FR, EFR, and AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and AMR HR) voice
coding simultaneously, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX separately. The flexible
configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while maintaining the voice quality.
Dependency
None
None
4.1.6 GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

Availability
Summary
In the existing network, the cells are not busy all the time. When some cells are idle, some
TRXs can meet the current traffic requirements. In this case, you can disable the idle TRXs to
reduce the power consumption of the BTS and the operational expenditure of operators.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption and thus greatly reduces the operational
expenditure. The power consumption of TRXs constitutes a major part of the power

Page 132 of 341
Public
consumption of BTSs. In the existing network, however, the TRXs are not always working.
With this feature, the power amplifiers of some idle TRXs are shut down to reduce the power
consumption of the BTS and power costs of operators.
Description
The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown feature can be enabled in a specific period.
Idle TRXs can be shut down based on the prediction of traffic load and traffic volume to save
energy. Alternatively, the power amplifiers of the disabled TRXs can be switched on to ensure
that these TRXs are available for use at any time. Before shutting down a TRX, the BSC
initiates an intra-cell handover for the calls on the TRX and then instructs the BTS to shut
down the TRX when there is no call on the TRX. If some calls on the TRX cannot be handed
over to other TRXs, the BSC does not instruct the BTS to shut down the TRX.
Generally, the channel allocation optimization measure is used together with this feature. That
is, channels are allocated to some centralized TRXs during the channel allocation. The
channels on the BCCH TRX are preferentially allocated to reduce the channel usage on the
non-BCCH TRX, thus reducing the power consumption of the BTS. In addition, the BTS
allocates channels base118601d on the priorities of TRXs. That is, the channels are
preferentially allocated to TRXs with high priorities. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy
channels on a few TRXs so that as many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) when a frequency hopping group is
involved in baseband hopping
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) when inter-module RF hopping is applied
GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping(in only GBSS9.0 and former version)
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing
None

Page 133 of 341
Public
4.1.7 GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

on Timeslot Level
Availability
Summary
The power amplifier consumption constitutes a major part of the TRX power consumption,
which constitutes a major part of the BTS power consumption. The TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level feature reduces the static power consumption by
controlling the power amplifier on timeslot level to make the idle timeslots consume no
power.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption of the BTS and thus greatly reduces the
operational expenditure. The power amplifier consumption constitutes a major part of the
TRX power consumption, which constitutes a major part of the BTS power consumption. In
the existing network, however, not all the timeslots are always working. With this feature, the
power amplifiers consume no power when the timeslots are idle, thus greatly reducing the
power costs of operators.
Description
The power amplifier is an important device used for transmitting power to the antenna system.
The power consumption of the power amplifier consists of static power consumption and
dynamic power consumption. The linear-shaped power amplifier requires a constant offset
voltage to enable power transmission at any time even when it does not transmit power. The
power consumption corresponding to the fixed offset voltage is called static power
consumption. The dynamic power consumption, however, refers to the power consumption
produced only when the power amplifier is processing services. The dynamic power
consumption increases with the output power of the TRX. When the power amplifier does not
process services, the dynamic power consumption is zero. In the industry, the static power
amplifier can be shut down only when all the TRXs process no service. When the dynamic
power consumption is zero, the power amplifier is shut down. Thus, the total power
consumption of the power amplifier is zero.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 134 of 341
Public
None
None
4.1.8 GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the original TRX with high output power is replaced by two TRXs with
lower output power to reduce the power consumption of BCCH TRX while maintaining the
network capacity in low traffic periods. Thus, this feature saves power for the BTS.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption of BTSs and thus greatly reduces the
operational expenditure. The power consumption of TRXs constitutes a major part of the
power consumption of BTSs. In the existing network, however, the TRXs are not always
working. In low traffic periods, this feature can change the working status of TRXs to further
reduce the power consumption without interfering with the coverage and thus bring benefits
to operators.
Description
The ICB applies to the DTRU only. The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH
carriers are idle, some channels on the BCCH carrier are idle in the cell, and the DTRU on the
BCCH applies the combination mode with physical connection. For example, the ICB can be
enabled in an S4 cell with single antenna, two DTRUs, and BCCH TRX in combination
mode.
For an S4 cell, the output power of TRXs should be 30 W for the coverage requirement. In
normal cases, the TRX transmits at a high power of 60 W. After the combination mode is
applied, the output power is 30 W, which still meets the coverage requirement. In the existing
network, the traffic is low in some periods. When the timeslots on the BCCH carrier are idle,
the output power of the BCCH TRX is reduced to 15 W and the PBT mode is applied to
ensure that the combined output power retains 30 W. In this way, the TRX power is reduced
from 60 W to 15 W while maintaining the network capacity. This greatly reduces the energy
consumption of the TRX and thus reduces the power consumption of the BTS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 135 of 341
Public

The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH TRXs are idle and some channels on
the BCCH carrier are idle in the cell.
The ICB applies only to the DTRU in combination mode. This feature is supported by the
optimized DTRU, the DRRU, and the DRFU.
The ICB cannot be enabled on the static PDCHs or on the PDCHs converted from the
dynamic PDCHs (TCHs).
When the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0 or 1, the ICB helps
save the energy. When the output power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0,
the ICB helps save the energy.
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping)
GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping
GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
None
4.1.9 GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control

Availability
Summary
The Active Backup Power Control feature takes different measures to prolong the service
time of the BTS in case of mains power cut due to power off, snow disaster, and earthquake,
thus assuring sufficient time for repairing the equipment and improving the network
robustness.
Benefits
When the external power supply of the BTS is disrupted, this feature provides various choices
for operators to meet different requirements. For a configured BTS, the coverage preferred
strategy ensures sufficient coverage, the capacity preferred strategy ensures high traffic
capability, and the backup power time preferred strategy prolongs the service time and
provides diverse services. This greatly improves the service quality for operators.
Description
When the external power supply of the BTS is disrupted, a power-off alarm is generated on
the BTS. The BTS then uses the batteries to supply power. To save the backup power, the

Page 136 of 341
Public
BTS automatically shuts down some TRXs under the control of the timer and then gradually
reduces the TRX transmit power with a certain step until the BTS is powered off. When the
external power supply of the BTS recovers, the previously disabled TRXs are enabled and all
TRXs transmit at the normal power.
The Active Backup Power Control feature takes into account the coverage, capacity, and
backup power time. Therefore, three modes can be configured: coverage preferred, capacity
preferred, and backup power time preferred.
Coverage preferred: Shut down some TRXs and then gradually reduce the transmit
power of the remaining TRXs.
Capacity preferred: Gradually reduce the transmit power of all TRXs and then shut down
some TRXs.
Backup power time preferred: Shut down some TRXs and at the same time reduce the
transmit power of the remaining TRXs.
This feature reduces the coverage of a cell gradually and therefore the MSs at the edge of the
cell are gradually handed over to the neighboring cells. Thus, this feature has no negative
impact on the network performance.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Huawei power backup divice is needed, such as APM30.
4.1.10 GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBTS equipment supports two modulation modes: 8PSK and GMSK. The working
voltage of the power amplifier varies with the modulation modes. When the 8PSK modulation
mode is changed to GMSK, the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type feature
accordingly adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to reduce the power
consumption of the TRX.

Page 137 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier based on the working mode of
MSs. The flexible adjustment of the working mode ensures that the BTS always works in
optimal state while maintaining the service quality. This minimizes the power consumption
and saves the power.
Description
The Power Optimization Based on Channel Type feature involves two functions: dynamic
voltage adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment.
The dynamic voltage adjustment provides different working voltages for the power amplifier
based on the modulation mode. If all channels on the TRX are configured as TCHs, the TRX
works in GMSK mode and the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in
GMSK mode. If some channels on the TRX are configured as dynamic or static PDCHs, the
TRX works in 8PSK mode and the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required
in 8PSK mode. In this way, the feature reduces the power consumption.
As the GPRS traffic increases, an increasing number of dynamic PDCHs are configured on
the TRX. When no data service is processed and a great number of speech services are
processed on a TRX, the dynamic PDCHs are converted into TCHs to provide speech services.
According to the dynamic voltage adjustment function, the 8PSK mode is adopted on the
TRX because the TRX is configured with dynamic PDCHs. In this way, the voltage is
adjusted to a very high value, thus increasing the power consumption. The dynamic PDCH
voltage adjustment function, however, can detect the channel status on the TRX. When all
dynamic PDCHs are converted into TCHs, the voltage adjustment function is enabled to
provide the working voltage required in GMSK mode. If the TCHs are converted back into
PDCHs, the working voltage required in 8PSK is applied again.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

Page 138 of 341
Public
None
4.1.11 GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control

Availability
Summary
The PSU Smart Control feature switches on the required PSUs and shuts down the redundant
PSUs based on the required power consumption of the BTS. This improves the efficiency of
the power system and prolongs the service time of the power system.
Benefits
When the load is not heavy, the power system works with low efficiency, thus reducing the
service time of the power conversion modules. This feature flexibly adjusts the power supply
capability as required by controlling the number of working PSUs in real time. This avoids
the case that the power conversion equipment works under light load and prolongs the
working time of the equipment, thus reducing the costs of operation and maintenance.
Description
In certain BTS application scenarios, when the external power supply cannot provide the
working voltage of 48 V DC required by the BTS, the BTS power system should be added to
perform the power conversion such as conversion from 220 V AC to 48 V DC. The power
system consists of the PMU and PSUs. The PMU is responsible for the management of the
PSUs and the communication between the PSUs and the BTS. The PSUs are responsible for
power conversion.
In Huawei system, the PSUs are configured in N+1 mode according to the possible maximum
power consumption of the BTS. Generally, the power consumption of the BTS is lower than
its possible maximum power consumption. Therefore, the PSUs are usually in light load state.
This results in low efficiency of power conversion and shortens the service time of PSUs.
The PSU Smart Control feature switches on the required PSUs and shuts down the redundant
PSUs based on the required power consumption of the BTS. This improves the efficiency of
the power system and prolongs the service time of the power system.
For MBTS scenario, because MBTS of GSM, UMTS and LTE are sharing one PMU, only
one license of GSM,UMTS and LTE is required for MBTS, but if the corresponding network
is down, this function will be deactivated for MBTS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 139 of 341
Public

None
None
4.1.12 GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption

Optimization
Availability
Summary
The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption feature reduces the power consumption of the
BTS by reducing the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
Benefits
The overall power consumption of the BTS is a major concern for operators.
This feature reduces the overall power consumption of the BTS and thus saves the power
cost of operators.
This feature reduces the intra-network interference by reducing the transmit power to
enable the tighter frequency reuse.
Description
When the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX are idle, this feature supports the
configuration of the transmit power of these timeslots.
When the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX are occupied, this feature supports the
power control on these timeslots. The power control range can be configured on the Local
Maintenance Terminal.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 140 of 341
Public

None
This feature may affect the accuracy of measuring neighboring cells by the MS. Therefore, it
is recommended that this feature be enabled during low traffic hours at night.
4.1.13 GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off

Availability
Summary
The Dynamic Cell Power Off feature is used generally in a 900 MHz/1800 MHz dual-band
network.
In a specified period, if the traffic is low and a 900 MHz cell can carry all the traffic in the
coverage area of an 1800 MHz cell, then the 1800 MHz cell can be powered off to reduce the
power consumption of the BTS.
Benefits
By powering off the idle network devices in low traffic hours, the consumption of resources
can be reduced. This also reduces the operational expenditure of the operators.
Description
The Dynamic Cell Power Off feature means that within a specified period, the cells in the 900
MHz/1800 MHz dual-band network are dynamically powered off on the basis of the network
traffic load. 900 MHz cells refer to the cells operating on the 900 MHz or 850 MHz frequency
band, and 1800 MHz cells refer to the cells operating on the 1800 MHz or 1900 MHz
frequency band. If the coverage area of an 1800 MHz cell is within the coverage area of a 900
MHz cell and no blind zone exists, then the 900 MHz cell is referred to as the same-coverage
cell of the 1800 MHz cell. Only 1800 MHz cell with same-coverage cells can be powered off.
When a cell meets the condition of dynamic cell power-off, the BSC hands over the MSs with
ongoing services to other cells. After the same-coverage cell is powered off, the BSC
periodically detects the load in the cell. When the load in the cell is constantly higher than the
cell load threshold, the cell is powered on again.
Cells are powered off dynamically based on cell configurations. Because dynamic cell
power-off affects network capacity, cells should be powered off only in specified periods of
low traffic, such as 00:00 to 6:00 in the morning. Cells cannot be powered off in other periods
so that the traffic absorption requirement is met.

Page 141 of 341
Public
High Traffic
Low Traffic
Cell_A
900M
Cell_A
900M
Cell_B
closed
Cell_B
1800M
MS_A
MS_C
MS_B
MS_B
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC
It is mutually exclusive with the following features:
None
4.1.14 GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

Availability
This feature is introduced in the GBSS7.0.

Page 142 of 341
Public
Summary
The TRX power consumption accounts for a large proportion of the BTS power consumption.
The working voltage of the TRX is a major factor that affects the TRX power consumption.
Hence, to lower the TRX power consumption, the TRX should work under a suitable voltage
to ensure an efficient output power.
Benefits
Reduction in the TRX power consumption plays a key role in saving energy in a BTS system
because the TRX power consumption accounts for a large proportion of the BTS power
consumption. When the function of "TRX Working Voltage Adjustment" is enabled, the
efficiency of the output power of the TRX can be maintained, which helps reduce the
investment in power made by network operators on the base station equipment.
Description
The working voltage of the TRX is always set to a high level to ensure the maximum output
power of the TRX. In actual application, however, the maximum output power of the TRX is
not always required. In this case, if the TRX still works under such a high voltage, extra
power is consumed because a lower working voltage can also provide the required output
power. To reduce the power consumption of the TRX, Huawei developed the function of
"TRX Working Voltage Adjustment" that enables the intelligent adjustment of the TRX
working voltage according to the output power. For example, in the DTRU that works under
different output powers of 40 W and 60 W, this function supports the intelligent adjustment.
In addition, this function supports the intelligent adjustment of the Power Amplifier (PA)
working voltage based on different power levels to reduce the TRX power consumption.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Dependence on Other GBSS Functions
None
Dependence on Other NEs
None
4.1.15 GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation

Availability

Page 143 of 341
Public
Summary
With this feature, the working voltage of the power amplifier of the multi-transceiver module
can be timely adjusted on the basis of its output power. This improves the working efficiency
of the power amplifier and reduces the power consumption of the BTS.
Benefits
With the advanced design structure applied, the multi-transceiver RF module of the 3900
series base station provides the operators with the benefits such as simplified configuration,
small space, and easy capacity expansion. When this feature is enabled, the multi-transceiver
RF module of the 3900 series base station can properly configure the working status of the
power amplifier and reduce the operation expenditure for operators without affecting the
network coverage.
Description
The power consumption of the TRX is a major part of the power consumption of the BTS.
The power consumption of the TRX is related to factors such as the number of actually
working TRXs, the traffic volume, output power, and working mode.
All the carriers in the multi-transceiver module share one power amplifier. When many MSs
access the same carrier, the output power of the carrier varies with the distance between the
MS and the BTS. From the perspective of the total output power of the multi-transceiver
module, in most cases, the output power is lower than the maximum output power of the
power amplifier. The power amplifier works most efficiently when it transmits at the
maximum power. The reduction of the output power affects the efficiency to some extent. The
flexible adjustment of working voltage of the power amplifier helps improve the working
efficiency of the power amplifier.
This feature monitors the output power of all the carriers within the module. When the total
output power of the power amplifier reduces after the measurement for a period, this feature
adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to a lower value according to the related
algorithm. In this way, the power amplifier works with great efficiency after the output power
reduces, thus reducing the power consumption of the TRX.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 144 of 341
Public
None

Page 145 of 341
Public
Topology&Transmission
5.1 Transmission Efficiency

5.1.1 GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on Abis Interface
Availability
Summary
With this feature, each signaling link occupies only 16 kbit/s bandwidth at the physical layer,
thus saving the transmission resources on the Abis interface.
Benefits
When the capacity of the BTS is small, such as O1 or O2, this feature can minimize the
transmission resources required on the Abis interface.
The lease cost for the satellite transmission resources is very high. This feature can save
bandwidth, and thus it can be used when satellite transmission is used.
Description
With this feature, the RSL or OML occupies 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots. In this case, the signaling
and service can be configured in a 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis interface, and the signaling
of different BTSs can coexist in the same 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Compared with the traditional 4:1 multiplexing technology, the 16 kbit/s LAPD signaling link
mode can reduce the timeslot fragments, thus reducing the rent in the network with expensive
transmission cost such as the satellite transmission networking.
The bandwidth of each signaling link is limited to 16 kbit/s. Therefore, for the cell with high
traffic volume, the call access failure or call drops may occur because of signaling link
congestion.

Page 146 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass
GBFD-117801 Ring Topology
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
5.1.2 GBFD-117301 Flex Abis

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the Abis transmission resources can be dynamically allocated to MSs.
Benefits
Flex Abis enables the sharing of the Abis interface transmission resources among different
BTSs, cells, and services, thus improving the resource utilization. Especially for BTSs of
large capacity with multiple cells, cascaded BTSs, and the cells configured with the EDGE,
this feature can greatly improve resource utilization.
Description
In the CS domain, the timeslot transmission on the Abis interface adopts the resource pool
mode. The Abis resource is allocated to a TRX only when the TRX is busy. This can improve
the utilization of Abis resources. In the PS domain, the transmission resources on the Abis
interface are allocated based on 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot. A main timeslot is allocated to the
PDCH, and then additional timeslots are allocated with the steps of 16 kbit/s based on the
required coding rate on the Um interface. Huawei adopts 16 kbit/s as the unit so that
bandwidth usage is greatly improved and bandwidth is saved as much as possible.

Page 147 of 341
Public
The synchronization timeslot, signaling link timeslot, OML timeslot, and PS idle timeslot still
adopt the fixed Abis allocation mode. Other Abis timeslots adopt the Abis pool mode.
Huawei BSS equipment also supports the allocation of half-rate channels on the Abis
interface, which is triggered on the basis of the load of the Abis resources. Abis timeslots are
allocated at a minimum rate of 8 kbit/s. When the resource usage on the Um interface does
not reach the congestion threshold but the transmission resource utilization has reached the
congestion threshold, 8 kbit/s half-rate channels on the Abis interface are allocated to improve
the utilization of Abis resources.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on Abis Interface
Exclusive with DXX equipment
5.1.3 GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch

Availability
Summary
With this feature, if the calling MS and called MS are within the coverage of the same BTS or
BTS group, the BSC performs the loopback on the cabinet group of the convergent BTS.

Page 148 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature helps save the local or long-distance transmission resources on the Abis and Ater
interfaces.
Description
You can enable either the BTS local switch or the BSC local switch, and you can also enable
both functions at the same time.
After a call is established, the BSC performs the local switch if it detects that the calling MS
and called MS are located in the same BTS or in the coverage of a group of cascaded BTSs
and the requirements for the local switch are met. In Abis over IP scenario, the two BTSs in a
local swithch circle should be configured in the same MPU in BSC.
Before performing the loopback for the local switch, if the speech coding schemes of the two
MSs are different, the BSC adjusts the two speech coding schemes to the same scheme by
enabling the two MSs to adopt the lowest speech coding capability. In this way, the speech
coding schemes and the speech coding rates of the two MSs are consistent.
The following figure shows the circuit usage after the BTS Local Switch feature is enabled.
The system performs the loopback of the speeches of both the calling MS and called MS on
the BTS side, and then releases the timeslots used on the Abis and Ater interfaces.
Um
Abis
Ater
MS a
BTS 2
BTS1
BSC
TC
Core Network
MS b
BTS 3
Transfer
channel loop
Transfer channel
released
Huawei BTS local switch can be started on the basis of the prefix number or the congestion
conditions of the Abis resources or started unconditionally. For the BTS with special numbers,
this feature is unavailable.
If the CN equipment is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable after
the BTS local switch is enabled: lawful interception, MSC announcement, DTMF, fax during
voice, and independent charging of the BTS local switch.
The BTS local switch has an impact on the speech quality. The times of speech coding and
decoding are reduced, thus enhancing the speech quality. In satellite transmission mode, there
is no satellite transmission delay because the speech loopback is performed. Thus, the speech
quality is greatly improved.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
AMR Rate Adaptation under BTS Local Switch

Page 149 of 341
Public
AMR rate adoption can be used together with BTS local switch. Based on the AMR rate set
and protocol-specified preferred rate set of both the calling and called parties under a BTS,
the BSC obtains a new rate adjustment threshold to select the best AMR codec scheme for
both the calling and called parties under BTS local switch. If the calling party occupies an
AMR TCHF and the called party occupies an AMR TCHH, or vice versa, the MS that
occupies AMR TCHH is switched to an AMR TCHF, and then the BSC adjusts the AMR
codec rate of both parties before BTS local switch is enabled.
Dependency
None
If the TDM transmission mode is used on the Abis interface, this feature depends on the
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
In Abis over IP mode, this feature depends on the GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.
GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115711 EVAD
Dependency on other NEs:

None

Page 150 of 341
Public
5.1.4 GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization

Availability
Summary
The Abis Transmission Optimization feature detects and compresses the idle voice frames by
using VAD and then sends the compressed data packet on the HDLC transmission channels
for statistical multiplexing. This improves the E1/T1 bandwidth usage. With this feature, each
E1/T1 can support 24 or 18 TRXs under the following conditions. (The number of TRXs
supported by E1 and T1 are different because the bandwidth of an E1 is 2 Mbit/s and the
bandwidth of a T1 is 1.55 Mbit/s.)
Full-rate CS services (excluding the half-rate and PS services)
Voice activation factor of 0.5.
Cascaded BTSs not carried on a single E1.
Benefits
In the radio access network, the transmission cost accounts for 20% of the operators'
expenditure, of which the transmission cost over the Abis interface makes up a large portion.
Therefore, to effectively reduce the CAPEX and OPEX of the operators, it is necessary to
introduce a technology that saves transmission resources while protecting the current
investment.
This feature can save the transmission resources of the Abis interface. By adding the BSC
interface hardware and upgrading the BSC and BTS software, the operator can improve the
utilization of Abis resources by 30% to 40%.
Under certain conditions, one E1 can carry 24 TRXs.
Description
The Abis Transmission Optimization feature introduces the HDLC frame and HDLC channel
without changing the physical transmission mode. It statistically multiplexes the traffic data,
signaling data, and OM data on the HDLC channel to obtain a higher transmission gain
through voice frame compression and multiplexing.

Page 151 of 341
Public
Figure 5-1 Abis transmission optimization-enabled networking
Different from the TDM resources, the HDLC resources can be shared by multiple MSs.
Therefore, the QoS mechanism is introduced to add the admission control and congestion
management after this feature is enabled.
Admission control is a major measure taken to prevent congestion and is an important part of
the entire QoS mechanism. The system determines the bandwidth required for the access of
new services to prevent port or link congestion and to ensure the QoS of the entire system.
Congestion management alleviates the congestion by using the mechanism of lowering the
speech coding rate when transmission resources are congested, thus improving the processing
capability of the entire system.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The function of manually configuring the HDLC channel is introduced.
GBSS8.1
The enhanced QoS is introduced.
Dependency
The BSC should be configured with the PEUa/POUc. If the BM/TC is separated, the DPUc
should be configured in the subrack where the PEUa/POUc is located for processing the
HDLC frame.

Page 152 of 341
Public

None
5.1.5 GBFD-112013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

Availability
Summary
The Abis Congestion Triggered HR Distribution feature provides the following strategies for
alleviating the Abis congestion: preferentially allocating the TCHH, dynamic TCHF-TCHH
conversion, and queuing/preemption. In this way, the system capacity and speech quality are
dynamically balanced.
Benefits
This feature saves the transmission resources of the Abis interface and reduces the
network deployment cost.
When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, this feature
maintains the system capacity by degrading the speech quality. When the transmission
resources are not congested, the speech quality recovers and thus the system capacity
and the speech quality are dynamically balanced.
Description
When the Abis Congestion Triggered HR Distribution feature is enabled, the system triggers
the HR allocation based on the congestion condition of transmission resources on the Abis
interface. In peak hours, the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested before
these on the Um interface. Therefore, the original dynamic TCHF-TCHH
conversion/preferentially allocating the TCHH based on the load of the Um resources cannot
ensure the system capacity. This feature performs the dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion,
preferential allocation of TCHH, and queuing/preemption to alleviate the congestion of Abis
resources and increase the system capacity.
Dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion

When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, the qualified calls,
calls initiated by non-VIP subscribers, calls with high speech quality, and calls with
allowed path loss, are handed over from TCHF to TCHH. This alleviates the congestion
of transmission resources on the Abis interface and increases the system capacity. When
the congestion of transmission resources on the Abis interface is eliminated, the qualified
calls in the cell are handed over from TCHH to TCHF to improve the speech quality of
calls.

Page 153 of 341
Public
Preferentially allocating the TCHH

When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, the TCHHs are
preferentially allocated to the newly accessed calls to slow down the congestion.
Queuing/Preemption
Similar to the queuing/preemption mechanism for the Um interface, the
queuing/preemption is performed for calls that allow queuing/preemption on assignment
or incoming handover. This ensures that services can be provided for subscribers with
high priorities even if the transmission resources on the Abis interface are severely
congested.
If the TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface, preferentially allocating the TCHH
mechanism is applied to eliminate the Abis congestion triggered by the GBFD-117301 Flex
Abis feature.
If the HDLC transmission is used on the Abis interface, preferentially allocating the TCHH
mechanism and queuing/preemption mechanism are applied to eliminate the Abis congestion
triggered by the GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization feature.
If the IP transmission is used on the Abis interface, dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion,
preferentially allocating the TCHH, and queuing/preemption mechanisms are applied to
eliminate the Abis congestion triggered by the GBFD-118601 Abis over IP feature.
This feature can be used with AMR HR and normal HR.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature depend on one of the following feature:
None
5.1.6 GBFD-116901 Flex Ater

Availability

Page 154 of 341
Public
Summary
When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the Ater resources are allocated according to the
channel type during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the
16 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um
interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used.
Benefits
This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote
TC networking. When the half rate accounts for 30% in the system, the Flex Ater-enabled
network saves the Ater transmission resources by up to 15%, compared with the Flex
Ater-disabled network.
16K TS
X% * 50%
8K TS
X% HR/AMR HR
without Flex Ater
X% HR/AMR HR
with Flex Ater
...
...
...
50%
100% HR/AMR HR
with Flex Ater
Description
The Ater interface is an internal interface between the GMPS/GEPS and the GTCS in the
Huawei BSS equipment. With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s
timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots.
The Flex Ater feature allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the
call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/s timeslots are
used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots are used. Thus,
the Ater resources are fully utilized.

Page 155 of 341
Public
The user can determine the initial proportions of the 16 kbit/s timeslots and the 8 kbit/s
timeslots based on the traffic module. If either type of resources is insufficient, the BSC
dynamically adjusts the Ater resources. If the 16 kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, two
continuous 8 kbit/s timeslots are incorporated into one 16 kbit/s timeslot. Similarly, if the 8
kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, one 16 kbit/s timeslot is divided into two 8 kbit/s timeslots.
The adjustment process is recorded in the traffic statistics. In addition, the user can query
through the LMT the number of the 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots of a specific subrack and
the usage of these timeslots. Based on the query result, the user can determine whether the
initial proportions of 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots are proper or the Ater resources are
congested.
When this feature is enabled and the transmission resources on the Ater interface are
insufficient, the BSC preferentially allocates the half rate to alleviate the congestion, thus
increasing the system capacity.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
5.1.7 GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BSC performs the voice loopback within the BSC if the calling MS and
called MS are located under the same BSC. The data is not transmitted on the Ater or A
interface, and thus the transmission resources on the Ater interface and the TC coding
resources are released.
Benefits
In remote TC networking, this feature effectively reduces the transmission resources on

the Ater interface by 5% to 40%.

Page 156 of 341
Public
In the scenario where a large number of calling MSs and called MSs are under the same
BSC, less TC resources can be configured, and thus the cost of network deployment is
reduced.
This feature improves the speech quality of calls.
Overview of the BSC local switch
Description
With this feature, if the calling MS and called MS are under the same BSC, the speech
signals on the Abis interface are looped back to the MS without traveling around the
NSS. As shown in the following figure, the BSC local switch saves transmission
resources of segment C. Note that the BSC local switch is performed on the BSC side
without involving the NEs on the NSS side and the speech signals are not routed to the
MSC. The transmission resources at the D and E segments of the MSC, however, are not
released.
In addition, in the BSC local switch, the speech coding schemes of the calling MS and
called MS are the same and thus no coding conversion is required. Therefore, the TC
resources involved in the BSC local switch can be released, and thus the speech quality
is improved.
BSC local switch based on the Ater transmission congestion

The BSC local switch involves the following modes:
Unconditional BSC local switch
BSC switch based on the Ater transmission congestion
BSC local switch based on the prefix number
With the BSC local switch based on the Ater transmission congestion enabled, the BSC
determines whether to perform the local switch based on the congestion of the Ater
resources to alleviate the congestion.
Page 157 of 341
Public
Speech version adjustment

When starting the BSC local switch, ensure that the speech coding rates of the calling
MS and called MS are the same. If different speech coding rates are used, the BSC
adjusts different rates to the same rate through a forced handover. If the adjustment fails
because the calling MS and called MS have no intersection of speech coding, the BSC
local switch should not be enabled.
Inter-MGW scenario
If the calling MS and called MS are served by different MGWs, the MGWs convert the user
plane protocol format. This results in the loss of the BSC identification information carried by
the speech frame. Therefore, the BSC local switching fails to be triggered. There are two
inter-MGW scenarios:
1. In MSC pool networking mode, the calling MS and called MS are served by different
MGWs.
2. If the roaming MS and local MS in a conversation are served by different MSCs, the CN
regards that the two MSs are served by different MGWs even if the BSC is connected to only
one MGW. In this case, the BSC local switching fails to be triggered.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
The lawful interception should be supported by Huawei MSC.
GBSS8.1
The supplementary services such as CW/HOLD/MPTY/ECT are supported.
The announcement should be supported by Huawei MSC.
The independent charging of local switch should be supported by Huawei MSC. That is, the
operators can adopt flexible charging strategies.
GBSS13.0
AMR Rate Adaptation Under BSC Local Switch
AMR rate adapt ion can be used together with BSC local switch. Based on the AMR rate set
and protocol-specified preferred rate set of both the calling and called parties under different
BTSs, the BSC obtains a new rate adjustment threshold to select the best AMR codec scheme
for both the calling and called parties under BSC local switch. If the calling party occupies an
AMR TCHF and the called party occupies an AMR TCHH, or vice versa, the MS that
occupies AMR TCHH is switched to an AMR TCHF, and then the BSC adjusts the AMR
codec rate of both parties before BSC local switch is enabled.
In addition, this release supports BSC local switch in A over IP or Ater over IP mode.
Support BSC Local Switch in Abis IP mode
When MO and MT are both located under same BSC, the calling voice is being looped back
at Abis interface of BSC, without going through NSS side, directly through package switch to
the called side. By using Abis IP method, BSC local switch can save 10%~20% transmission
resource in Ater interface, accordingly save operators OPEX.
Dependency

Page 158 of 341
Public
None
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115711 EVAD
"AMR Rate Adaptation under BTS Local Switch" function is mutually exclusive with the
following features:
None
5.1.8 GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission

Availability
Summary
When TDM is applied over the Ater interface, the IP over PPP over STM-1 scheme can be
used to carry traffic data. With the application of VAD, Ater MUX, PPP MUX, and IP header
compression, the data transmitted over the Ater interface is compressed and the transmission
efficiency over the IP interface is increased.
Benefits
This feature helps save the lease cost of the transmission equipment over the Ater interface.
Compared with the traditional TDM transmission, the Ater compression transmission saves
30% of the transmission resources.

Page 159 of 341
Public
Description
The BSC interworks with the remote TC subrack through the Ater interface. To save the
transmission resources over the Ater interface, the TC subrack is usually placed in the telecom
equipment room with the NSS devices. That is, the BSC is in BM/TC separated mode. In this
case, the speech channel over the Ater interface requires only a bandwidth of 16 kbit/s
(full-rate) or 8 kbit/s (half-rate). Compared with the PCM speech channel of 64 kbit/s over the
A interface, 75% of the transmission resources is saved. The application of this feature further
saves 30% of the transmission resources over the Ater interface.
The Ater transmission compression is based on IP over PPP over STM-1, where the IP
packets of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted over the
channelized STM-1.
The key technologies of the Ater transmission compression are as follows:
ML-PPP/MC-PPP, which helps to improve the reliability and bandwidth usage
ML-PPP: Multiple PPP links are combined to form one ML-PPP group to provide a
link with relatively high bandwidth. At the local end, a large IP packet is divided into
several small packets, which are then transmitted concurrently to the peer end over
the PPP links. On receiving the packets, the peer end reassembles the packets and
restores the original IP packet for further processing. In the ML-PPP, multiple
E1s/T1s are combined to provide load sharing for the IP transmission. Thus, the
bandwidth usage is increased.
MC-PPP: The priority scheme is introduced to the MC-PPP on the basis of the
ML-PPP to facilitate the timely transmission of the real-time data, thereby reducing
the transmission delay of the real-time data.
VAD, Ater MUX, PPP MUX, and IP header compression, which help to save the
bandwidth.
VAD: With the coordination of the DTX over the Um interface, this feature can
implement the discontinuous transmission of the speech frames over the Ater link.
Under typical call condition (VAD = 0.5), the Ater transmission efficiency is doubled
compared with the traditional condition.
Ater MUX: Multiple UDP packets are multiplexed onto one IP/UDP packet. On
receiving the IP/UDP packet, the peer end demultiplexes the IP/UDP packet to restore
the data. This scheme reduces the transmission resources consumed by the IP/UDP
header.
PPP MUX: Multiple upper layer packets such as UDP packets are multiplexed onto
one PPP frame. The description field of one to two bytes is added to each multiplexed
upper layer packets. All multiplexed upper layer packets share the information such
as the PPP header and CRC. In this way, the transmission resources consumed by the
PPP header are reduced.
IP header compression: The packets in one UDP data flow have the same source IP address,
destination IP address, source port, and destination port. With the IP header compression, the
redundant information in the IP/UDP header of the UDP data flow is removed. Thus, the
transmission efficiency is improved.
Enhancement
None

Page 160 of 341
Public
Dependency
Both the BSC and the TC subrack should be configured with the POUc for the transmission
over the Ater interface.
In Abis over TDM mode, the BM subrack of the BSC should be configured with the DPUc.
GBFD-116901 Flex Ater
None
5.1.1 GBFD-511201 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching

Availability
Summary
The SDH/PDH transport network can be shared by the GSM traffic and UMTS traffic using
the TDM timeslot cross connection function.
Benefits
This feature allows operators to minimize the investments in transmission infrastructure,
especially during the UMTS deployment phase when the traffic load of the network is low.
With this feature, the UTRAN and GBSS can share the physical transmission media to
achieve the exchange of user data and control data.
Description
Huawei radio equipment provides the multiplexing of the GSM and UMTS data on the same
SDH network by using the TDM timeslot cross connection function. The GSM data flow
involves TDM frames and IP packets. When transmitting the IP packets, the BSC and the BTS
map the IP packets onto multiple E1 timeslots by using the Abis IP over E1/T1. The UMTS
data flow involves ATM packets and IP packets. The RNC and the NodeB map ATM packets
or IP packets onto multiple E1 timeslots by using the function of fractional ATM or fractional
IP to implement the data transmission. The following figure shows the co-transmission
principles.

Page 161 of 341
Public

time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
NodeB
TDM SW
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
SDH/PDH
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
time slot
Co-transmission
GBTS
RNC
TDM SW
GBSC
time slot
Idle timeslot
time slot
3G traffic
time slot
2G traffic
This feature supports the TDM-based co-transmission on the Abis interface. That is, the TDM
transmission timeslots on the Abis interface are shared by the 2G and 3G services. The
following figure shows the 2G/3G co-transmission by TDM switching on the Abis interface.
The 2G data is transmitted on some E1 timeslots and the 3G data is transmitted on the
remaining timeslots by using the fractional ATM or fractional IP technology. In this scheme,
the 2G equipment (BSC and BTS) implements the timeslot cross connection through the
transmission interface board.
The GBSS8.0 supports only the TDM-based co-transmission of the following data on the Abis
interface: TDM frames of 2G services and ATM packets or IP packets of 3G services.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
The GBSS9.0 supports the Abis IP over E1/T1. The Abis IP over E1/T1 supports the
TDM-based co-transmission of the following data on the Abis interface: TDM frames or IP
packets of 2G services and ATM packets or IP packets of 3G services.
Dependency
None.
Please refer to the BTS Dependency of feature list.
Dependency on other features of the GBSS/RAN
The dependency of this feature for the GSM services on other features is as follows:
If the BSC and the BTS use the IP over E1/T1 on the Abis interface, this feature depends on
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.
The dependency of this feature for the UMTS services on other features is as follows:

Page 162 of 341
Public
WRFD-05030101 ATM over E1T1 on Iub Interface or WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function

on Iub Interface
None.
5.1.2 GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points

Availability
Summary
With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each
signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points.
Benefits
This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband
signaling. In addition, this feature is compatible with the traditional signaling networking
mode while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of
the BSC. Thus, the operators' investment is saved.
Description
With network expansion, development of new services, popularization of the short message
service and wireless intelligent network service, and increase in the traffic volume, the
signaling flow between different signaling points increases rapidly. According to the protocols
related to the SS7 signaling, a maximum of 16 signaling links are allowed between single
signaling points. If the 64 kbit/s signaling link is used, a maximum of 1 Mbit/s bandwidth can
be provided for a single signaling point in the entire system. This is far from the requirements
for the signaling link bandwidth when the BSC is in full configuration.
With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each
signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points. If a physical node is
logically classified into N signaling points, the number of links between this physical node
and the remote signaling point is extended to N x 16 because the maximum number of
signaling links between the OSP and DSP is 16. This feature breaks the limitation of 16
signaling links of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling and thus meets the
signaling link requirements for large capacity processing of the BSC.
In addition, the requirements for the signaling networking capability of the CN are reduced
because the high-speed signaling technology is not used. Thus, the operators' investment is
saved.
This feature is used together with the High Speed Signaling feature to support more flexible
signaling networking mode.
This feature is used in TDM transmission.

Page 163 of 341
Public
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
This application enhancement supports the use of local multiple signaling points in the MSC
pool.
Dependency
None
None
None
5.2 IP Tansmission
5.2.1 GBFD-118606 Clock Over IP
Availability
Summary
Clock over IP provides accurate clock synchronization for several BTSs in the GBSS IP
network. Compared with the GPS clock, Clock over IP is a cost-effective clock solution. The
transmission cost is high because the IP timing packets are sent continuously. Huawei GBSS
equipment supports the function of defining the interval for sending IP timing packets. It can
reduce the transmission bandwidth as long as the BTS clock synchronization is guaranteed.
Benefits
In the IP-based GSM network, Clock over IP provides clock synchronization to guarantee the
normal operation of the GSM system.
Compared with the GPS clock synchronization, Clock over IP significantly reduces the cost
of network deployment.
Description
Clock over IP is a cost-effective clock solution for BTS synchronization. It consists of the IP
clock server and the IP clock client. The IP clock server extracts reference clock source from a
clock device such as a GPS or BITS. Then, the IP clock server sends the clock

Page 164 of 341
Public
synchronization information to the BTS by sending timing packets. As the IP clock client, the
BTS performs the adaptation on the IP packets and obtains the clock synchronization
information.
Every IP timing packet occupies a certain bandwidth. Therefore, in the case of leased network
or satellite transmission resources, the continuous transmission of IP timing packets leads to
an increased CAPEX and may even affect the ongoing services during busy hours. The GBSS
allows operators to define the interval for sending IP timing packets. In such a case, the IP
timing packets are sent when the load of the network is light. The BTS clock provided by the
GBSS can maintain a precision of 0.05 ppm within 90 days. Thus, the bandwidth can be
saved and the BTS clock can be synchronized by sending the IP timing packets regularly. The
application scenario of Clock over IP is shown in the following figure:
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Enhanced Clock over IP is available, which is used for the flexible configuration of clock
synchronization mode.
GBSS9.0
Primary and secondary IP clock server supported by the BTS: The IP clock server can be
configured on the basis of BTSs. The configuration of primary and secondary IP clock servers
is supported. When the primary IP clock server becomes faulty, the path to extract the clock
signals is switched to the secondary IP clock server, thus enhancing the flexibility and
reliability of the IP clock networking.
Dependency

Page 165 of 341
Public
This feature should be supported by the BTS.

None
An independent IP clock server device is required.
5.2.2 GBFD-118620 Clock over IP Support 1588V2

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the networking with the clock server that complies with IEEE1588V2 is
supported. Thus, a highly precise synchronization clock for the IP-based BTS is provided.
Compared with the GPS clock, this feature is a cost-effective clock solution.
Benefits
The networking is flexible because the IP-based BTS can be networked with the clock
server that complies with IEEE1588V2.
This feature is a cost-effective clock solution because the IP-based BTS can obtain the
clock from the IP network.
The IP-based BTS supports the configuration of the primary and secondary IP clock
servers, thus increasing the reliability of the clock system.
Description
In TDM networking mode, the BTS can extract the clock signals from the GPS, BITS, or E1
lines. The clock extraction in IP networking mode does not function properly. In all-IP
networking mode, the E1 line clock is not available. The GPS line clock is available in the
all-IP networking mode but the GPS reception devices, antenna, and feeder must be added,
which increases the expenditure. The BITS clock is available for only a few sites. With the
Clock over IP feature, the clock solution becomes cost-effective because the clock reference
can be obtained from the IP network.
The Clock over IP is implemented through the IP clock server and IP clock client. The IP
clock server generates a time stamp and sends the time stamp to the BTS that is configured as
the IP clock client. The BTS uses an adaptive method to remove the delay and restore the
clock.
Huawei GBSS supports two types of clock standards: Huawei proprietary clock standard and
IEEE1588V2. This feature complies with only IEEE1588V2. With this feature, Huawei BSS
can interconnect with the Huawei IP clock server and other clock servers that comply with
IEEE1588V2.

Page 166 of 341
Public
The following figure shows the networking scenario of the Clock over IP Support 1588V2
solution.
The IP clock server can be deployed as an independent entity in the network. The IP clock
client can be deployed in the BTS. No additional hardware is required. An IP clock server can
serve up to 512 BTSs.
In addition, the IP-based BTS supports the configuration of primary and secondary IP clock
servers. When the primary IP clock server becomes faulty, the path to extract the clock signals
is switched to the secondary IP clock server, thus enhancing the reliability of the clock
system.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0
Frequency Synchronization Based on 1588v2 over MAC:
The clock synchronization for the Ethernet can be achieved by using the IEEE 1588v2
technology. From the GBSS9.0, 1588v2 over UDP has been applied to the layer 3 of the
multi-service transport platform (MSTP) network. In the GBSS12.0, 1588v2 over MAC can
be applied to the layer 2 of the MSTP network.
1588v2 over MAC is a technology based on which transmission equipment forwards
timestamps according to the MAC addresses instead of the IP addresses. To achieve clock
synchronization in the MSTP network, all the involved transmission equipment must support
1588v2 over MAC.
There are two types of synchronization based on 1588v2 over MAC, frequency
synchronization and time synchronization. Only frequency synchronization is supported by
this feature.
Dependency
None

Page 167 of 341
Public

None
IP Clock Server needs to be configured. This feature should be supported by the clock server
that supports the IEEE1588V2 specifications. The clock server needs to support G.8265.1.
5.2.3 GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet

Availability
Summary
This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of
a synchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet.
The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC
or BTS hardware.
Benefits
The synchronous Ethernet is a key to the solution for all-IP transmission. In addition, it is an
economical and convenient solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network.
Description
The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer of
the Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the data flow
of the Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting
the highly precise clock. The receive end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the
data flow. In this way, the precision of the clock is ensured.

Page 168 of 341
Public
Another benefit of the feature is that it does not require additional BTS hardware to achieve
clock synchronization in the all-IP network.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
The IP interface board must be used on the Abis interface.
This feature applies to only the 3900 series base stations.
Dependency on other features
All relay devices in the transport network must support this feature.
5.2.4 GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

Availability
Summary
Abis over IP enables the IP networking over the Abis interface.
Benefits
This feature adapts to All IP development trend of future transport layer and protocol
development.
The Abis interface incorporates the features such as high bandwidth and low cost deployment,
and it does not have any restrictions on the BSC capacity.
The low IP network deployment cost, short construction period, and easy maintenance
effectively reduce the CAPEX and OPEX of operators.
Description
Abis over IP allows operators to deploy an IP network between the BSC and the BTS.
In addition, this feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports the IPv4 protocol. The
BSC connects to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on the location of the BSC and
the BTS.
Abis over IP supports active/standby mode and load sharing mode, and is reliable.

Page 169 of 341
Public
The GBSS adopts the following mechanisms to ensure end-to-end high QoS.
Physical bandwidth shaping

The burst flow in the network is controlled by the buffer and token bucket. If the
messages are transmitted at a very high speed, the messages are buffered and transmitted
at a uniform speed under the control of the token bucket.
Priority mapping
A definite rule is used to identify the messages for different services. Then, the messages
are classified and prioritized, and they are associated with the corresponding flow control
and resource assignment. According to the load on the current network, a specific flow
control action is taken.
Congestion management
Congestion occurs when the rate at which data arrives at the port is higher than the rate
at which data is sent from the port. In this case, the voice quality deteriorates and the
data transmission rate decreases. The traffic statistics of the interface board show that the
number of discarded packets increases. As a result, congestion results in the increase of
the packet transmission delay and delay variation. Furthermore, an excessively long
delay leads to packet retransmission. If congestion increases, a large number of network
resources are wasted and improper resource assignment may lead to system deadlock or
system breakdown. The problem of shortage of network resources can be solved by
increasing the network bandwidth. In addition, preventive mechanisms like tail drop and
weighted random early detection (WRED) must be applied to avoid the network
congestion. When congestion occurs, the priority queue (PQ) or weighted round robin
(WRR) of queue scheduling is used to solve the congestion problem.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
New QoS mechanisms VLAN are introduced in GBSS8.1.
VLAN: Virtual local area network. Based on the switching LAN, the network management
software is used to establish an end-to-end logical network across different network segments
and different networks. This improves the network processing capability and service
management capability. The network logically isolates the data of different applications
during transmission. For example, the network allocates the O&M data transferred between
the BSC and the BTS, data transferred by signaling messages, and service data to different
VLANs. This improves the security of network transmission and simplifies the flow control
management for data transmission of different applications. In application, one or several
BTSs or BSCs in the same physical network can be allocated to a VLAN.
GBSS9.0
Static IP address supported by the BTS: This feature supports the configuration of items such
as the BTS IP address, BSC IP address, and routing on the site maintenance terminal.
Compared with the configuration of dynamic IP address for the GBSS, the configuration of
static IP address is more complicated, but does not require the configuration of DHCP relay.
GBSS9.0
The IP Fault detection based on BFD feature is introduced.
Huawei GBSS supports bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on the Abis, A, and Gb
interfaces. BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by periodically transmitting
BFD packets between two nodes. When BFD packets are not received within the period of
several detection intervals, the communication between the two nodes fails. In this case,

Page 170 of 341
Public
procedures such as port switchover or IP rerouting are triggered to prevent traffic loss. The
interval of BDF detection is about 100 ms, and therefore it can be used for telecom services
over IP.
The BFD involves two cases: one hop and multi-hop. For one hop, the two nodes of the BFD
are the BSC and a layer 3 device connecting to the BSC, such as the router, BTS, or MGW.
For multi-hop, the two nodes of the BFD are the BSC and its peer device, such as a BTS,
MGW, or SGSN.
The BFD is applicable in the following scenarios:
1. The BSC is connected to a peer device such as the BTS, MGW, or SGSN by using a router.
In this case, the BFD can be used to check whether the router is working properly.
BSC
p1
R1
p2
R3
R2
BTS/CN
R4
The BFD is activated for detecting any faults in p1 and p2. If p1 is faulty, the BSC triggers an
IP rerouting procedure. The packet is then sent and received over p2.
2. The BSC is connected directly to the peer device such as the BTS, MGW, or SGSN. In this
case, the BFD can be used to check whether the peer device is working properly.
BSC
p1
BTS/CN
p2
The BFD is activated for detecting any faults in p1 and p2. If p1 is faulty, the BSC triggers an
IP rerouting procedure. The packet is then sent and received over p2.
Dependency

Page 171 of 341
Public
Embedded PCU should be used. IP Interface board is needed in Abis interface:

FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc.
MRFD-210206 Tree Topology
MRFD-210204 Chain Topology
GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
The BSC and its peer device must support BFD.
5.2.5 GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

Availability
Summary
When TDM is applied over the Abis interface, the IP over E1/T1 scheme can be used to carry
traffic and signaling data.
Benefits
In the IP over E1/T1 scheme, the IP packets can be carried on the TDM-based network. For
the operators having the abundant TDM transmission resources, the IP over E1/T1 scheme
facilitates the evolution to an all-IP network and thereby protects the investment.
The use of ML-PPP/MC-PPP enhances the reliability of the Abis links and improves Abis link
bandwidth usage.
As many as 18 to 21 TRXs can be supported by each E1 with compression technologies such
as VAD and Abix MUX. Compared with the traditional TDM transmission, the Abis IP over
E1/T1 saves up to 30% of the transmission resources and saves the lease cost of the TDM
transmission resources.

Page 172 of 341
Public
Description
In IP over E1/T1, the IP packets of the signaling and traffic data are packed using the PPP and
then transmitted over the E1/T1. The BTS and the Abis interface board on the BSC are
responsible for processing the PPP/ML-PPP.
The IP over E1/T1 can be applied for the networking between the BTS and BSC. The BTS
uses the E1/T1, and the BSC uses the E1/T1, channelized STM-1, or FE/GE. The following
figure shows the networking modes supported by the Abis IP over E1/T1.
IP over E1
BTS
SDH
IP over E1(STM-1)
IP over E1
BSC
IP over FE/GE
BTS
IP over E1
BTS
In IP over E1/T1, the clock can be the same as that in TDM transmission mode. That is, the
clock is obtained by locking the clock of one node to the upper-level node over E1. In IP over
E1/T1, the clock over IP scheme can also be used.
The key technologies in IP over E1/T1 are as follows:
ML-PPP: Multiple PPP links are combined to form one ML-PPP group to provide a link with
relatively high bandwidth. At the local end, a large IP packet is divided into several small
packets, which are then transmitted concurrently to the peer end over the PPP links. On
receiving the packets, the peer end reassembles the packets and restores the original IP packet
for further processing. In the ML-PPP, multiple E1/T1s are combined to provide load sharing
for the IP transmission. Thus, bandwidth usage is increased.
MC-PPP: The priority scheme is introduced to the MC-PPP on the basis of the ML-PPP to
facilitate the timely transmission of the real-time data, thereby reducing the transmission
delay of the real-time data.
VAD and Abis MUX, which help to save the bandwidth
VAD: With the coordination of the DTX over the Um interface, this feature can implement the
discontinuous transmission of the speech frames over the Abis link. Under typical call
condition (VAD = 0.5), the Abis transmission efficiency is doubled compared with that in the
traditional condition.
Abis MUX: Multiple UDP packets are multiplexed onto one IP/UDP packet. On receiving the
IP/UDP packet, the peer end demultiplexes the IP/UDP packet to restore the data. Multiple
UDP packets share one IP/UDP packet header, and thus the IP transmission efficiency is
improved. For details, see the description of GBFD-118604 Abis MUX.

Page 173 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
IP over E1/T1 board is needed in Abis interface: PEUa/POUc.
When the BSC uses the STM-1 or FE transmission, this feature requires the support from the
external transmission device.
5.2.6 GBFD-118604 Abis MUX

Availability
Summary
If Abis over IP is used without any compression or multiplexing technology, the utilization of
transmission resources is low. Compared with TDM, the transmission bandwidth cannot be
saved. Therefore, a compression or multiplexing technology for saving the bandwidth must be
used in IP transmission mode.
Abis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS
serve as transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the
transmitting end multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing condition. Multiple
UDP packets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then
demultiplexed at the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets.
Thus, the transmission efficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.
Benefits
By multiplexing and demultiplexing the IP/UDP packet, Abis MUX reduces the overhead of
each IP packet, increases the efficiency of the IP transmission, and saves the bandwidth.
Page 174 of 341
Public
Without the application of Abis MUX, the efficiency in IP transmission is about 32%.
Whereas, after Abis MUX is enabled, 14 full-rate speech packets are multiplexed, and the
efficiency of IP transmission can reach 73%, which is increased by 40%.
Description
The speech payload in GSM is small. After the IP transmission is applied, the speech payload
that is carried in the IP/UDP packets is smaller than the IP/UDP header. Therefore, the
transmission efficiency of the speech is very low. With the multiplexing of the IP/UDP header,
the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing condition are multiplexed at the transmitting end,
and demultiplexed at the receiving end. In this way, several UDP/IP packets are multiplexed
in one UDP/IP packet; in addition, several speech packets share one IP/UDP header. Thus, the
efficiency of link transmission is improved.
The principle of Abis MUX is shown as follows:
B efore
using A bis
Mux
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech
payload A
After using
A bis Mux
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech payload
A+B
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech
payload B
Abis MUX requires the support from both the BTS and the BSC. That is, after the BSC/BTS
multiplexes UDP packets, the BSC/BTS at the peer end must be able to identify multiplexed
and non-multiplexed packets and then demultiplex packets to reconstruct the original data
according to the multiplexing protocol.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
IP or IP over E1/T1 board is needed in Abis interface:
FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc./PEUa/POUc.
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
None
Page 175 of 341
Public
5.2.7 GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC

Availability
Summary
This feature, Abis IP Header Compression (IPHC), compresses the IP header of the packets
transmitted over the Abis interface to save the transmission resources.
Benefits
This feature saves more than 30% of transmission resources occupied by typical voice
services.
This feature improves the transmission efficiency in a newly deployed network that
adopts IP over E1 transmission or in a network where TDM transmission is upgraded to
IP transmission. The transmission efficiency is improved notably especially when
high-BER transmission media, such as microwave, are used for data transmission.
Description
IPHC improves the transmission efficiency by removing redundant information from the
IP/UDP header of UDP data streams.
In IP over E1 mode, typical small packets in a standard Abis IP packet such as speech packets
occupy only 50-60% of payload. This leads to low transmission efficiency. This feature solves
the preceding problem by enabling the transmitting end to compress the IP/UDP header of
packets. The compressed packets will be parsed by the receiving end. After the compression,
one typical full-rate voice packet can be shortened from 74 bytes to 50 bytes, which saves
more than 30% of transmission resources.
Enhancement
None

Page 176 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
Currently, only the BTS3012 and BTS3012AE support this feature. For details, see the
impacts on the BTS hardware in the feature list.

This feature depends on following features:
None
5.2.8 A IPGBFD-118602 A over IP

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS8.0 and GBSS8.1 implements A interface over IP in private protocols. The
features include TC in MGW and IP transmission on the signaling plane and user plane.
Benefits
With the increasing use of IP transmission in the wireless core network, the compressed
speech coding scheme is used on the Nb interface, and the TDM transmission is still used on
the A interface. In this way, a call across MSCs needs to be coded and decoded four times.
Compared with coding and decoding in TDM transmission mode that occurs only twice, the
application of IP transmission in the CN increases the number of TCs required by the BSC
and the MGW in the network and deteriorates the voice quality. However, when A interface
over IP is applied, together with the IP transmission on CN and transcoder free operation
(TrFO), the originated call and terminated call do not need to be coded and decoded. Thus, the
voice quality is improved and the number of TCs required by the BSC and the MGW is
reduced.
With the increase of the network equipment capacity and the number of nodes, MSC pool is
an acknowledged solution that meets the requirements of disaster recovery and backup. In
TDM transmission mode, the application of MSC pool over the A interface is difficult to be
implemented due to the complexity of the physical connection. The IP transmission, however,
effectively address this problem.
In addition, A interface over IP complies with the trend of all IP in the transmission network
and simplifies the network maintenance.

Page 177 of 341
Public
Description
The details of this feature are as follows:
TC in MGW
To improve the voice quality, the feature of TrFO is supported. The TCs located in the
BSS are removed from the existing GSM network and are placed in the MGW. Under the
control of the signaling plane, when the calling and called MSs use the same speech
versions or compatible AMR codec set, the MGW performs coding and decoding
without using TC. Thus, TrFO is implemented and then the voice quality is improved.
However, if the calling and called MSs use different speech versions or incompatible
AMR codec set, the TC in the MGW is required to converse speech version under the
control of the MSC-S.
MSC-S
A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
MGW
A/IP
= Signalling
= User p lane
Nc
MSC-S
A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
Nb
MGW
A/IP
e.g. AMR coded
e.g. AMR coded
IP based
protocol
stack
IP based
protocol
stack
= Transcoder or Transcoder-pair, typically not used in MS-to MS calls
Voice over IP
The A interface on the user plane is placed between the BSC and the MGW and adopts
the standard RTP/UDP/IP protocol to carry user data. The A interface supports all the
following speech codec types in the existing BSS:
GSM_FR:
RFC 3551 for GSM_FR.
GSM_HR:
ETSI 101318 for GSM_HR.
GSM_EFR:
RFC 3551 for EFR.
AMR:
RFC 3267 for AMR.
The speech coding scheme on the A interface is the same as that on the Um interface
because there is no TC configured in the BSS. However, the speech codec types are
different.

Page 178 of 341
Public
BSC
MGW
Payload
RTP
UDP
IP
MAC / PPP
Payload
RTP
UDP
IP
MAC / PPP
Signaling over IP
The BSC supports signaling over IP on the A interface in the M3UA/SCTP/IP protocol
stack. The BSC is directly connected to the MSC server through the MTP3 User
Adaptation Layer (M3UA), and the data on the signaling plane and user plane can be
transmitted through the MGW routes.
To meet the requirements of TrFO and IP transmission on the user plane, some signaling
messages at the BSSMAP is modified. At the same time, the intra-BSS switchover
procedure of speech versions is added.
The introduction of A the interface over IP has no impact on the DTAP message.
BSC
MSS
BSSMAP+
SCCP
M3UA
SCTP
IP
MAC / PPP
BSSMAP+
SCCP
M3UA
SCTP
IP
MAC / PPP
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
A over IP complying with 3GPP specifications: The signaling plane and user plane comply
with the related specifications in 3GPP R8. The user plane complies with TS43.903 and the
signaling plane complies with TS48.008. The CSD coding complies with RFC4040 and
RFC2198. Theoretically, the GBSS is capable of working with the IP-based CN devices
(supplied by the competitor) that comply with 3GPP R8.
CSD service transmission redundancy in A over IP: Certain CSD services, such as the fax
service, are quite sensitive to data loss. The retransmission mechanism for such services is
usually insufficient at the application layer. Therefore, the packet loss on the IP transmission
network has great impact on such services, for example, the fax is disrupted. This feature
enables the same CSD service data block to be transmitted in different RTP frames in A over
IP, thus ensuring the completeness of the data and enhancing the user experience of the CSD
services in A over IP. The CSD service transmission redundancy in A over IP supports a
maximum of three levels of redundancy; that is, a maximum of two consecutive RTP frames
can be discarded. The CSD service bearer in A over IP complies with the RFC4040
specification. The CSD service transmission redundancy in A over IP complies with the
RFC2198 specification.

Page 179 of 341
Public

Huawei GBSS supports bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on the Abis interface, A
interface, and Gb interface. BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by
periodically transmitting BFD packets between two nodes. When BFD packets are not
received within the period of several detection intervals, the communication between the two
nodes fails. In this case, procedures such as port switchover or IP rerouting are triggered to
prevent traffic loss. The interval of BDF detection is about 100 ms, and therefore it can be
used for telecom services over IP. For details, see section 5.2.4 "GBFD-118601 Abis over IP."
Dependency
The interface board for A over IP must be configured: FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc.
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115711 EVAD
GBFD-115702 TrFO
This feature should be supported by the MSC/MGW.
The GBSS 8.0 and GBSS8.1 are only applicable to Huawei MSC/MGW.
5.2.9 GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1

Availability

Page 180 of 341
Public
Summary
When the SDH transmission is applied between the GBSS and CN equipment, the traffic and
signaling data can be carried by the PPP based IP transmission over the A interface. The port
of the BSC can be E1, T1, or STM-1.
Benefits
With the IP over E1/T1 scheme, the IP packet data can be carried on the TDM-based network.
For the operators that have the TDM transmission resources, the IP over E1/T1 scheme
facilitates the evolution to an all-IP network and thereby protects the investment.
The utilization of ML-PPP/MC-PPP enhances the reliability of the A interface links and
improves the bandwidth usage of A interface links.
The technique of UDP multiplexing over the A interface increases the IP transmission
efficiency. Compared with the traditional TDM transmission, the A IP over E1/T1 saves 30%
of the transmission resources and saves the lease cost of the TDM transmission resources.
Description
In IP over E1/T1, the IP packets of the signaling and traffic data are packed using the PPP and
then transmitted over the E1/T1/CSTM-1. The peer entity and the A interface board on the
BSC are responsible for processing the PPP/ML-PPP.
This feature enables the networking between the BSC and CN to use IP over PPP over
E1/T1/CSTM-1. The BSC adopts the E1/T1 or channelized STM-1 ports. The router at the
peer end or CN can adopt the E1/T1, channelized STM-1, or FE/GE ports. The following
figure shows the networking modes supported by the A IP over E1/T1.
IP over E1/T1/CSTM-1
IP over
E1/T1/CSTM1
SD
H
BSC
IP over FE/GE
IP over
E1/T1/CSTM1
MGW
MSC
IP over FE/GE
MGW
IP over
E1/T1/CSTM-1
IP over FE/GE
IP over FE/GE
ROUTER
MSC
MGW
MSC
In IP over E1/T1, the clock can be the same as that in TDM transmission mode. That is, the
clock is obtained by locking the clock of one node to the upper-level node over E1.
The key technologies in IP over E1/T1 are as follows:
ML-PPP: Multiple PPP links are combined to form one ML-PPP group to provide a link with
relatively high bandwidth. At the local end, a large IP packet is divided into several small
packets, which are then transmitted concurrently to the peer end over the PPP links. On
receiving the packets, the peer end reassembles the packets and restores the original IP packet
Page 181 of 341
Public
for further processing. In the ML-PPP, multiple E1/T1s are combined to provide load sharing
for the IP transmission. Thus, bandwidth usage is increased.
MC-PPP: The priority scheme is introduced to the MC-PPP on the basis of the ML-PPP to
facilitate the timely transmission of the real-time data, thereby reducing the transmission
delay of the real-time data.
UDP multiplexing on the A interface, which help to save the bandwidth
UDP multiplexing on the A interface: After A over IP is introduced, the RTP/UDP/IP

packaging is applied to the data of the user plane, thus bringing down the transmission
efficiency. In this technique, however, multiple RTP packets are multiplexed onto one UDP
packet. As a result, the proportion of the packet header to the total packet decreases, and thus
the A interface transmission efficiency is increased. For details, see GBFD-118610 UDP
MUX for A Transmission.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
IP over E1/T1 Interface board is needed in A interface: PEUa/POUc.
To be specific, when the A interface uses the E1/T1 ports, the PEUa should be configured.
When the A interface uses the STM-1 ports, the POUc should be configured.
With this feature, the TC processing unit is no longer required on the BSC. The TC processing
unit is integrated into the MGW.
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter
This feature should be supported by the CN and transmission equipment that support IP over
PPP.

Page 182 of 341
Public
5.2.10 GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission

Availability
Summary
In A over IP, the RTP/UDP/IP packaging is applied to the data of the user plane, thus reducing
the transmission efficiency. When this feature is enabled, however, multiple RTP packets are
multiplexed onto one UDP packet. As a result, the proportion of the packet header to the total
packet decreases, and thus the A interface transmission efficiency is increased.
Benefits
The UDP multiplexing improves the usage of the transmission resources on the A interface,
protects the investment, and reduces the O&M cost. The transmission efficiency can be
increased by 30% to 40% depending on the number of packets that are multiplexed.
Description
In A over IP, the RTP/UDP/IP packaging is applied to the packets of the user plane, thus
bringing down the transmission efficiency, particularly in the case of short packets of CS data.
This feature can solve the problem by adding a UDP multiplexing subheader which is smaller
than UDP and multiplexing multiple RTP packets onto one UDP packet. As a result, the
proportion of the packet header to the total packet decreases, and thus the A interface
transmission efficiency is increased. The transmission efficiency can be increased by 30% to
40% depending on the number of packets that are multiplexed.
The UDP multiplexing is applicable regardless of whether the RTP header is compressed. The
UDP multiplexing is independent of the physical bearer. That is, the UDP multiplexing is
applicable to IP over E1/T1, IP over channelized STM-1 (CPOS), or IP over FE/GE.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
IP or IP over E1/T1 board is needed in A interface: FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc.
GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1
Page 183 of 341
Public
5.2.11 GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface

Availability
Summary
This feature enables TDM transport and IP transport to be used simultaneously over the A
interface on the BSC side. Telecom operators can set a proper traffic proportion so that some
calls use TDM bearer and other calls use IP bearer. This feature is applicable to the scenario
where GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP network.
Benefits
When GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP network, telecom operators can
reconstruct the transport network gradually to ensure smooth migration.
Description
As specified by 3GPP GERAN Releases 7 and 8, the IP-based transport protocols for the
signaling and user planes are introduced into the A interface, and A over IP officially becomes
the network reconstruction trend. When GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP
network, the BSC and the CN (including the MSC server and MGW) need to support TDM
transport and IP transport simultaneously on the A interface in a specified period. The purpose
is to ensure the smooth migration of the transport network.
The following stages are involved in the migration from TDM to IP on the A interface:
1) All-TDM stage: All the calls use TDM bearer during this stage.
2) TDM and IP dual-stack transport stage: Traffic is distributed to TDM transport and IP
transport according to the preset proportion during this stage. For example, 80% of the new
calls are established on TDM and 20% of the new calls are established on IP.
3) All-IP stage: All the calls use IP bearer and the original TDM bearer can be removed during
this stage.
The following figure shows the topology where TDM and IP dual-stack transport is applied to
the A interface. The BSC in the A-interface dual-stack transport state must support the
TDM-based PCM voice and IP-based compressed voice simultaneously. When TDM
transport is applied to the A interface, the TC in the BSS is used. When IP transport is applied
to the A interface, the TC in the MGW is used.

Page 184 of 341
Public
A/TDM
A/IP
MSC-S
BSS
Nc
A/TDM
MSC-S
Mc/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
A/TDM
A/IP
A/IP
A/TDM
MGW
Nb
MGW
Signaling
Transcoder
User plane
Transcoder or Transcoder pair
A/IP
Enhancement
None
Dependency
The BSC must be configured with IP interface boards FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc for the A
interface.
None
The CN must support both IP and TDM.
5.2.12 Gb IPGBFD-118603 Gb over IP

Availability
Summary
Gb over IP allows operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR)
between the BSC and the SGSN. Thus, operators can fully utilize the advantages of IP
transmission so as to save the transmission cost and carry different types of services.

Page 185 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature can reduce the cost of network investment. The IP transmission simplifies
network maintenance, thus saving the operation cost and maintenance expense.
The application of IP transmission increases the bandwidth over the Gb interface. Therefore,
the Gb interface does not restrict the bit rate of subscribers.
This feature facilitates the SGSN pool function. Compared with the frame relay mode, the
cost of using SGSN pool function in IP transmission is much lower because the SGSN pool
function requires a large number of links on the Gb interface. Thus, SGSN pool can be
implemented in a more cost-efficient way.
Description
Gb over IP complies with the 3GPP protocol.
When Gb over IP is enabled, SGSN pool can be implemented after the license of SGSN pool
is obtained and no upgrade is required in the existing hardware.
Gb over IP supports dynamic configuration and highly automatic upgrade compared with the
frame relay mode. If SGSN pool is enabled, the application of Gb over IP can reduce the
configuration work for the Gb interface.
The Gb interface supports the FE/GE interface, the interface in active/standby mode or load
sharing mode, and the interconnection between the CN and the LAN or MAN.
The Gb interface supports IP services based on the DiffServ mechanism and guarantees the
QoS of the services with different levels. When the IP network is congested, the data packets
of the service with higher priority are preferably transmitted.
The BSC supports two kinds of end-to-end communications from the BSC to the SGSN, that
is, the FR network and IP network. In addition, two protocol stacks can work simultaneously
to minimize the impact of the IP transmission on the existing services.
When Gb over IP is applied, the transmission equipment supporting IP transmission should be
used. Compared with the FR equipment, the cost is lower.
With the increase of packet data services, the requirement for the bandwidth over the Gb
interface is higher. Gb over IP can compress the IP header and enable the data over the Gb
interface to share the bandwidth, thus improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the
transmission cost.
This feature doesnt support VLAN or multiplexing method.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
Huawei GBSS supports bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on the Abis interface, A
interface, and Gb interface. BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by
periodically transmitting BFD packets between two nodes. When BFD packets are not
received within the period of several detection intervals, the communication between the two
nodes fails. In this case, procedures such as port switchover or IP rerouting are triggered to
prevent traffic loss. The interval of BDF detection is about 100 ms, and therefore it can be
used for telecom services over IP. For details, see section 5.2.4 GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.

Page 186 of 341
Public
Dependency
The interface board for Gb over IP must be configured: FG2a/FG2c/GOUc.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
This feature should be supported by the SGSN.
5.2.13 GBFD-118605 IP QoS

Availability
Summary
IP QoS provides a series of QoS mechanisms for the IP transmission to ensure the
transmission quality. The QoS mechanisms include admission control, congestion
management, port traffic shaping, queue scheduling, DSCP, and VLAN.
Benefits
IP QoS ensures the KPIs in the wireless network and prevents the drop in QoS caused by the
network congestion.
IP QoS meets different requirements of applications and enhances user experience.
Description
After the IP transmission is applied to the GBSS, the transmission resources are multiplexed
instead of being occupied exclusively. When the transmission resources are not sufficient, the
congestion may cause the increase of delay, packet loss, and call drop. Therefore, the QoS
mechanisms are required to guarantee the transmission quality of IP network. Huawei GBSS
equipment provides different QoS mechanisms at each protocol layer to guarantee an
end-to-end QoS, as listed in the following table:
Protocol Layer
QoS Mechanism
Application layer
1. Admission control
2. Congestion management based on the congestion status of
transmission resources
3. Logical port shaping

Page 187 of 341
Public
Protocol Layer
QoS Mechanism
4. IP PATH
IP layer
1. Priority mapping
Data link layer
1. VLAN
2. BFD detection
3. Congestion management (PQ, WRR, tail drop, WRED)
Physical layer
1. Physical bandwidth shaping
QoS mechanism at physical layer

Physical bandwidth shaping: The burst flow in the network is controlled by the buffer
and token bucket. If the messages are transmitted at a very high speed, the messages are
buffered and transmitted at a uniform speed under the control of the token bucket.
QoS mechanism at data link layer

VLAN: Virtual local area network (VLAN) logically isolates the data of different
applications during transmission. For example, the network allocates the O&M data
transferred between the BSC and the BTS, data transferred by signaling messages, and
service data to different VLANs. This improves the security of network transmission.
This function applies to Abis over IP and A over IP.
BFD detection: bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a simple Hello protocol,
which is similar to the neighbor detection part of the routing protocols. Two systems
periodically send BFD check messages on the channel between the two systems. If one
system does not receive any check message from the other system for a long time, you
can infer that the channel is faulty. BFD detection enables the BSC to detect the link
fault between the BSC and the peer equipment in IP network quickly and then initiate
handover or active/standby switchover. Thus, the link fault can be quickly identified and
isolated and thus the service interruption time is greatly reduced. BFD is applicable
when IP transmission is established on Abis, A, and Gb interface.
Congestion management: The congestion occurs when the rate at which the data arrives
at the port is higher than the rate at which the data is sent from the port. Then, the voice
quality deteriorates and the data transmission rate reduces. In addition, the congestion
increases the packet transmission delay and delay variation. An excessively long delay
causes packet retransmission and further aggravates the network congestion. Therefore,
the congestion control mechanisms are used to prevent congestion for the packets
received, such as the tail drop and WRED. The queuing scheduling techniques such as
PQ and WRR are used to send the packets in real time based on the priority of each
packet. The congestion management is applicable when IP transmission is established on
Abis, A, and Gb interface.
IP layer
Priority mapping: A definite rule is used to identify the messages for different services.
Then, the messages are classified and prioritized, and they are associated with the
corresponding flow control and resource assignment. The QoS mapping in the
transmission network is implemented according to the data with different priorities.
Priority mapping is applicable to Abis over IP and A over IP.
Application layer
Admission control: Admission control is a major measure used to prevent congestion and
is an important mechanism of the entire QoS policy. The system determines the
Page 188 of 341
Public
bandwidth required for the access of new services to prevent port or link congestion and
to guarantee the QoS of the entire system.
Congestion management: The admission control applies only to new services that
attempt to access the system; whereas, the congestion management applies to the
admitted services and alleviates the congestion when transmission resources are
congested. The BSC decreases the rates of the services that already access the network in
the congestion control and bandwidth reservation phases to increase the processing
capacity of the entire system.
IP PATH is used for admission control and LDR is used for congestion control.
According to the congestion severity, the admission control is classified into three phases:
normal admission, congestion control, and bandwidth reservation. Different admission
strategies are applied in different phases.
Normal admission phase: The transmission resources are not congested and all services
are allowed to access the system.
Congestion control phase: The transmission resources are slightly congested and the
services after rate reduction are allowed to access the system. The rate control measures
consist of the PS coding control, CS AMR coding control, and preferential assignment of
TCHHs for CS services.
Bandwidth reservation phase: The transmission resources are severely congested. When
the bandwidth is available, intra-BSC handover, incoming BSC handover, and paging
response are admitted. New services with high priorities are allowed to wait in queue and
preempt transmission resources, whereas other types of services are rejected.
Admission control is performed on the basis of the bandwidth usage of the IP PATH.
When an IP path is configured on the logical port or resource group, two-level (IP PATH
and logical port/resource group) admission is performed.
Logical port shaping: Generally, one physical FE/GE port on the BSC can carry the
traffic of multiple BTSs. Traffic shaping on this physical port cannot be implemented on
these BTSs. When burst flow occurs on one BTS, the traffic processing of other BTSs
may be seriously affected. Therefore, the BSC performs two-level traffic shaping on the
logical ports on the BTSs in Abis over IP mode. In this way, the BSC accurately controls
the traffic flow on the BTSs according to the processing capacity of each BTS. This
prevents the prolonged delay of services and the increase of delay variation and packet
loss rate.
IP PATH: In Abis over IP mode, the IP paths of different bandwidths are configured
according to the service type. This guarantees the transmission resource for each service
type and prevents different service types from preempting the transmission resources.
The IP path is a logical link with virtual bandwidth and is carried on the physical link in
the IP transmission network. The IP PATH mechanism is mainly applicable to admission
control. That is, admission control is performed during the MS access phase according to
the service type and the bandwidth of the corresponding IP path. Thus, the effect of the
services on each other can be reduced.

Page 189 of 341
Public
BE
EF
logical
port
AF4
Priority Queues
BE
EF
logical
port
AF4
PQ+WR
Rqueues
AF4
Priority Queues
PQ+WR
Rqueues
EF
PQ+WR
Rqueues
Priority Queues
BE
logical
port
1 level shaper
IP Scheduler
2 level shaper
FE port
IP/Ethernet
Transport Network
Enhancement
None
Dependency
IP Interface board is needed in Abis/A/Gb interface: FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc
GBFD-118602 A over IP or
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 or
GBFD-118603 Gb over IP
None

Page 190 of 341
Public
5.2.14 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor

Availability
Summary
IP performance monitor (IP PM) detects the QoS in the IP transmission network. The
detection of QoS of the IP transmission network is the base for flow control and admission
control of the GSM IP network. IP PM provides timely and fast QoS detection of the bearer
network to effectively monitor the transmission network.
Benefits
With this feature, the QoS problems in the IP transmission network can be detected timely and
quickly.
According to the traffic statistics in IP PM, the usage condition of bandwidth is available,
which is a reference for the transmission network adjustment.
Description
IP PM uses Forward Monitoring (FM) and Backward Reporting (BR) mechanisms to detect
packet loss. One end periodically sends the FM message, informing the peer end of the
number of packets sent. On receiving the FM message, the peer end responds with a BR
message, reporting the number of packets received. The sending end then collects statistics
about the packet loss and delay based on the BR message. The working principle of IP PM is
shown as follows:
After IP PM is enabled, flow control and admission control are performed on the basis of the
delay, delay variation, or packet loss rate of a certain IP link between the BSC and BTS.
When the delay variation or packet loss rate increases, you can adjust the outgoing data rate
of the logical port associated with the link to reduce the load on the link, thus alleviating the
congestion. IP PM, complying with Huawei private protocol, requires the support from the
BSC and the BTS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency

Page 191 of 341
Public
IP Interface board is needed in Abis interface: FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc

None
This feature depends on GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.
5.2.15 GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM

Availability
Summary
The GBSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet O&M (802.3ah) and
end-to-end Ethernet O&M (802.1ag). The functions of Ethernet OAM consist of fault
detection, monitoring, verification, and identification. Through these functions, this feature
achieves reliability and high availability of Ethernet services.
Benefits
The Ethernet O&M helps the operator to manage user access in terms of detection,
monitoring, and rectification of Ethernet faults.
This feature achieves reliability and high availability of Ethernet services, enables the service
provider to provide economical and efficient advanced Ethernet services, and ensures that the
services have high quality and reliability that are required by telecommunications services.
This feature is implemented at the GBSS equipment, thus minimizing the impact of Ethernet
bandwidth fluctuation or faults on the GBSS.
Description
With the introduction of IP GSM, the Ethernet as a type of transport bearer is widely used. As
a Layer 2 protocol, Ethernet O&M can report the status of the network at the data link layer.
Thus, the network is monitored and managed more effectively. The functions of Ethernet
OAM consist of fault detection, notification, verification, and identification. The faults
involve the hardware faults that can be detected by the physical layer, such as link failure, and
the software faults that cannot be detected by the physical layer, such as memory bridging
unit damage. Ethernet O&M plays a significant role in reducing CAPEX/OPEX and
complying with the Service Level Agreement (SLA).
The GBSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (802.3ah) and
end-to-end Ethernet OAM (802.1ag).
1. Point-to-point Ethernet OAM
The point-to-point Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.3ah. The point-to-point Ethernet
OAM concerns the OAM of the last mile rather than the specific services. The OAM

Page 192 of 341
Public
implements point-to-point maintenance of the Ethernet through mechanisms such as OAM

discovery, loopback, link monitoring, and fault detection.
2. End-to-end Ethernet OAM

The end-to-end Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.1ag. Regarding the OAM domain as
a whole, the end-to-end Ethernet OAM establishes end-to-end detection to perform
maintenance of the Ethernet based on the services.
When the BSC detects Ethernet faults or degraded network performance through the Ethernet
OAM, the BSC, based on the practical configuration, can perform operations such as route
reselection, port switchover, and board switchover to ensure proper communication on the
Ethernet.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
IP Interface board is needed in Abis/A/Gb interface: FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc
The Ethernet OAM protocol should be supported by the interconnected transmission
equipment.

Page 193 of 341
Public
5.3 Satellite Transmission

5.3.1 GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Availability
Summary
Satellite communication features wide coverage, fine mobility, flexible link scheduling, and
good topography adaptability. With this feature, operators can deploy BTSs to provide radio
services in mountainous regions, outlying areas, isolated islands, and other areas that are
difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.
Benefits
With this feature, the operator can deploy BTSs in the areas that are difficult to be reached
through conventional transmission, thus solving the communication problem in those areas.
This feature can also be used for emergency communication.
Description
The Abis interface of ordinary GSM equipment does not support satellite transmission
because satellite transmission encounters problems such as delay, jitter, and bit error. This
feature takes these factors into account, makes improvements on the Abis signaling
processing, voice processing, and clock processing, and uses special satellite transmission
equipment, thus addressing the drawbacks of satellite transmission.
With this feature, the voice quality of the CS services can reach the normal level. However,
there is a certain delay in voice because there is a long transmission delay in satellite
transmission.
In the cell using satellite transmission, the EDGE services are supported.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature:
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell Dependency on other NEs
None
Page 194 of 341
Public
5.3.2 GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface

Availability
Summary
good topography adaptability. This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to
provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional
transmission.
Benefits
In the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission, hot spots
on special occasions, or emergency conditions, this feature enables the operator to
deploy the BSS system to provide radio services.
The satellite transmission resources over the A interface can be shared with other
interfaces.
Description
The conventional terrestrial transmission has the problems such as small coverage, poor
topography adaptability, and poor flexibility. With this feature, the operator can deploy the
BSS system in isolated islands or small areas to share the same CN resources with other BSS
systems.
Huawei also provides the A interface monitoring function. This enables the operator to
monitor the circuit usage over the A interface based on which the operator can extend the
circuit (or add the transmission links). Thus, the cost of the satellite link usage is effectively
reduced.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None

Page 195 of 341
Public
5.3.3 GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

Availability
Summary
good topography adaptability. This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to
provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional
transmission.
Benefits
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in
special geographical areas or emergency conditions.
With this feature, the BSC signaling processing unit can be deployed on the BTS side
and the TRAU unit can be configured in the CN equipment room. Thus, the transmission
cost is reduced because the Ater interface adopts the 4:1 multiplexing mode.
The satellite transmission resources over the Ater interface can be shared with other
interfaces.
Description
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in the
areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.
With this feature, the TRAU can be configured in the CN equipment room. This enables the
circuit over the Ater interface between the BSC signaling processing unit and the TRAU to
use the 4:1 multiplexing mode. As a result, the bandwidth required by the A interface circuit is
greatly reduced and thus the cost of using the A interface is reduced.
In addition, Huawei provides the Ater interface monitoring function. This enables the operator
to configure the bandwidth for satellite transmission over the Ater interface as required and
dynamically extend the circuit with the increase of the traffic volume. In this manner, the
circuit lease cost, the operation and maintenance cost is greatly reduced.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 196 of 341
Public
None
None
5.3.4 GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas
that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.
Benefits
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide PS services in
special geographical areas.
The satellite transmission resources over the Gb interface can be shared with other
interfaces.
Description
With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas
that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None

Page 197 of 341
Public
5.4 RAN Sharing

5.4.1 GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing
Availability
Summary
On the condition that independency of CNs of multiple operators is maintained, RAN Sharing
enables multiple operators to share one GBSS network so that they can use the resources
(including the BSC, BTS, antenna system, transmission, and so on) in the GBSS network
simultaneously.
Benefits
The GBSS equipment sharing enables new operators to access the network easily and
implement the network coverage quickly.
Operators can fully utilize the network resources and increase the revenue by sharing the
equipment on the existing network.
This feature reduces the comprehensive operation cost of operators.
Each operator carries out radio services independently so that they can maintain the
independence of business development from the network planning.
Description
RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators. Each operator has an independent CN
(MSC and SGSN). The shared GBSS uses a uniform network management system, which
implements comprehensive management of all the resources in the GBSS.
The shared services in the GBSS are CS services and PS services. For processing these
services, the GBSS routes them to the specific CN to which the cell belongs.
In addition, RAN Sharing supports the coexistence of shared resources and non-shared
resources in the BSS. For example, some resources in the BSS, such as all the resources under
one BTS belong to a specific operator. Thus, other operators cannot use these resources. The
resources under other BTSs in the GBSS can be shared by multiple operators.
The network structure of RAN Sharing is shown as follows:

Page 198 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Refer to the BTS Dependency of feature list.
None
The following M2000 feature must be activated:
WOFD-220200 RAN Sharing Management-GBSS
5.4.2 GBFD-118704 Abis Independent Transmission

Availability
Summary
In a RAN sharing network, multiple telecom operators share a base station and associated
auxiliary devices. Cells of different telecom operators can reside under one base station, but
each cell can only belong to one telecom operator. The transmission resources under the base

Page 199 of 341
Public
station can be shared among telecom operators or exclusively used by their respective telecom
operators.
Benefits
Telecom operators flexibly deploy transmission resources, which are applicable in different
scenarios.
Description
In a RAN sharing network, base station resources are usually shared among telecom operators
to reduce Capital Expenditure (CAPEX). Base station resources include site location, power
supply, antenna system, and transmission resources.
If telecom operators have their respective transport networks and transmission resources are
not shared, the Abis interface must support independent transmission.
Each telecom operator's signaling and traffic data is carried by their own transmission
resources over the Abis interface. Only the OM link provided by a specific telecom operator
is shared among telecom operators.
In Abis over TDM transmission mode, E1 ports are not shared among telecom operators.
In Abis over IP transmission mode, logical transmission resources are not shared among
telecom operators.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing
None
5.4.3 GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell

Availability

Page 200 of 341
Public
Summary
BSS Sharing enables multiple telecom operators to share BSS equipment on a per BTS basis
while still using their respective core network (CN) equipment. A cell, however, cannot be
shared among telecom operators. That is, cells of different operators can reside under one
base station, but each cell can only belong to one telecom operator.
MOCN Shared Cell enables multiple telecom operators to share the BSS equipment on a per
cell basis while still using their respective CN equipment. That is, all the resources under a
cell can work as a resource pool and be shared among telecom operators.
Benefits
The cell-based BSS equipment sharing not only drastically improves the sharing degree of
spectrum, BSS equipment, transmission bandwidth, and network management, but also
minimizes the CAPEX of the operator.
The efficient use of GSM spectrum resources lays a firm foundation for the development of
LTE.
Description
In existing GSM networks, multiple PLMN identifiers cannot be broadcast in a cell due to
protocol limitations, and a GSM MS cannot receive multiple PLMN identifiers. Therefore,
multiple telecom operators use a common PLMN identifier in a GSM cell. The BSC selects a
CN node to serve an MS depending on the setting of the MOCN Switch parameter, which
can be set to CNSEL(CN Select) or BSCSEL(BSC Select).
In a network with the MOCN Shared Cell feature enabled, both the roaming MSs and the
MSs subscribing to different telecom operators exist. The BSC identifies the IMSI, TMSI, or
P-TMSI to determine whether an MS is a subscribing MS or a roaming MS:
If the MS is a subscribing MS, the BSC routes the MS to the CN of the telecom operator
to which the MS subscribes.
If the MS is a roaming MS, the BSC routes this MS to a specific telecom operator
according to the specified rate of distributing roaming MSs among telecom operators.
When a telecom operator is specified for an MS, the CS-domain handover area, NC2 area,
and PS-domain handover area of the MS must belong to the area permitted by the telecom
operator. After this feature is enabled, the BSC integrates this feature with other handover
decisions (such as decisions based on coverage, quality, load, or priorities) to select a target
cell for a subscribing MS or a roaming MS. Then, the BSC triggers an intra-GSM or
GSM-to-UMTS CS-domain handover, NC2, or PS-domain handover.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Page 201 of 341
Public

GBFD-117401 MSC Pool
GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool
If the MS routing is selected by the CN, the list of VLRs in which an MS is allowed to roam
needs to be configured at the HLR, or the list of LAIs in which an MS is allowed to roam
needs to be configured at the MSC server.
5.4.4 GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based Handover

Availability
Summary
To meet the operator's requirements of network planning and service, the network can be
divided into multiple areas, and an MS of a specific type can move only in the specified area
to obtain services. That is, the operator can restrict the service area of an MS by configuring
the mapping between the IMSI number ranges and the network areas.
Benefits
In RAN sharing mode, one BSC is shared by multiple operators, which may have different
partner operators. An MS can be handed over only between the networks of partner operators.
In non-RAN sharing mode, MSs are provided with differentiated services based on service
areas.
Description
The operator can divide a network into multiple areas called handover shared areas at the
BSC, based on location areas. In addition, the operator configures the mapping between the
IMSI number ranges and the handover shared areas to restrict the area in which an MS can be
handed over.
During an intra-BSC handover, the BSC determines the target cell to which an MS is to be
handed over according to the IMSI number range of the MS. In this case, the target cell must
belong to the handover shared area.
During an incoming inter-BSC or incoming inter-RAT handover, the BSC determines whether
to allow the MS to access the target cell according to the IMSI number range of the MS. If the
MS is not allowed to access the target cell, the handover request is rejected. That is, the MS
cannot be handed over to this BSC.
Enhancement
None

Page 202 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
None
None
The Common Id and Handover Request messages sent by the MSC are required to carry
IMSI.

Page 203 of 341
Public
Site Solution
6.1 PICO Solution

6.1.1 GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning
Availability
Summary
The pico base station is BTS3900B. After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900B can
connect with the BSC automatically with the network automatic detection function. Operators
do not need to configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters
based on frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of
surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic
configuration and planning of the BTS39000B.
Benefits
This feature helps operators to rapidly deploy the network and flexibly adjust the
network layout.
This feature helps reduce the workload of manual configuration once the network is
adjusted.
Description
The BTS3900B is a new generation pico base station launched by Huawei. It is small and
light, has the plug-and-play feature, and supports indoor installation. The automatic
configuration and planning function of the BTS3900B provides simple and easy installation
for operators.
After being installed with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900B automatically performs
the internal check to confirm that the hardware is properly installed. After the self-check is
complete, the BTS3900B automatically configures the parameters related to IP transmission
and establishes the encrypted IP transmission links with the BSC and the M2000. Then, the
BTS3900B reports its device configurations to the M2000. The M2000 calculates the
available radio parameters automatically based on the information about the frequency bands
and ambient radio environment reported by the BTS3900B, and then sends the parameters

Page 204 of 341
Public
including frequencies, BSIC, CGI, and so on to the BSC to configure based on the parameters.
After the basic parameters are configured, the BTS3900B can work normally and process
services.
After the network runs for a period of time, you can manually initiate the automatic planning
procedure of the BTS3900B through the M2000 if the network adjustment is required. Only a
few manual configurations are required during the automatic planning procedure. Therefore,
the BSC provides a mechanism of reporting event alarms to timely notify users of any
exception during automatic planning.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
WOFD-180800 Pico BTS Automatic Planning-GBSS
6.1.2 GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization

Availability
Summary
The pico base station is BTS3900B. The BTS3900B implements the frequency
synchronization on the Um interface by demodulating the signals on the frequency correction
channel (FCCH) and synchronization channel (SCH) on the main BCCH in the surrounding
macro BTSs and then adjusting the frequency offset.
Benefits
With this feature, operators need to provide neither the external clock source nor the GPS
hardware for frequency synchronization, thus saving the cost of deploying sites and O&M
cost.

Page 205 of 341
Public
Description
In the GSM network, the frequencies must be synchronized on the Um interface among BTSs.
Otherwise, the network quality is affected. For example, the handover success rate drops. At
present, four solutions are employed to implement frequency synchronization on the Um
interface: external BITS clock, IPCLK, upper-level BSC clock, and GPS clock. All these four
solutions require the external clock source or the GPS hardware, and thus are not applicable to
the indoor BTS3900B.
This feature, however, can implement frequency synchronization on the Um interface
between the pico base station and the surrounding macro BTSs by using software to provide
the 13 MHz synchronization clock.
The BTS3900B applies for frequencies of neighboring cells for synchronization and
modulates the FCCH and SCH to select a target frequency. Then, the BTS3900B calculates
the frequency offset to the target frequency and corrects its frequency to achieve frequency
synchronization on the Um interface.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
6.1.3 GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. Dual-band automatic planning is an extension of the
existing single-band automatic planning. The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature supports
automatic planning of the frequencies on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands or on
the 850 MHz and 1900 MHz frequency bands.
Benefits
The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature enables more flexible and high-quality network
planning. Thus, the site construction workload and the maintenance cost are reduced.

Page 206 of 341
Public
Description
After the PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature is introduced, the BTS3900B supports not
only single-band automatic planning but also automatic planning of the frequencies on the
900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands or on the 850 MHz and 1900 MHz frequency
bands.
The BTS3900B scans the uplink and downlink frequencies specified by the operator and then
reports the frequency scanning result to the M2000. Based on the frequency scanning result,
the M2000 evaluates the interference to each frequency. The M2000 then considers the
neighboring relations of the surrounding base stations to select the frequency with the
minimum interference as the working frequency of the BTS3900B.
The BTS3900B supports three frequency planning modes. The operator can select a proper
mode according to the actual conditions.
1. Co-BCCH dual-band cell mode: The M2000 allocates the BCCH frequency on the low
frequency band, for example, the 900 MHz or 850 MHz frequency band, and then allocates a
TCH frequency on the low or high frequency band.
2. Band adaptive selection mode: Based on the dual-band frequency scanning result reported
by the BTS3900B, the M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the
working frequency. The frequency band of the selected frequency becomes the working band
of the BTS3900B. That is, the M2000 configures the BTS3900B as a single-band cell on the
working band.
3. Specified band mode: The BTS3900B scans the frequencies on the two frequency bands
and then reports the frequency scanning result to the M2000. The M2000 selects the working
frequency only from the specified frequency band. The M2000 then configures the
BTS3900B as a single-band cell on the specified frequency band.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Only the BTS3900B supports this feature.
None
WOFD-180800 Pico BTS Automatic Planning-GBSS

Page 207 of 341
Public
6.1.4 GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. When a BTS3900B is locally commissioned, a USB
device is required to save the configuration file. The PICO USB Encryption feature enables
the encryption of the configuration file in the USB device so that the file is not displayed as
plain text. In this way, the risk of disclosure of the configuration file is reduced.
Benefits
The risk of disclosure of information because the files in the USB device are lost or stolen is
reduced.
Description
When a BTS3900B is locally commissioned, a USB device is used to save the configuration
file. This file contains important configuration information, such as the IP addresses of
network elements and IPSec keys. If the information is saved as plain text, it may be stolen or
disclosed.
After the PICO USB Encryption feature is introduced, the configuration file is encrypted by
using encryption software on the M2000 side and then is decrypted on the BTS side. In this
manner, the configuration file in the USB device is not displayed as plain text, thus ensuring
information security.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
The M2000 needs to support this feature.

Page 208 of 341
Public
6.1.5 GBFD-510605 PICO Access Control List (ACL)

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. The BTS3900B filters out illegal packets at the
receiving ports after packet analysis so that these packets do not enter the BTS3900B. In this
manner, the robustness and anti-attack capability of the BTS3900B are improved.
Benefits
The anti-attack capability of the BTS3900B in an IP transport network is improved.
Description
In IP transmission mode, the BTS3900B can use an existing public IP transport network to
transmit data. Compared with a private transport network, the public transport network has
greater security vulnerabilities and is more vulnerable to hacker attack.
The ports of the BTS3900B can filter the received packets. These ports receive and process
only the ARP, DHCP, DNS, ISAKMP (IKE), ESP, TCP, and ICMP packets but discard the
packets of other types. The BTS3900B filters out illegal packets so that they do not enter the
BTS3900B. Thus, the CPU usage of the BTS3900B is reduced. To some extent, the stability
and the anti-attack capability of the BTS3900B are also improved.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
6.1.6 GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode

Availability

Page 209 of 341
Public
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. In the specified period, the TRX power amplifiers of the
cell under a BTS3900B can be shut down to reduce power consumption.
Benefits
Power consumption is reduced by shutting down network devices during the period when
there is no traffic. Thus, the OPEX is cut down.
Description
The BTS3900B is an industry-leading compact PICO base station. It features small size,
flexible site selection, and easy installation, enabling fast and cost-effective blind-spot
coverage. In some temporary blind-spot coverage areas, such as office areas, temporary
meeting rooms, temporary exhibition halls, and warehouses, wireless communication services
are not required in the period when there is no traffic, for example, at night.
With the PICO Sleeping Mode feature, the cell under the BTS3900B can be shut down in the
specified period to reduce power consumption. The operator can specify the period during
which a PICO cell is shut down, for example, between 0:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. During this
period, the power amplifiers of all the TRXs (including the BCCH TRX) in the cell are shut
down. In PICO sleeping mode, wireless communication services are unavailable within the
coverage area of the PICO cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
The M2000 needs to support this feature.
6.1.7 GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization

Availability

Page 210 of 341
Public
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. If the working frequency of an operational BTS3900B is
severely interfered, the BTS3900B can perform automatic frequency planning under the
control of the M2000.
Benefits
After this feature is introduced, the BTS3900B automatically improves the network QoS
when its working frequency is interfered. In this manner, the network optimization workload
and the maintenance cost are reduced.
Description
The M2000 periodically analyzes the uplink and downlink interference-related traffic
statistics of the BTS3900B. When the working frequency of the BTS3900B is found severely
interfered, the M2000 instructs the BTS3900B to restart uplink and downlink frequency
scanning. Based on the frequency scanning result, the M2000 selects the frequency with the
minimum interference as the working frequency of the BTS3900B.
Through automatic optimization of the working frequency, the BTS3900B avoids using the
frequency with severe interference so that the speech quality and traffic KPIs in the coverage
area are improved significantly. Accordingly, in the coverage area, the handover success rate
increases whereas the call drop rate decreases.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
WOFD-170100 Pico BTS Frequency Automatic Optimizing-GBSS
6.1.8 GBFD-510608 PICO Transceiver Redundancy

Availability

Page 211 of 341
Public
Introduction
A BTS3900B supports a maximum of two transceivers (TRXs). Usually, one TRX operates
and the other TRX is idle. After this feature is introduced, one TRX automatically starts
operating if the other TRX malfunctions.
Benefits
Reduced out-of-service duration
Decreased OM workload
Description
When one TRX configured for a BTS3900B malfunctions, the BTS3900B is reset
automatically. After the BTS3900B restarts, it reconfigures the data on the other TRX. Then,
the BTS3900B starts operating again.
This type of switchover also can be performed manually in remote mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
6.2 EasyGSM Solution

6.2.1 GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and
Planning
Availability

Page 212 of 341
Public
Summary
The Compact BTS is BTS3900E. After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900E can
connect to the BSC automatically. Operators do not need to configure radio parameters for
cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results of
the uplink and downlink level of surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS, and then
performs the automatic configuration and planning of the BTS39000E.
Benefits
This feature enables operators to rapidly deploy the network and flexibly adjust the
network layout.
This feature helps reduce the workload of manual configuration once the network is
adjusted.
Description
The BTS3900E is a new generation pico base station launched by Huawei. It is small and
light, has the plug-and-play feature, and supports indoor installation. The automatic
configuration and planning function of the BTS3900E provides simple and easy installation
for operators.
After being installed with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900E automatically performs
the internal check to confirm that the hardware is properly installed. After the self-check is
complete, the BTS3900E automatically configures the parameters related to IP transmission
and establishes the encrypted IP transmission links with the BSC and the M2000. Then, the
BTS3900E reports its device configurations to the M2000. The M2000 calculates the
available radio parameters automatically based on the information about the frequency bands
and ambient radio environment reported by the BTS3900E, and then sends the parameters
including frequencies, BSIC, CGI, and so on to the BSC to configure based on the parameters.
After the basic parameters are configured, the BTS3900E can work normally and process
services.
After the network runs for a period of time, you can manually initiate the automatic planning
procedure of the BTS3900E through the M2000 if the network adjustment is required. Only a
few manual configurations are required during the automatic planning procedure. Therefore,
the BSC provides a mechanism of reporting event alarms to timely notify users of any
exception during automatic planning.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None

Page 213 of 341
Public

WOFD-180900 Compact BTS Automatic Planning-GBSS
6.2.2 GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

Availability
Summary
The Compact BTS is BTS3900E. According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output
power of the TRX in real time to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the
network. A cell is initially configured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the
traffic volume, another TRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs
share the 30 W power.
Benefits
With this feature, the network capacity and coverage can be automatically adjusted without
manual intervention, thus reducing the maintenance cost.
Description
At the early stage of site deployment, the traffic volume is low. Thus, the BTS is configured
with one TRX, which transmits with 30 W on the GSM900 frequency band. With the slow
increase of the traffic volume, when the preset threshold is exceeded, the BSC automatically
configures two TRXs, with the total transmit power no more than 30 W. During the operation
of the BTS, the system adjusts the TRX transmit power in real time according to the change
of the traffic volume. In this way, the coverage is changed, thus achieving the optimal
network performance. This feature mainly applies to the scenario where there are few
neighboring cells and the network structure is simple, especially, where the network
experiences slow increase of traffic volume.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None

Page 214 of 341
Public

WOFD-181000 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning-GBSS
6.2.3 GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell

Planning and Optimization
Availability
Summary
The compact BTS is also referred to as the BTS3900E. After this feature is enabled, the
M2000 analyzes the scanning information of the downlink frequencies reported by the
BTS3900E and thus obtains the information about the neighboring cells. Based on the
obtained information, the M2000 performs the neighboring cell planning of the BTS3900E. If
the M2000 determines that the compact BTS has redundant or missing neighboring cells by
analyzing the measurement reports, the M2000 triggers the automatic neighboring cell
optimization to update neighboring cell relations.
Benefits
The network performance is improved without manual intervention. The handover

success rate is increased and the call drop rate is decreased.
The workload for manually configuring neighboring cells is greatly reduced to improve
the operation and maintenance efficiency.
Description
The BTS3900E is a new type of Huawei compact BTS. It is small, light, and has the feature
of plug-and-play. It is used in indoor spaces and rural areas. This feature facilitates the
installation of the BTS3900E.
The following events occur in automatic neighboring cell planning. The M2000 enables the
BTS3900E to scan downlink frequencies and then the BTS3900E reports the information
about neighboring cells to the M2000. After that, the M2000 adds the scanned cells to the
neighboring cell list of the cell under the BTS3900E and adds the cell under the BTS3900E to
the neighboring cell list of the scanned cells. Thus, bidirectional neighboring cell relations are
created. If the scanned cells are not controlled by the M2000, the M2000 can create only
unidirectional neighboring cell relations.
If the M2000 determines that the BTS3900E has redundant or missing neighboring cells by
analyzing the measurement reports, the M2000 triggers the automatic neighboring cell
optimization to update neighboring cell relations.
Enhancement
None
Dependency

Page 215 of 341
Public
None
None
The following M2000 features must be activated:
WOFD-181100 Compact BTS Frequency Automatic Optimizing-GBSS
WOFD-181200 Compact BTS Automatic Neighboring Relation Optimization-GBSS
6.2.4 GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off

Availability
Summary
In rural areas, MS users habitually do not make phone calls at night. Therefore, the traffic of
the compact BTS (BTS3900E) is extremely light during such period. This feature allows the
BTS to be powered off and on at night as scheduled. In this manner, the power consumption
of the BTS can be reduced. The power-off and power-on times can be configured on the BSC.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption of the BTS at night when there is little
traffic. It can reduce the CAPEX on deploying BTSs powered by solar energy, because the
reduced power consumption leads to fewer required solar panels, smaller footprint, and
decreased costs in site construction and auxiliary devices.
Description
This feature can be applied to rural coverage scenarios where MS users habitually do not
make phone calls at night. With this feature, the BTS can be powered off and on as scheduled
during the period. The feature is applicable to the following powering scenarios:
1. BTS3900E Powered By Electricity Grid
In such a powering scenario, the BTS is not powered by solar energy. Telecom operators can
specify the power-off and power-on times of the BTS3900E according to the habits of local
MS users, so that the BTS can sleep at night, for example from midnight to 5 o'clock. When
sleeping, the BTS shuts down some RF devices to reduce power consumption. After this
feature is applied to BTS3900E O2, the power consumption of the BTS can be reduced by
100 W.
2. BTS3900E Powered By Solar Energy
In this scenario, this feature can be used in combination with the solar controller. Telecom
operators can set the power-off and power-on times of the BTS3900E on the BSC. The
BTS3900E is then powered off and on by the solar controller as scheduled. After the

Page 216 of 341
Public
BTS3900E is powered back on, it automatically establishes the connection to the BSC and
resumes to the functional state. Compared with the BTS powered by electricity grid, the BTS
powered by solar energy will be completely shut down during the specified power-off period,
thus not consuming any power.
Note that the BTS3900E cannot process any service during the power-off period. It cannot
automatically wake up or power on even if there are service requests.
In conclusion, this feature contributes a lot to the reduction of power consumption, especially
in the case of the BTS3900E powered by solar energy. It also helps reduce the number of
solar panels to a minimum without comprising the quality of service. In this way, the CAPEX
on the solar energy devices, which counts for a large percent of the total investment in a site,
can be reduced.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
The M2000 needs to support this feature. The Power2000, an auxiliary power supply product,
is required.
6.2.5 GBFD-510706 Local User Management

Availability
Summary
This feature is applicable to a special business mode. In this business mode, the operator
contracts out the BTS3900E deployed in a remote rural area to an entrepreneur (hereafter
called "village chief"). The village chief then performs local user management. Local user
management involves the following aspects:
1)
User registration and deregistration
2)
Local services
3)
Public network services
4)
Local services in single-BTS3900E mode

Page 217 of 341
Public
Benefits
The Local User Management feature enables the operator to launch a new business mode so
as to develop a new market.
After the operator contracts out a BTS3900E to the village chief, the village chief gains
profits by providing local services for the users in the village. The village chief is
responsible for performing local user registration, working out the charging policy, and
charging local users for their communications.
Local user management in a remote rural area can be performed even if the transmission
between the public network and the local network is disrupted. In addition, calls can be
made between local users and the calls can be charged.
The BTS3900E purchased by the village chief can provide services for public network
users of the operator.
In the case that the communication between the BTS3900E and the BSC is disrupted, the
BTS3900E attempts to meet the communication requirements of public network users.
Description
The Local User Management feature involves the following aspects:
1. User registration and deregistration
The village chief that contracts for the BTS3900E purchases a set of SIM cards from the
operator. These SIM cards are registered in the operator's network but not registered in the
local network. The village chief then sells these SIM cards to the villagers while registering
the SIM cards in the local network. Subsequently, the villagers can use mobile phones with
these SIM cards to make local calls and external calls.
The MSs that are registered in the local network covered by the BTS3900E of the village
chief are called local users, whereas other MSs are called public network users.
The village chief uses a PC to perform user registration. The user information, such as the
MSISDN, IMSI, prepaid fee, and balance are stored on the PC.
When a public network user roams into the coverage area of the BTS3900E, the village chief
manually adds this user to the local network so as to meet the communication requirements of
the public network user.
2. Local services
When local user A and local user B camp on the network covered by the BTS3900E of the
village chief, the calls made by the two users and the short messages transmitted between
them are called local services. The charging of local services is performed at the PC. The
village chief uses this PC to print the call detail records (CDRs) of all local calls.
Regarding the prepaid users, the PC periodically updates the balance information. Currently,
only the monthly fee charging is supported.
With respect to local services, the CN neither participates in the service signaling procedure
nor records CDRs. Therefore, legal interception, authentication, and encryption cannot be
performed.
3. Public network services
All users except the local users are called public network users. The calls, such as a call made
by a local user after it moves into the coverage area of another base station, or a call made by

Page 218 of 341
Public
a public network user after it moves into the coverage area of the BTS3900E of the village
chief, are called public network services.
When a local user moves into the coverage area of another base station, all the charging and
calls of this user are processed by the MSC. The village chief combines the CDRs of local
calls and the CDRs generated by the public network to calculate the communication fee of the
local user. After charging the local user for the communication fee, the village chief makes fee
settlement with the operator.
4. Local services in single-BTS3900E mode
When the transmission over the Abis interface is disrupted, the BTS3900E enters the
single-BTS3900E mode. In this mode, the BTS3900E independently processes all local calls.
When the transmission over the Abis interface recovers, the BTS3900E automatically
switches from the single-BTS3900E mode to the normal work mode.
If a non-local user enters the coverage area of the BTS3900E in single-BTS3900E mode and
the village chief does not register this user in the local network, the BTS3900E allocates a
temporary MSISDN to the user and notifies the user of the MSISDN through a short message.
Subsequently, normal communication services can be processed between the non-local user
and local users. The BTS3900E records the CDRs of all users, including local users and
non-local users. A CDR contains the fundamental information about a user, such as the IMSI.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
6.2.6 GBFD-111613 Weather Adaptive Power Management

Availability
Summary
This feature checks the strength of solar radiation and estimates the power consumption of a
site using solar energy as its power supply. Based on the checking and estimation results, the
energy consumption behavior, serving time, and service quality of the site can be determined.

Page 219 of 341
Public
This feature helps prolong the serving time of the site and minimize the possibility of the site
running out of power, while ensuring the desirable service quality. Ultimately, this feature
optimizes the deployment of the energy equipment and consequently reduces the related
costs.
Benefits
The power consumption of the sites is reduced. As a result, the emission of carbon
dioxide is decreased.
The deployment of the energy equipment is optimized, reducing the related costs and
enhancing the reliability of power supply.
Description
The administrator/operator configures the related parameters and enters the weather forecast
data on the M2000.
The BTS obtains from the solar energy controller the information on the power generation
capacity of the solar panel, power consumption of the BTS, and remaining capacity of the
storage battery. It reports the collected information to the M2000 periodically. The M2000
adjusts the transmit power of the BTS to a proper value based on the estimated power
generation capacity (depending on the weather conditions), the actual power generation
capacity of the solar panel, and the remaining capacity of the storage battery. This prolongs
the battery life and reduces the possibility of the BTS running out of power.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
WOFD-170600 Weather Adaptive Energy Management-GBSS

Page 220 of 341
Public
Network Performance
7.1 Coverage Enhancement

7.1.1 GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology)
Availability
Summary
The Power Boost Technology (PBT) enables the DTRU to transmit the combined signals with
high gain and to achieve extended network coverage.
Benefits
This feature can realize the mutual transformation between the network coverage and the
network capacity.
In the initial network deployment stage, the operators can use the PBT to extend the
network coverage, thus reducing the number of BTSs.
When the subscriber number increases and the network capacity needs to be expanded,
operator can transform the PBT-enabled single TRX into two common-mode TRXs, thus
protesting the hardware investment.
Description
In the DTRU, two TRXs are integrated into a TRX module that is configured with a combiner.
The combiner combines the radio signals of the same frequency and same phrase from two
TRXs, and then transmits the combined signals. In this way, the downlink transmit power is
higher than the transmit power of the original signals, and the transmit power with high gain
is achieved and the downlink coverage is extended.
Enhancement
None

Page 221 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
None
None
7.1.2 GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity

Availability
Summary
To enable this feature, the two TRXs in the DTRU are connected to the two separated antenna
feeders respectively, and the two antennas transmit the same downlink signal on the same
frequency. Through the introduction of the controllable delay and changeable phase between
two signals of the two TRXs, the diversity gain in terms of time and space can be obtained,
thus enhancing the RX signals and reducing the signal attenuation. This in turn, extends the
network coverage.
Benefits
This feature can realize the mutual transformation between the network coverage and the
network capacity.
This feature can effectively extend the downlink coverage, thus reducing the number of
required BTSs.
When the requirement for the network coverage decreases and the requirement for the
capacity increases, operator can transform the transmit diversity-enabled single TRX into
common-mode TRXs.
Description
The feature enables the two TRXs that are integrated in the DTRU to transmit the correlated
signals on the same frequency. This provides two independent downlink multi-path signals,
and these signals are processed by the equalizer of the MS. In this way, the diversity gain is
obtained, and the quality of the RX signal is improved. Therefore, the downlink coverage is
improved. If the DTRU works in single TRX mode, this feature can be enabled through
remote data configuration.

Page 222 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
It is mutually exclusive with the following features when using RRU3008/RRU3908:
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing (Dual PA power sharing)
None
7.1.3 GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver Diversity

Availability
Summary
The 4-way receiver diversity technology allows four antennas (four uni-polarized antennas or
two dual-polarized antennas) to receive the muti-path uplink signals from one cell. Then the
received signals are combined. Compared with two-way receiver diversity, four-way receiver
diversity can improve the receive sensitivity, thus extending the uplink coverage.
Benefits
The 4-way receiver diversity technology can enhance the uplink RX signal strength by
increasing the receive gain of the BTS antennas without increasing the transmit power of the
MS. In this way, the cell coverage is extended and the improved QoS can be achieved.
Description
The coverage of a cell is determined by the transmit power of the BTS and MS, and the
receive gain of the BTS antenna. Because the transmit power of an MS is much lower than
that of a BTS, in most cases, the actual coverage is lower than the designed value and the
voice quality deteriorates.
With appropriate design, the 4-way receiver diversity technology allows one TRX module to
receive the uplink signals from four RX channels and then combine the uplink signals to
achieve better signal quality and demodulation performance. Thus, the receive sensitivity is

Page 223 of 341
Public
improved, and the receive effect is much better than that of none receiver diversity and that of
two-way receiver diversity.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
7.1.4 GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity

Availability
Summary
Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity.
Benefits
Currently, the TRX-based transmit diversity is applied. In this case, a double-transceiver unit
is used as a single-transceiver unit. However, timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity
maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage.
Dynamic transmit diversity makes fully use of idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the
areas with weak signals, such as at cell borders, indoors, or in cars. This feature helps save
network resources and capacity. Based on actual network conditions, the application on some
timeslots helps expand the coverage and improve the downlink output capacity, thus
balancing the traffic volume and coverage.
Dynamic transmit diversity can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the border of
a cell. This is mainly used to improve the concentric performance when the co-BCCH
function is enabled.
Description
Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity. One MS occupies one TCH
during a call, and the voice quality is monitored by the MR. If the voice quality of an MS is
lower than the predefined threshold, the network enables dynamic transmit diversity to assign
the same timeslots on two adjacent TRXs to the MS. The signals carried on the two timeslots
Page 224 of 341
Public
are the same, and the phases are also identical. The signals are sent out through different
transmit ports and then enhanced through signal combination. Thus, the receive quality of the
signals is improved. If the channel of the same timeslot of the adjacent TRX is occupied by an
MS, the intra-cell handover is performed to switch the MS to an idle channel so that the
adjacent channel can be used for dynamic transmit diversity. The receive quality of the MS
that is switched to an idle channel is good. Therefore, no call drop occurs during the
handover.
If the voice quality is higher than the predefined threshold, the network disables dynamic
transmit diversity and then releases the adjacent channel.
Compared with common transmit diversity, dynamic transmit diversity does not decrease the
capacity by half. It can achieve a balance between capacity and coverage and realize flexible
conversion.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature depends on GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.
It is mutually exclusive with the following features when using multi carrier RRU dynamic
TX diversity:
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing(Dual PA power sharing)
None
7.1.5 GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)

Availability
Summary
Dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) is timeslot-based PBT.

Page 225 of 341
Public
Benefits
Currently, the TRX-based PBT is applied. In this case, a double-transceiver unit serves as a
single-transceiver unit. Timeslot-based PBT, however, maintains optimal balance between
capacity and coverage.
Dynamic PBT makes full use of idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with
weak signals, such as at cell borders, indoors, or in cars. This feature helps save network
resources and capacity. Based on actual network conditions, this feature helps balance the
traffic volume and coverage.
Dynamic PBT can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the border of a cell. This
helps improve the concentric cell performance when the co-BCCH function is enabled.
Description
Dynamic PBT is timeslot-based PBT.
One MS occupies one TCH during a call, and the voice quality is monitored by the MR.
If the signal strength of an MS is lower than the preset threshold, the network enables
dynamic PBT. In this case, the channels corresponding to the same timeslot of two TRXs
in one TRX module cannot be assigned to the MSs; whereas the RF channels serving as
backup channels can provide PBT service. The signals and the phases of the traffic
timeslot in the RF channel are the same as those of the same timeslot in the same TRX
module of the backup channel. The signals are strengthened after the combination, and
thus the signal strength of MSs is enhanced.
If the channel of the same timeslot of the adjacent TRX is occupied by an MS, the
intra-cell handover is performed to switch the MS to an idle channel so that the adjacent
channel can be used for dynamic PBT. The receive quality of the MS that is switched to
an idle channel is good. Therefore, no call drop occurs during the handover.
If the signal strength of an MS is higher than the preset threshold, the network disables
dynamic PBT. Then, the borrowed channel is restored to the idle state and provides
access services.
Compared with common PBT, dynamic PBT does not decrease the capacity by half. It can
achieve a balance between capacity and coverage and realize flexible conversion.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature depends on GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

Page 226 of 341
Public

None
7.1.6 GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage

Availability
Summary
This feature increases the maximum transmit power of PS services by using the coverage
enhancement and power sharing techniques, enlarging the coverage area of the EDGE
network. This feature is applicable to both dual-carrier TRXs and multi-carrier TRXs.
Benefits
The feature increases the TRX transmit power in the 8PSK modulation scheme and the data
throughput at cell border . This improves user experience.
Description
In a GSM network, CS services and low-rate PS services use the GMSK modulation scheme
(CS14 and MCS14); high-rate PS services use the 8PSK modulation scheme (MCS59). In
the case of the 8PSK modulation scheme, the peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) of a TRX
will increase. Before the introduction of this feature, the transmit power of the TRX needs to
be rolled back by 1.8 dB to ensure the linear output of the power amplifier. The transmit
power on EDGE channels that uses the 8PSK modulation scheme decreases by comparison
with the GMSK modulation scheme. This leads to bad user experience.
To solve this problem, Huawei has developed the feature Enhanced EDGE Coverage. By
adopting the coverage enhancement and power sharing techniques, the maximum transmit
power of the PS service is increased. With this feature, the data throughput at cell border is
increased. This feature is applicable to both dual-carrier TRXs and multi-carrier TRXs.
With respect to the dual-carrier TRX, the maximum transmit power of the PS service is
increased by using the dynamic transmit diversity and dynamic power boost technology (PBT)
techniques on the same timeslot of different carriers. In this way, the cell coverage of the PS
service can be comparable to that of the CS service.
With respect to the multi-carrier TRX, the maximum transmit power of the PS service is
increased by allocating the power margin of the multi-carrier TRX to the 8PSK traffic channel.
The power margin always exists because the power amplifier of the multi-carrier TRX does
not transmit signals at full power in most cases due to power control and the existence of idle
timeslots. By using the power margin, the cell coverage of the PS service can be comparable
to that of the CS service.
The maximum transmit power in the 8PSK modulation scheme should not exceed that in the
GMSK modulation scheme. Therefore, the network planning will not be affected.

Page 227 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None
7.1.7 GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing

Availability
This feature is available from GBSS13.0.
Summary
The output power can be shared between TRXs at the timeslot level and be dynamically
adjusted to increase the network coverage.
Benefits
This feature increases the output power of TRXs, enhances the cell coverage, and improves
the power utilization of the Power Amplifier (PA).
Description
Dynamic Power Sharing is a type of cell coverage maximization solution that aims to meet
different power requirements of users distributed in different areas of a cell.
Users distributed in different areas of a cell require different transmit power to access the
radio network. Generally, users near the BTS require low transmit power; whereas users far
from the BTS require high transmit power. The Dynamic Power Sharing feature dynamically
adjusts the transmit power of channels according to the power required by different calls to
meet the power requirements of users far from the BTS. When the user distribution in a cell
dynamically changes, the dynamic transmit power of the TRXs that are enabled with this
feature can be greater than the average available static power of the TRXs to increase the cell
coverage with the same PA output power.

Page 228 of 341
Public
Improvement on downlink coverage

In a network with poor downlink signal quality or low-speed downlink PS services, dynamic
power sharing can be enabled to reduce the proportion of users with weak coverage. This
improves speech quality and increases data throughput, thereby improving user experience
and reducing user complaints.
The Dynamic Power Sharing feature can be enabled only when the PA or PAs whose output
power is shared support the multi-carrier RF module. There are two types of Dynamic Power
Sharing, namely, single-PA dynamic power sharing and dual-PA dynamic power sharing.
Single-PA dynamic power sharing. Assume that the multi-carrier RF module GRFU is used.
The output power of three to six TRXs on the GRFU can be dynamically shared. The
single-PA dynamic power sharing function improves the output power compared with static
power.
Dual-PA dynamic power sharing. Assume that two GRFU modules are used. The TRXs
provided by the two GRFU modules work in the resource pool mode, and the output power is
shared between the TRXs in the resource pool. The dual-PA dynamic power sharing function
can further improve the output power of TRXs in large configuration scenarios.
When the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function is enabled, the operating frequencies of
the two RF modules must be within the Downlink Frequency Bandwidth (DFB) (for example,
the DFB is 12.5 MHz when the operating frequencies of the RRU share the output power of
one PA, and the DFB is 15 MHz when the operating frequencies of the RFU share the output
power of one PA).Currently, if the RRU is enabled with the dual-PA dynamic power sharing
function, the RRU must be configured in the single-cell single-module 2-way transmit mode.
If the RFU is enabled with the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function, the RFU must be
configured in the single-cell dual-module mode.
Huawei is committed to optimize the network KPIs through algorithm improvements during
dynamic power sharing. The network KPIs can be further optimized when this feature is used
together with Huawei network planning and network optimization services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The single-PA dynamic power sharing function cannot be used together with any of the
following features:
GBFD-117002 IBCA
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell (dual-timeslot extension function)

Page 229 of 341
Public
When the RFU uses the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function, the function cannot be used
together with any of the following features:
GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell
GBFD-113701 RF hopping(Inter-module)
When the RRU uses the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function, the function cannot be used
together with any of the following features:
GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity
GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity
GBFD-117002 IBCA
Dependency on other NEs:
None
7.1.8 GBFD-114001 Extended Cell

Availability
Summary
The application of extended cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a GSM cell. This helps
operators to provide wider coverage in special areas.

Page 230 of 341
Public
Benefits
The extended cell extends the coverage of the BTS and enables MSs to perform services in
long-distance areas, such as in vast plains and seas. In this way, the scope of network services
is extended and the network quality is improved.
Description
According to the GSM specifications, the maximum TA of a cell on the Um interface is 63
bits. Hence, the coverage radius of a cell cannot exceed 35 km. In the vast and sparsely
populated areas where the traffic is light and the transmission and power supply facilities are
unavailable, the cells with a coverage radius greater than 35 km are required. The extended
cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a common cell. When this feature is enabled, the
coverage radius of a cell can reach up to 120 km. This feature enables operators to deploy the
GSM network rapidly in a cost-effective way in remote areas, thus improving the profitability.
If the coverage radius of a cell exceeds 35 km, the signal delay exceeds the maximum TA of
63 bits. When an MS moves to the border of the cell, the MS transmits signals with the
maximum permissible TA value. If the MS keeps moving outwards, the system cannot adjust
the TA value in an adaptive way because the TA has reached the maximum value. In this case,
some signals transmitted by the MS are sent to the BTS receiver on the next timeslot. To solve
this problem, the extended cell feature can be used. When this feature is enabled, two
continuous timeslots are assigned for each MS call and the receiver window of the BTS
receiver is also extended to the width of two timeslots. Thus, the cell coverage radius is
extended to more than 35 km. To enable the MSs in the extended coverage area to initiate
calls at any time, the BCCH, CCCH, and SDCCH should be assigned two timeslots.
In the double-timeslot extended cell, the GPRS/EGPRS services are supported.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The downlink throughput is enhanced in the double-timeslot extended cell. In the cells with a
coverage radius of more than 35 km, such as coast coverage, island coverage, or wide
coverage on land, the MS supporting multislot capability can be assigned PDCHs for four
downlink timeslots and one uplink timeslot. The extended cell can provide a data throughput
that is four times higher than that in a common cell with a single downlink timeslot for
service establishment. This accelerates the download speed, enhances user experience, and
improves the data service profitability of operators.
Dependency
None

Page 231 of 341
Public
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
7.2 Capacity Improvement

7.2.1 GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell
Availability
Summary
A concentric cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. Different frequency
reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells.
Benefits
The tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. Therefore, the system
capacity is expanded without affecting the voice quality.
Description
With the number of subscribers increasing, frequency resources do not meet the growing
capacity demand. Therefore, tight frequency reuse must be applied to increase frequency
usage and network capacity. Tight frequency reuse, however, may greatly increase
interference and even result in deterioration of voice quality. It is necessary to reduce
interference and ensure voice quality in the tight frequency reuse pattern.
The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid
subcell and underlaid subcell.
For an MS in the underlaid subcell but not in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as the
BCCH TRX, in the loose frequency reuse pattern should be assigned.
For an MS in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as a non-BCCH TRX, in the tight
frequency reuse pattern should be assigned.
The tight frequency reuse pattern in the overlaid subcell improves the system capacity.
Compared with the MSs in the underlaid subcell, the MSs in the overlaid subcell are far from
the interference sources, and therefore the voice quality is guaranteed even if the tight
frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. The voice quality of the MSs in the
underlaid subcell is also guaranteed when the loose frequency reuse pattern is applied.
When the capacity of the coverage area changes, the channels in the overlaid subcell and
underlaid subcell should be adjusted. For example, the traffic volume increases because a
large number of calls are made within a short period in the overlaid subcell. Adjusting the
TRX from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell can expand the capacity of the
overlaid subcell and thus solve the problem of burst traffic increase. When the traffic volume
becomes light, the original settings are restored.
Page 232 of 341
Public
The BSS provides the power control, channel assignment, and handover algorithms regarding
the concentric cell to balance the traffic distribution in the concentric cell.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
Support for Main BCCH Configured in Overlaid Subcell: The BCCH can be configured either
in the underlaid subcell or in the overlaid subcell. The BCCH configured in the overlaid
subcell can increase the network capacity because the tight frequency reuse pattern is applied
to the overlaid subcell. When the BCCH is configured in the overlaid subcell, the coverage
area of the overlaid subcell must be equivalent to that of the underlaid subcell. This can
reduce failures in handovers from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell and reduce
failures in overlaid subcell assignments, thus improving the network performance.
Support for PDCH configured in Overlaid Subcell: The number of PDCHs increases with the
growth of PS services. This aggravates the TCH congestion in the underlaid subcell.
Configuring the PDCH in the overlaid subcell can absorb the PS services into the overlaid
subcell, thus minimizing the congestion in the underlaid subcell and increasing the capacity of
the concentric cell.
The parameters of concentric handover should be set for CS services and PS services
separately. This can implement timely handovers in CS domain and PS domain and reduce
call drops.
Dependency
None
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
7.2.2 GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell

Availability
Summary
The co-BCCH cell refers to a cell where the TRXs on the GSM900/DCS1800,
GSM850/DCS1800, or GSM850/PCS1900 coexist. The TRXs on two bands are distributed in
the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell that share one BCCH TRX. The co-BCCH cell can
expand the network capacity and reduce the interference between cells.

Page 233 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature helps improve the cell capacity and reduce cell reselections and inter-cell
handovers for the MS.
In a co-BCCH cell, the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell share one BCCH TRX, thus
reducing the number of BCCH TRXs and minimizing the interference between BCCH TRXs.
Description
The co-BCCH cell is based on the concentric cell. The TRXs on the GSM900 or GSM850 are
configured in the underlaid subcell to extend cell coverage; the TRXs on the DCS1800 or
PCS1900 are configured in the overlaid subcell to absorb traffic.
Before the channel assignment, the system determines the bands supported by the MS. If the
MS supports the bands in the underlaid and overlaid subcells, the channel assignment strategy
of the concentric cell is applied. Otherwise, only the channel in the underlaid subcell can be
assigned to the MS.
The system assigns channels on different bands to the MS based on the receive level, receive
quality, and TA value. The underlaid subcell is used for extending cell coverage and the
overlaid subcell is used for absorbing traffic. Thus, the cell coverage is maximized and the
capacity balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell is maintained.
In a co-BCCH cell, the TRXs on different bands belong to one cell, and one BCCH is shared
by both the underlaid subcell and overlaid subcell. Compared with the common dual-band
network, one BCCH is saved and used as a TCH, and thus the system capacity is enhanced. In
addition, the TCHs on the two bands are integrated in a cell so that the channels can be
shared.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Support for different frequency hopping (FH) type used by TRXs in overlaid/underlaid
subcells: The FH type is not a cell-level parameter. In a cell, different TRXs may use different
FH types. Generally, the baseband FH is applied to the underlaid subcell because of
insufficient frequencies; whereas the RF FH is applied to the overlaid subcell because of
sufficient frequencies. This helps obtain a high FH gain.
Dependency
None
None

Page 234 of 341
Public
7.2.3 GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-band Network

Availability
Summary
The enhanced dual-band network is an improvement on the existing dual-band network. In the
enhanced dual-band network, two co-sited cells with different coverage areas logically form a
cell group. One is an overlaid subcell, and the other is an underlaid subcell. The enhanced
dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two
cells in a cell group.
Benefits
The enhanced dual-band network enables a network to support multiple frequency bands and
enables operators to expand frequency bands.
If the KPIs are acceptable, the resource sharing of the overlaid and underlaid subcells expands
the system capacity.
This feature supports the tight frequency reuse pattern. The tight frequency reuse pattern is
applied to the overlaid subcell and the loose frequency reuse pattern is applied to the
underlaid subcell.
Description
Based on the multi-band network, the enhanced dual-band network enhances the channel
sharing of the overlaid and underlaid subcells.
The enhanced dual-band network enables two co-sited cells with different coverage areas to
form a cell group logically. The two cells are configured with the BCCH and SDCCH. One is
an overlaid subcell, and the other is an underlaid subcell. The enhanced dual-band network
algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two cells in a cell group.
The overlaid and underlaid subcells can obtain the information about each other, such as
signal level, channel, and load. Therefore, the KPIs such as the handover success rate and
assignment success rate can be kept at proper values when the channels in the overlaid and
underlaid subcells are shared.
The two cells cannot be assigned to two different operators.
Tight frequency reuse

In terms of functions, tight frequency reuse is similar to the concentric cell. In a cell
group of an enhanced dual-band network, loose frequency reuse can be applied to the
underlaid subcell, and tight frequency reuse is applied to the overlaid subcell. If an MS
accesses the network from the overlaid subcell and the load in the underlaid subcell is
low, the channel assignment is preferably performed in the underlaid subcell to minimize
the interference to the entire network. If an MS accesses the network from the underlaid
subcell and the load in the underlaid subcell is high, the channel assignment is preferably
performed in the overlaid subcell to achieve the traffic balance in the cell group. In
addition, the enhanced dual-band network supports dynamic distribution of the MSs that
are having calls according to the load and coverage.

Page 235 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
7.2.4 GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO

Availability
Summary
When this feature is enabled, the channels with less interference are preferentially selected
during channel assignment. If there is interference in the selected channel, the MAIO with the
minimum interference is assigned to the channel.
Benefits
Reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system.
Achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and thus improves the system capacity.
Description
Under the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely to
occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency
reuse is adopted. For example, when some frequencies in the MA list are adjacent,
adjacent-channel interference occurs if the channels with the same timeslot number but on
different TRXs use adjacent MAIOs and are occupied at the same time.
When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the
current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the
channel. Thus, the call has the minimum interference from the perspective of the entire
network. Huawei BSS equipment records the interference on each timeslot and updates the
record during each channel activation or channel release.

Page 236 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping)
GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
7.2.5 GBFD-115801 ICC

Availability
Summary
When combining the signals from multiple antennas, the interference counteract combine
(ICC) makes use of interference correlation of different antennas to eliminate some
interference.
Benefits
Improves the voice quality and data throughput in the scenarios with severe interference,
for example, where tight frequency reuse is applied, thus improving user experience.
Improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and increases the system capacity.
Description
ICC is a technology that suppresses the interference by combining signals of multiple
antennas. Generally, the interference on different antennas is generated by the same
interference source. Therefore, the interfering signals received by different antennas have a
certain correlation. ICC uses this correlation when combing signals to eliminate some

Page 237 of 341
Public
interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and
increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.
ICC can suppress the interference within the GSM system and from other systems only if the
interference on different antennas has a correlation.
Huawei BSS supports dual-antenna ICC and four-antenna ICC.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network
GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization
None
7.2.6 GBFD-115821 EICC

Availability
Summary
The interference on the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and
temporal correlation: co-channel interference (CCI) and inter-symbol interference (ISI). After
considering the correlation of these two types of interference, EICC combines the signals
received by multiple antennas to provide better signal quality on the uplink.
Benefits
The EICC feature improves the uplink signal quality to meet the requirements for radio
communications and to improve the uplink performance in scenarios with wide
coverage.
With the uplink anti-interference capability improved, tight frequency reuse can be
achieved and thus the system capacity is increased.

Page 238 of 341
Public
Description
Similar to ICC, EICC mainly applies to the network where the tight frequency reuse pattern is
adopted and the traffic volume is heavy.
The interference on the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and
temporal correlation: CCI and ISI. Considering the spatial correlation and temporal
correlation of the interference, ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently.
EICC, however, considers the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the
multidimensional combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the
maximum signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC obtains the optimized uplink
signals.
EICC requires the matrix of interference, which is calculated on the basis of the training
sequence of wanted signals. For each RX signal, the network estimates a channel model based
on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the wanted signal, and subtracts the
wanted signal from the RX signal to obtain the interfering signal. The network then estimates
the matrix of each interfering signal and analyzes the statistical dependency of these
interfering signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some interference is counteracted
during the combination of RX signals to maximize the combination gain.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network
GBFD-510401 BTS GPS SynchronizationThis feature and the following feature are
mutually exclusive:
None
7.2.7 GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband

hopping)
Availability

Page 239 of 341
Public
Summary
With this feature, wanted signals are transmitted by switching a carrier among many
frequencies according to the specified sequences. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping
and baseband hopping.
Benefits
This feature reduces the co-channel and adjacent-channel interference and thus improves
the voice quality of the network.
The tight frequency reuse pattern can be adopted to increase the system capacity.
This feature improves the information security.
Description
With this feature, a traffic carrier frequency hops along the time according to the specified
sequence. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband hopping in terms of
implementation of the TRX. The frequency hopping enables operators to adopt the tight
frequency reuse pattern, thus increasing the system capacity while maintaining the good voice
quality. The frequency hopping feature minimizes the interference on a channel from the same
interference source. Thus, it is widely used in the communications system because it helps
improve the anti-attenuation capability, anti-interference capability, and information security.
In RF hopping, the frequencies for both transmitter and receiver of the TRX participate in
frequency hopping. The number of frequencies participating in the FH can exceed the number
of TRXs in the cell. RF hopping is implemented through the real-time switchover between
two frequency synthesizers. RF hopping has the following advantages:
RF hopping lowers the speed requirements on the frequency synthesizer.
When there is no FH, the two frequency synthesizers work in backup mode, thus
enhancing the system reliability.
RF hopping avoids the impact of the fast frequency conversion on the signal quality, and
thus realizes the FH of all frequencies on the supported frequency band.
In baseband hopping, each transmitter works on a fixed frequency, and the TX does not
participate in FH. The TX frequency hopping is achieved though the switching of baseband
signals. The RX of the TRX, however, must participate in FH. Therefore, the number of
frequencies participating in FH in a cell must be less than or equal to the number of TRXs
assigned for the cell. When a TRX is faulty, the system enables the baseband FH TRX
cooperation to ensure that the voice quality in the cell is not affected by the faulty TRX.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
Optimization of Baseband FH TRX cooperation:
In the baseband FH cell, if the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, just remove the faulty
TRX from baseband FH group and continue FH with the good running TRX. Meanwhile the
same mechanism will take effect when main BCCH TRX cooperation happen, it will still
remain hopping with the baseband TRX.
GBSS12.0

Page 240 of 341
Public
Support RF hopping and baseband hopping at the same time in one cell
Dependency
None
Base band hopping is mutually exclusive with the following features:
GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass
GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)
None
7.2.8 GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

Availability
Summary
With this feature, non-BCCH timeslots participate in the baseband hopping, thus improving
the radio quality of non-BCCH timeslots and the cell performance.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the radio quality of non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH carrier.
Description
In Huawei BSS, the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX can participate in baseband
hopping in the cell. In this way, the baseband hopping performance is improved because the
number of frequencies participating in FH increases, and the performance of non-BCCH
timeslots on the BCCH TRX is improved because they also participate in the FH.
For the FH that the BCCH carrier participates in, the BCCH timeslot is not involved, but the
rest timeslots can participate in the baseband hopping.
According to the GSM specifications, the BCCH must be carried on a fixed frequency to
ensure the cell selection, cell reselection, and handover measurement. Therefore, the BCCH
carrier cannot participate in the RF hopping.

Page 241 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Baseband hopping in GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
RF hopping in GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
None
7.2.9 GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping

Availability
Summary
Similar to the baseband frequency hopping, the antenna frequency hopping enables the data of
all the timeslots on a specific carrier to be transmitted in turn on the antennas of other TRXs
in the cell. In this way, the space diversity is increased and the quality of the TRX data
received by the MS is improved, and thus the network performance is improved.
Benefits
Increases the space diversity and improves the quality of BCCH TRX data received by
the MS, thus improving the network performance and reducing the network interference.
Increases the network capacity. Compared with the non-FH or FH with a few frequencies,
the antenna frequency hopping can increase the radio network capacity by up to 30% and
the network diversity gain by up to 3 dB.
Description
all carriers to be transmitted in turn on the antennas of other TRXs in the cell.

Page 242 of 341
Public
This feature applies to the BCCH on the BCCH TRX. The BCCH must be transmitted on the
same frequency. Therefore, the BCCH cannot hop by baseband hopping or RF hopping. In a
GSM cell, however, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the BCCH TRX. These broadcast messages are important for the
MS in idle mode to search for a network and for the MS in dedicated mode to measure the
neighboring cell. If the MS is located in a place where it is difficult to receive the messages
from the BCCH TRX or if the antenna for the BCCH TRX is damaged, then the MS cannot
properly receive the broadcast control messages from the BCCH TRX.
all timeslots on the BCCH TRX to be transmitted in turn on antennas of other TRXs. This
increases the space diversity of the BCCH signals and improves the quality of the data
received by the MS from the BCCH TRX, thus improving the network performance.
For example:
If a cell is configured with three TRXs and each TRX connects to one antenna with the
antenna frequency hopping enabled, the data of TRX 0 may be transmitted on antenna 1 at
this instant and on antenna 0 at the next instant, and then on antenna 2 at the third instant. In
this way, the space diversity is realized and thus the receiver performance of the MS is
improved.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shut down(in GBS9.0 and former version;
DRRU/DRFU support GBFD-111602 from GBSS12.0 )
GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage
GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass
GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)
The BTS must support this feature, and at least two antennas are required in a cell to enable
antenna frequency hopping.

Page 243 of 341
Public
7.2.10 GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

Availability
Summary
This feature allows the operator to adopt the tight frequency reuse pattern for the frequencies
of the BCCH carriers.
Benefits
The number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH carriers reduces, thus improving the
frequency usage. In addition, the number of frequencies available for the TCHs and the
number of frequencies participating in FH on the TCH increase, thus increasing the
system capacity and reducing the costs of adding sites and cells.
The TCHs on BCCH carriers are assigned to only the MSs near the BTS, thus improving
the voice quality because of less uplink interference.
Description
Each cell is configured with a BCCH carrier, and timeslot 0 on the BCCH carrier is used to
carry the BCH and CCCH. This timeslot continually sends messages to all the MSs camping
on the cell. The messages include the synchronization message, system information, paging
message, and assignment message, which are directly related to cell selection, cell reselection,
call initiation, and paging response. Therefore, the BCCH becomes the most important
channel in GSM communications.
Generally, the 4x3 pattern is adopted for the BCCH frequencies. This can ensure a high
carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) between BCCH carriers. In this pattern, however, the
BCCH carriers occupy 12 frequencies. In a network with tight frequency reuse and limited
frequency resources, if the 3x3 pattern is used for the BCCH frequencies, the interference to
the TCH on the BCCH carrier increases and the performance degrades to an unacceptable
level.
This feature enables the BCCH frequencies to adopt the tight frequency reuse pattern. In this
way, in the network with limited frequency resources, the number of frequencies occupied by
the BCCH carriers decreases and the number of frequencies available for the TCHs increases,
thus increasing the system capacity without adding hardware and reducing the costs of adding
sites.
This feature regards a cell as two logical layers: TCH layer on BCCH carriers and FH layer
on other carriers.
The FH layer serves the entire system and covers the entire network, including the MSs at the
boarder of a cell. The TCH layer on the BCCH carrier, however, provides limited coverage to
ensure the performance of call access. The interference in the area near the BTS is smaller
than that in the area far from the BTS and at the edge of the cell. Therefore, the TCH layer on
the BCCH carrier provides the coverage only for the MSs near the BTS. During the initial
access and channel assignment triggered by handover (non-BCCH tight frequency
multiplexing), the system preferentially assigns TCHs on the non-BCCH carriers to ensure the
access performance. If a call is assigned a TCH on a non-BCCH carrier in the cell, the BCCH

Page 244 of 341
Public
Dense Frequency Multiplexing feature has less impact on the call if the MS is near the BTS.
The system then hands over the call to a TCH on the BCCH carrier and reserves the channels
on the non-BCCH carrier to ensure the access performance of other calls.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell
GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC
None
7.2.11 GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel

Allocation)
Availability
Summary
When the network accesses a new call, the interference between the established calls and the
new call is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the
minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the network
and thus enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. This increases the network capacity while
maintaining the voice quality in the entire network.
Benefits
Effectively improves the frequency usage and thus improves the network capacity.
Reduces the overall interference and thus improves the network performance.
Improves the voice quality of calls.

Page 245 of 341
Public
Description
In the GSM network, the loose frequency reuse provides better network performance, higher
network KPIs, and excellent voice quality, but reduces the network capacity compared with
the tight frequency reuse. The tight frequency reuse pattern can increase the network capacity,
but also increases the probability that the TRXs use the same frequency or adjacent
frequencies. This results in more co-channel or adjacent-channel interference, thus degrading
the network performance.
Based on the timeslot synchronization on the Um interface, the IBCA feature considers only
the channel-level interference. During the channel assignment, the IBCA considers the
interference strength of all idle channels and then preferentially assigns the channel with the
minimum interference. The IBCA feature involves the following functions:
Calculation of the interference to the new call caused by the established calls
The IBCA must be used together with frequency hopping. The idle channels with
different MAIOs transmit signals on the Um interface with different frequencies, and
thus the interference that the idle channels experience from the established calls varies.
The IBCA calculates the interference strength on each idle channel when different
MAIOs are applied.
Calculation of interference to the established calls caused by the new call

The established calls cause interference to the new call. Similarly, the new call causes
interference to the established calls once it accesses the network. The IBCA estimates the
CIR of the new call to the established calls.
Considering the preceding two types of interference, the IBCA-enabled network assigns the
channel and MAIO with the minimum interference to the new call.
The IBCA feature consists of intra-BSC IBCA and inter-BSC IBCA. That is, the
IBCA-enabled cells may belong to one BSC or multiple BSCs.
The IBCA feature improves the frequency usage and thus effectively increases the network
capacity. In addition, the IBCA-enabled network considers the interference to the new call
caused by the established calls, thus improving the voice quality of calls.
The network KPIs may be affected after the IBCA is applied. For example, the call drop rate
increases or the handover success rate decreases. Operators need to purchase Huawei's
professional services to minimize the impact of introducing IBCA on network KPIs.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0
IBCA Enhancement:
The limitation on the frequency hopping (FH) in an IBCA-enabled cell is lifted. The
limitation was that an IBCA-enabled cell can be configured with a maximum of three MA
groups and each MA group be configured with a maximum of 12 frequencies. After this
enhanced feature is enabled, the numbers of MA groups and frequencies are restricted only by
the BSC memory for cell information. This feature is suitable for sites with a large number of
frequencies.
Dependency

Page 246 of 341
Public
Embedded PCU should be used. Service processing boards should be added for processing
the IBCA-related services. The IP interface board should be added for the inter-BSC IBCA.
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network or GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP
(When IBCA of Inter-BSC is supported)

GBFD-114151 DTM
GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment (Very early assignment)
GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP (When using Soft-Synchronized Network)Dependency on other
NEs
None
7.2.12 GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network

Availability
Summary
When Soft-Synchronized Network feature is enabled, all the BTSs under a BSC synchronize
with each other by adjusting the frame number, timeslot number, and bit offset in the timeslot
to be the same through software. In a synchronous network, dynamic frequency allocation and
dynamic channel assignment can be adopted to minimize inter-cell co-channel and
adjacent-channel collision. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the
network capacity.
Benefits

Page 247 of 341
Public
This feature synchronizes all the BTSs under a BSC through software without additional
hardware devices.
After the BTSs are synchronized, the IBCA feature can be implemented. The IBCA
enabled in the synchronous network can improve the network capacity by 20% to 50%.
After the BTSs are synchronized, the performance of technologies such as ICC and
SAIC can be greatly improved. The ICC enabled in the synchronous network can
improve the network performance by about 5.5 dB compared with the performance in
the asynchronous network, and the SAIC enabled in the synchronous network can
increase the network capacity by about 40%.
This feature improves the KPIs such as MOS, paging success rate, handover success rate,
call drop rate, and traffic volume.
This feature realizes the software synchronization with the reference BTS, thus enabling
the flexible networking and reducing the workload of synchronization.
Description
Most of the existing networks work in asynchronous mode. That is, all BTSs are not
synchronized, and each BTS adopts a different frame number, timeslot number, and offset.
There are two network synchronization modes: hardware synchronization and software
synchronization.
In hardware synchronization mode, each BTS is equipped with a GPS device to realize
the network synchronization through the satellite. This requires expensive hardware
devices.
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature realizes the synchronization through software.

This feature enables all the BTSs under a BSC to synchronize with each other by
adjusting the frame number, timeslot, and bit offset to be the same through software.
In the asynchronous network, the system cannot estimate the adjacent-channel interference
but only can reduce the interference by using the functions such as loose frequency reuse and
frequency hopping.
In the synchronous network, the system estimates the co-channel and adjacent-channel
interference in any inter-cell overlapping area and minimizes inter-cell co-channel and
adjacent-channel collision by adopting the dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic
channel allocation. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network
capacity.
In the synchronous network, the ICC and SAIC achieves the optimal performance. When
wanted signals are synchronized with interfering signals in time, the interfering signals are the
same in the entire burst. The interference estimated on the basis of the training sequence can
effectively counteract the interference during the burst. In this case, the ICC and SAIC
provide the optimal performance.
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature needs to be used together with the GBFD-117002
IBCA feature to avoid the inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel interference. This
greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity.
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature can be deployed at TDM network (including Abis IP
over E1/T1), while the IP network is not.
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature can only be used for Abis interface using TDM
transmission network (including Abis IP over E1/T1), can not apply Abis interface using
Ethernet networking scene.

Page 248 of 341
Public
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature is applicable to the scenario where the end-to-end
communication between the BSC and BTS is based on TDM, such as Abis TDM over
E1/T1/STM-1 and Abis IP over E1/T1/STM-1. When the Ethernet network is used between
the BSC and BTS, that is, Abis IP over FE / GE, the Soft-Synchronized Network feature is not
supported.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Inter-BSC soft-synchronized network: software synchronization of BTSs under multiple
BSCs
Multiple-reference soft-synchronized network: In the system, some BTSs are synchronized
through hardware and others are synchronized through software to enable the flexible
networking. When the network replanning and upgrade are required, the enhanced feature
fully utilizes the existing resources to realize synchronization, thus reducing the workload of
synchronization and saving the costs.
Dependency
IP interface is needed to support Inter BSC Soft-Synchronized Network.
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP
In the network of using GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network or GPS for
synchronization, it is recommended working with the following features:
GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)
GBFD-115801 ICC
GBFD-115821 EICC
None

Page 249 of 341
Public
7.2.13 GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization

Availability
Summary
The BTS supports the GPS synchronization through a satellite.
Benefits
The frame synchronization on the Um interface in the entire network by using the GPS
provides high synchronization precision and easy implementation.
When the network works in synchronous mode, the features such as ICC and IBCA can
be used to increase the network capacity by more than 40%.
This feature improves the KPIs such as mean opinion score (MOS), paging success rate,
handover success rate, call drop rate, and traffic volume.
Description
In the existing GSM system, the BTSs work in asynchronous mode, resulting in timeslot
overlapping. In the asynchronous network with the tight frequency reuse pattern, the
overlapping of timeslots causes unnecessary and unpredictable interference because the
frequency reuse distance between two cells using the same frequency is relatively short. The
interference (that is, channel quality) rather than the number of channels restricts the network
performance. Therefore, the BTSs in the entire network synchronize with each other based on
the reference clock signals provided by the GPS satellite.
The GPS clock system of the BTS receives the related information sent by the GPS satellite
and then obtains the GPS absolute time and precise 1PPS pulse signals. The BTS clock circuit
traces the 1PPS pulse signals to obtain the reference clock and then obtains various clock
signals based on the reference clock. Each BTS in the network adjusts the frame number
based on the absolute frame number calculated from the GPS absolute time received by the
BTS software.
Enhancement
Each BTS is equipped with a GPS for hardware synchronization of the entire network, which
increases the costs. Therefore, the Soft-Synchronized Network feature, which is an optional
feature, is introduced to GBSS8.0 to realize the frame synchronization on the Um interface
through software. For details, see the GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network feature.
Dependency
None

Page 250 of 341
Public

None
None
7.3 High Speed Moblility

7.3.1 GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
Availability
Summary
The automatic frequency correction (AFC) feature uses a special balancing algorithm to
estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the
GMSK-coded signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC estimates the
frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in
real time. Then, the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of
the BTS.
Benefits
This feature improves the decoding performance of the physical link in the uplink in the fast
moving condition, thus ensuring the physical transmission performance and reliable
connections between the fast-moving MS and the BTS. In addition, this feature enables the
system to support a telecommunication environment with a speed higher than 500 km/h,
which serves as the basis of the high-speed frequency offset handover algorithm.
Description
AFC is a BTS frequency correction algorithm designed for fast-moving MSs. This algorithm
ensures reliable radio links and continuous services with good voice quality when the MS
moves at a speed of 500 km/h.
According to Doppler frequency shift principle, the frequency of the signals sent by the
fast-moving MS shifts. The frequency shift information is related to the moving speed and
direction of the MS relative to the BTS. The BTS digital signal processor uses a special
balancing algorithm to estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the
frequency of the GMSK-coded signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC
estimates the frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard
frequency in real time. Then, the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working
frequency of the BTS. This improves the decoding performance of the physical link in the
uplink in the fast moving condition, thus ensuring the physical transmission performance and
reliable connections between the fast-moving MS and the BTS.
The performance of AFC depends on the vertical distance between the BTS and the railway.
The shorter the vertical distance is, the faster the change of the frequency offset is when the

Page 251 of 341
Public
train approaches the BTS. Therefore, the AFC loop cannot keep pace with the change of
frequency offset, leading to a great residual frequency offset.
Simulation results show that the frequency offset smaller than 100 Hz has little impact on the
demodulation performance. Therefore, when the TRX is on the GSM900 band and the speed
of the train is 600 km/h, only the vertical distance of more than 100 m is supported if the loop
bandwidth is 2 Hz. In the case of a lower demand for the voice quality, the vertical distance
between the BTS and the railway can be shorter.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0
Common AFC corrects only uplink frequencies so that the BTS can correctly demodulate
uplink signals. The downlink signals from the BTS to the MS also encounter Doppler
frequency shift. Most MSs, however, do not have the frequency correction function.
The downlink AFC function enables the BTS to pre-compensate downlink signals for
frequency offset based on the estimated uplink frequency offset so that the frequency offset of
the downlink signals received by the MS is zero.
Dependency
None
GBFD-115821 EICC
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
7.3.2 GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover

Availability
Summary
This feature enables better cell handover in a short period of time.

Page 252 of 341
Public
Benefits
Generally, the chain cell algorithm is not used because of the special characteristics of the
railway and highway users. This may lead to slow handover or call drops during handover.
With this feature, the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition is increased and thus
the subscriber satisfaction is increased.
Description
In a fast-moving train, it takes a short time for an MS to move across a cell. Therefore, a
handover must be performed quickly. To reduce the handover failure rate, a handover must be
quickly initiated when required. If the handover fails (for example, when the radio interface
suddenly incurs interference), a second handover must be quickly initiated.
The fast PBGT handover algorithm enables better cell handover in a short period of time.
Compared with the existing PBGT handover algorithm, the fast PBGT handover algorithm
has the following advantages:
Handing over an MS to a proper target cell by predicting the moving direction of the MS
Accelerating the handover decision to improve the handover rate
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover
GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover or GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover
None
7.3.3 GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the fast-moving MS to be preferentially handed over to the chain
neighboring cell.

Page 253 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature increases the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition and thus
increases the subscriber satisfaction.
Description
By predicting the moving direction of a fast-moving MS, this feature enables the fast-moving
MS to be handed over between two chain neighboring cells. Thus, the handover success rate
is increased and the network quality is improved. Chain neighboring cells ensure reliable
handovers between cells.
Chain neighboring cells are formed on the basis of the linear coverage characteristic of
the fast-moving environment such as the railway.
A handover to a chain neighboring cell is preferred. In addition, handover to the moving

direction of the user should be guaranteed.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
7.3.4 GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the subsites in different physical sites to be set to a logical cell, which is
also called a cascading cell. A subsite refers to a certain area physically covered by multiple
RRU/RFUs that belong to the same BBU. In the scenarios such as railway, tunnel, or indoor
coverage, a cascading cell can reduce handovers, improve the coverage efficiency, and
enhance the user experience.
Benefits

Page 254 of 341
Public
This feature reduces handovers between cells and increases the handover success rate.
A cascading cell increases the effective coverage distance of each subsite and improves
the coverage efficiency of the entire cell because few handover areas are required
between different subsites.
Description
Cell cascading means that different subsites in the same BBU physically belong to different
sites but logically belong to the same cell. The principle is shown in the following figure.
Cascading cells are carried in multiple subsites. These subsites have the same cell parameters
such as physical configurations, the number of TRXs, and frequencies. One cascading cell has
only one primary subsite responsible for cell management and service control. Other subsites
are secondary subsites. Under the control of the primary subsite, these secondary subsites
implement cell service functions such as the selection of available TRXs and the activation of
channels.
During the initial access of an MS, all the subsites calculate the uplink signal noise ratio (SNR)
of the MS respectively and report the result to the primary subsite. Then the primary subsite
selects the subsite with the optimal SNR as the serving subsite.
All the subsites continuously calculate the uplink SNR of the MS and then report the SNR to
the primary subsite. When the SNR reported by an adjacent subsite is better than the SNR
reported by the serving subsite, the handover between subsites is triggered. When the MS is
handed over between subsites, the new subsite is connected and then the old subsite is
disconnected without the interruption of services. In this manner, seamless handover is
implemented and the QoS is guaranteed.
Enhancement
None

Page 255 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
GBFD-118201Soft-Synchronized Network
GBFD-113703Antenna Frequency Hopping
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation
Cannot be used with the following features in GBSS12.0 and its former version:
None
7.4 Intra-System Mobility Management

7.4.1 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover
Availability
Summary
HUAWEI II handover algorithm is optimized from HUAWEI I handover algorithm. HUAWEI
II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions into account, thus obtaining
more accurate results of handover decisions.
Benefits
This feature improves the accuracy of the handover decision and increases the handover
success rate.
This feature enhances the network quality and improves the network KPIs.

Page 256 of 341
Public
Description
HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes account all results of handover decisions and candidate
cell list, and then generates the handover execution policy.
HUAWEI II handover algorithm is categorized into three handover algorithms: emergency
handover (directed retry, frequency offset handover, bad quality handover, TA handover, and
edge handover), intra-cell handover (interference handover, BCCH tight frequency
multiplexing in concentric cell, AMR handover), inter-cell handover (better cell handover,
enhanced dual band network handover, fast-moving handover, and GSM-to-3G inter-RAT
handover). All handover decisions are traversed in the handover decision phase. Unlike
common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm is not performed immediately
if the triggering condition of a handover is met during the traverse. But only the candidate
target cell lists with handover decision type are generated independently. After all handover
decisions are traversed, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes the intersection from the
candidate target cell lists corresponding to the handovers that meet the triggering condition,
and then generates the final target cell list for the handover. Compared with common
handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions
into account, thus obtaining more accurate results of handover decisions.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report or GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature:
GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I HandoverDependency on other NEs
None
7.4.2 GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment

Availability

Page 257 of 341
Public
Summary
On receiving the Error Indication message from the BTS during the handover process, the
BSC does not regard it as a call drop directly and attempts to re-establish a call on the old
channel.
Benefits
Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits:
Reduces the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction.
Improves network KPIs.
Description
In the handover process, the BSC sends the Handover Command message to the MS. Then, if
the BSC does not receive any response from the MS but receives an Error Indication message
from the BTS, the BSC regards it as a call drop. After handover re-establishment is applied,
the BSC indicates that the BTS can re-establish a call on the old link over the Um interface
after the BSC receives an Error Indication message on the old link. If the call re-establishment
is successful, the MS makes calls on the old channel and no call drop occurs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
This feature should be supported by the BTS.
7.4.3 GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)

Availability
Summary
The EMR is a new downlink measurement report introduced in R99. Compared with the
traditional MR, the EMR has more measurement-related information, such as the bit error
probability (BEP) and frame erase ratio (FER). This facilitates the performance improvement
of the power control algorithm and the handover algorithm.

Page 258 of 341
Public
Benefits
Improves the capability of monitoring the voice quality, and the performance of the
power control algorithm and the handover algorithm.
Provides better performance for GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA interoperability by

supporting up to 15 neighboring 3G cells.
Description
The EMR is a new downlink measurement report introduced in R99. It is reported to the
network by the MS. Compared with the MR, the EMR has the following advantages:
1. The EMR uses an optimized scheme of encoding the neighboring cell information and
reports more neighboring cells than the MR. The MR provides up to six GSM neighboring
cells whereas the EMR provides up to 15 GSM/WCDMA/TD_SCDMA neighboring cells.
Thus, the EMR provides better performance for the GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA
interoperability and ensures the service continuity.
2. The EMR is added with the BEP, which is used to identify the channel quality. BEP is
estimated one burst after another. It reflects the current C/I, delay of signals, and velocity of
the MS. In addition, BEP adopts the 5-bit encoding scheme whereas RXQUAL adopts the
3-bit encoding scheme. Thus, compared with RXQUAL, BEP has higher precision, especially
when the radio signal quality is poor.
3. The EMR is added with the number of speech frames that are correctly received, which is
used to calculate FER. In comparison with RXQUAL that measures the radio signal, the
measurement effect of EFR is better because it measures the encoding/decoding performance
of the speech signal.
RXQUAL should be replaced with BEP and FER for the power control algorithm and the
handover algorithm that use RXQUAL to evaluate radio signal quality because BEP and FER
can be used to improve the performance of those algorithms.
According to 3GPP TS 44018, through the MI/2QUATER system information, the network
can determine whether an MS should report the measurement information about the serving
cell and neighboring cells through MR or EMR.
This feature should be supported by MS. If EMR enabled, and MS cannot report accurately
measurement items of EMR, like BEP and FER, the HO success rate may be dropped.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 259 of 341
Public

GBFD-115830 VAMOS Dependency on other NEs
7.4.4 GBFD-117101 BTS Power Lift for Handover

Availability
Summary
Before sending the handover command to the MS, the BSC adjusts the transmit power of the
BTS to the maximum value to prevent call drops due to rapid level drop.
Benefits
Reduces call drops, increases handover success rate, and optimizes KPIs.
Improves voice quality, prolongs call duration, and increases the operators' revenue.
Description
During the call, if the receive level drops rapidly, the handover is triggered to avoid call drops.
The power control algorithm, however, may fail to adjust the MS and BTS power in time.
Thus, the MS fails to receive the handover command, which then causes call drops.
Using the BTS power lift for handover feature, the BSC can adjust the transmit power of the
BTS to the maximum value before sending the handover command to the MS to prevent call
drops due to rapid level drop.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None

Page 260 of 341
Public
7.5 GSM & WCDMA Interoperability

7.5.1 GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
Availability
Summary
The BSS system supports the handover and reselection of MSs between the GSM network
and the WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature enables the MS to roam and be handed over from the WCDMA network to the
GSM network. This can solve the problem of insufficient coverage in the early stage of the
WCDMA network development. With this feature, the GSM network can smoothly evolve to
the WCDMA network, thus saving the operator's investment.
Description
GSM/WCDMA interoperability refers to the handover and roaming of dual-mode MSs
between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. Huawei BSS supports the handover
and roaming of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. The
handover and roaming include the following situations:
In idle mode, an MS roams from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.
In idle mode, an MS roams from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.
In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.
In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.
This feature consists of the following functions:
Roaming in idle mode

Through PLMN reselection, an MS can be handed over from the GSM network to the
WCDMA network, or from the WCDMA network to the GSM network. The selection of
the GSM network or the WCDMA network is determined by the network operator.
Usually the WCDMA MSs preferentially select the WCDMA network. The PLMN
reselection can be scheduled on the MS. The reselection time is determined by the
operator.
To inform the MS of the information on the WCDMA neighboring cell, the GBSS
system needs to add the description of the WCDMA neighboring cell to the system
information. The system information 3 is modified to indicate whether the system
information 2 quarter exists. The system information 2 quarter includes information
about cell reselection, measurement, and WCDMA neighboring cell.
Through system reselection, a WCDMA MS can be handed over to a GSM neighboring
cell when the signal in the WCDMA network is weak.
CS domain handover in busy mode

Page 261 of 341
Public
The handover from the WCDMA system to the GSM system is determined by the
WCDMA network. When receiving the handover request from the MSC, the BSS works
with the MSC to implement the handover based on the resource situation.
Then, the MS in busy mode in the GSM cell measures the WCDMA neighboring cell
based on the neighboring cell information in the system information and submits the
measurement report to the BSC. The BSC then makes decisions according to the
information in the measurement report and initiates inter-RAT handover when the
requirements for the WCDMA cell handover are met.
The cell reselection of the network-controlled MS from the GPRS/EDGE system to the
WCDMA system is implemented by using the inter-RAT NC2 feature. The inter-RAT
NACC feature can speed up the cell reselection from the WCDMA system to the
GPRS/EDGE system.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
The MS, MSC, SGSN, HLR, and the WCDMA-related NEs must support this feature.
7.5.2 GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

Availability
Summary
In a GSM-WCDMA co-sited network, the operator can classify services into different types
according to the operation policies. Then, the operator determines whether a service
preferentially uses the radio resources of the GSM system or the WCDMA system. During
call access or the handover, the BSC works with the MSC to perform the handover from the
GSM system to the WCDMA system.
Benefits
With this feature, the advantages of the GSM system and the WCDMA system are fully
utilized and thus the service quality is improved and the user experience is enhanced. In

Page 262 of 341
Public
addition, the operators' investment is saved and the utilization of the network resources is
maximized.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the GSM-WCDMA co-sited network is widely
in use. The service quality on the two radio access systems is different. Therefore, it is
necessary to immediately use different system resources for different services. According to
the service hierarchy principle, different services can be preferentially handed over to
different systems. For example, the CS services are preferentially handed over to the GSM
system whereas the PS services are preferentially retained in the WCDMA system.
In the assignment procedure, the MSC sends the service handover information to the BSC
through the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message. If the service handover information
indicates that the call should be preferentially processed in the UTRAN, the directed retry
procedure is initiated to hand over the call to the WCDMA system.
The HANDOVER REQUEST message received by the BSC may also carry the service
handover information and the BSC uses this information for the subsequent handover
decision.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
The MS, MSC, SGSN, HLR, and WCDMA-related NEs must support this feature.
7.5.3 GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

Availability
Summary
When the cell load in the GSM system is heavy, the BSC can initiate the handover from the
GSM system to the WCDMA system based on the load of the GSM system and the WCDMA
system to balance the overall load in the network, thus maximizing the utilization of the
network resources.

Page 263 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature balances the load of the WCDMA system and the GSM system, thus improving
the service quality and the usage of the network resources.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the GSM-WCDMA co-sited network is widely
in use. Therefore, the usage of the resources in the two radio access systems needs to be
maximized. When the load of one radio access system is heavy whereas the load of the other
radio access system with the same coverage is light, the load-based inter-RAT handover can
be initiated to balance the load of the two systems if the services of the current user can be
supported by the other system.
The load information about the WCDMA system is transparently transmitted to the BSC
through the MSC. Then the BSC determines whether to initiate the inter-RAT handover based
on the load information about the WCDMA system and the load information about the BSC.
Meanwhile, the load information about the BSC is carried in the handover request message
for the reference of the target system during the inter-RAT handover decision.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The MS, MSC, SGSN, HLR, and WCDMA-related NEs must support this feature.
7.5.4 GBFD-114323 GSM/WCDMA Cell Reselection Based on MS

State
Availability
Summary
This feature is designed to optimize cell reselection from the GSM network to the 3G network
(WCDMA network or TD-SCDMA network). It enables dual-mode MSs in the idle state or in

Page 264 of 341
Public
the packet transfer state to adopt different reselection policies to access the GSM network or
3G network as required.
Benefits
Helps the operator to determine whether to select the GSM or 3G network according to
the network planning requirements when the MS is in the idle state or in the packet
transfer state.
Reduces the duration of service interruption caused by frequent cell reselection.
Description
During the 3G network construction, operators need to select a proper network planning
strategy for the MSs to select the GSM network or the 3G network based on the coverage of
the 3G network and the compatibility of dual-mode MSs with the 3G network. This feature
provides different cell reselection strategies based on the MS state.
For example, in the early stage of the 3G network construction, operators expect that the 3G
network can share some traffic of the GSM network. The data transmission of the MS in
packet transfer mode, however, may be interrupted after cell reselection because the coverage
of the 3G network is imperfect or the compatibility between the MS and 3G network is poor.
In such a case, the KPIs are deteriorated. In addition, the current 3GPP protocols do not
support the NACC feature between the GERAN and the UTRAN. Thus, the services of the
MS in packet transfer state are inevitably interrupted during the inter-RAT cell reselection and
thus the quality of the PS services is deteriorated. With this feature, operators allow the MS in
idle mode to search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_I to a specific
value between 0 and 14. Similarly, operators can prohibit the MS in packet transfer mode to
search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_P to 15. In this manner,
operators can control the MS's access to the GSM network or the 3G network according to the
MS state.
This feature and the Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) feature are mutually
exclusive. With the NC2 feature, the MS in packet transfer state can select a neighboring 3G
cell through the BSC's control of the inter-RAT cell reselection. With this feature, however,
the MS in packet transfer state can be prohibited from selecting a neighboring 3G cell. This
problem can be solved by configuring priorities for these two features.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 265 of 341
Public
or
GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

7.5.5 GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call

Release
Availability
Summary
When an MS terminates a call in the GSM network, it camps on the WCDMA network
according to the cell selection indicator after release information in the Channel Release
message instead of cell reselection from GSM to WCDMA.
Benefits
The cell reselection of the MS is accelerated. The MS can obtain services from the WCDMA
network immediately after the call is released from the GSM network.
Description
In general, when the MS terminates a call in the GSM network, it camps on the cell in which
the call is released and then starts the measurement related to the cell reselection. When a
WCDMA neighboring cell meets the requirements for cell reselection, the MS camps on the
WCDMA network after the cell reselection. The WCDMA cell reselection is initiated after the
MS receives the system information and performs the related calculation. In this case, the
time for the MS to access the WCDMA network is prolonged.
When this feature is enabled, the BSS figures out the best WCDMA neighboring cell based on
the measurement information on the WCDMA neighboring cells after the MS in the GSM
network terminates a CS call. Then, the BSS sends the MS the frequency information on the
cell through the Channel Release message to instruct it to camp on the WCDMA cell. In this
way, the MS can camp on a WCDMA cell without related calculation, thus accelerating cell
reselection
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 266 of 341
Public

None
7.5.6 GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

Availability
Summary
This feature is implemented through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE containing load
information over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complies with the 3GPP
specifications. With this feature, the decision on handover that is not caused by insufficient
coverage can be more accurate, thus reducing the possibility of ping-pong handovers between
the GSM network and WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature helps maintain a load balance between the GSM network and WCDMA network.
It also helps increase the accuracy of handover decision, thus reducing the possibility of
ping-pong handovers. The simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of
invalid handovers between the GSM network and WCDMA network by up to 6 % and
increases the total capacity of the GSM network and WCDMA network by up to 5%.
Description
This feature functions as a supplement to GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based
Handover. If the handover decision is based only on load, the occurrence of ping-pong
handover is highly possible. The reason is that the mechanism of load information exchange
between the GSM network and WCDMA network is inadequate. The inadequate mechanism
may cause excessive amount of services to be handed over from the GSM network to the
WCDMA network, leading to the overload of the WCDMA network and consequently
handover back to the GSM network.
This feature enables the load information exchange over the Iur-g interface, so that the
decision on load-based handover can be more rational. The conditions on which the decision
is based are as follows:
The target WCDMA cell meets the load requirements.
The load difference between the source GSM cell and target WCDMA cell exceeds the
predefined threshold.
The handover will not lead to the congestion in the target WCDMA cell.

Page 267 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Impacts on the MBSC hardware
The Iur-g interface can be configured only on the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board.
Impacts on the MBTS hardware
Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features
GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and WCDMA Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g
None
7.5.7 GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

between GSM and WCDMA
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management
(RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol
stack complies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS
services from a WCDMA cell to a GSM cell does not require the information transfer via the
CN.
Benefits
This feature provides a solution that enables the NACC procedure when the CN does not
support the RIM procedure. The simulation results show that this feature helps shorten the
delay of PS handover by two seconds. As the delay is shortened, the user experience can be
improved.
Description
As indicated in the 3GPP specifications, the GERAN (P) SI is obtained through the RIM
procedure during the NACC procedure. The NACC procedure involves the RNC, WCDMA
SGSN, GSM SGSN, and BSC. When this feature is applied, the GSM/WCDMA GERAN (P)
SI information is transferred over the Iur-g interface between the base station controllers,
without being transferred via the CN.

Page 268 of 341
Public
This feature applies only to the Iur-g interface, which connects different base station
controllers. In such a case, the GERAN (P) SI information is transferred over the protocol
stack complying with the 3GPP specifications. If there is no Iur-g interface between WCDMA
and GSM, the GERAN (P) SI information can be exchanged only via the CN, and accordingly
the NACC procedure can be implemented only through the CN, as specified in the 3GPP
specifications.
The following figure shows the network topology that supports this feature. As shown in the
figure, Huawei RNCs and BSCs are connected through the Iur-g interface. This feature
applies to the BSC/RNC of other vendors only if it has passed the interoperability test (IOT).
Otherwise, the CN-involved NACC procedure is applied. For the BSC/RNC of other vendors,
the common cell reselection procedure is performed if the CN does not support the RIM
procedure.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.

Page 269 of 341
Public

The NACC procedure must be supported by the MS/UE.
7.5.8 GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on

Iur-g
Availability
Summary
This feature implements the load-based GSM/WCDMA handover through the exchange of
Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on
the basis of the service handover indicator and load of the GSM network and WCDMA
network when an MS accesses the network. In this way, a load balance is achieved between
the GSM network and WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature aims at striking a load balance between the GSM network and WCDMA network.
It reduces the possibility of congestion in areas covered by both GSM and WCDMA. The
network utilization is consequently increased. The simulation results show that this feature
reduces the percentage of invalid handovers between the GSM network and WCDMA
network by up to 6 % and decreases the access congestion rate during busy hours by up to
4%.
Description
As high-speed PS services are on great demand by a large number of GSM/WCDMA
dual-mode handsets in well-established 2G/3G commercial networks, the load of WCDMA
network has become increasingly heavy. Facing the situation, network operators focus on
reducing the congestion rate and making full utilization of the present network capacity. This
feature can efficiently address this issue. With this feature, the load balance between the GSM
network and WCDMA network can be achieved. This helps reduce the possibility of network
congestion and the percentage of invalid inter-RAT handovers. As a result, the capacity of
both the GSM network and WCDMA network can be fully utilized.
The following figure shows the applicable scenario where the GSM cell and WCDMA cell
have the same coverage. In this scenario, this feature provides a load-balancing function for
admitted MSs through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE between the GSM cell and
WCDMA cell.

Page 270 of 341
Public
The load-balancing function is initiated after RAB setup. The GBSC/MBSC decides whether
to hand over the requested CS service to the WCDMA network on the basis of the service
handover indicator and the load difference between the GSM cell and the target WCDMA cell.
The conditions on which the decision is based are as follows:
The MS supports WCDMA services.
The service handover indicator assigned by the CN or configured at the GBSC/MBSC

shows that the CS service can be handed over to the WCDMA cell.
The target WCDMA cell is lightly loaded.
The load difference between the source GSM cell and target WCDMA cell exceeds the
predefined threshold.
The GBSC/MBSC determines whether to perform the inter-RAT handover on a number

of MSs according to the predefined distribution rate. The rate is considered as a
probability rate with respect to the redirection of a single MS. If the GBSC/MBSC
determines that the handover is not performed, the CS service will be processed in the
GSM cell.
This feature in the present version (GBSS12.0) applies to only the handover of CS services
from a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Page 271 of 341
Public

GBFD-114322 GSM and WCDMA Load Based Handover
WRFD-070006 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
None
7.5.9 GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on

Iur-g
Availability
Summary
This feature supports GSM/WCDMA handover based on service. With this feature, services
are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchical network planning, and
the load of the GSM network and WCDMA network when an MS accesses the network.
Benefits
This feature helps operators to develop network services in hierarchies, which facilitates the
hierarchical network planning. With this feature, the spectrum utilization is increased. The
simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of invalid inter-RAT
handovers by up to 8% and increases the total capacity of the GSM network and WCDMA
network by up to 8%.
Description
In the case of evolution from a legacy GSM network to a GSM&WCDMA network, the
WCDMA network usually has a larger capacity in the early stage. How to fully utilize the
WCDMA network to carry high-speed services has become a major concern for network
operators. This feature provides the service steering function for the benefit of network
planning. Service steering helps improve the utilization of resources in each network and
divide frequencies and RATs into different hierarchies. In addition to service steering, the
selection of RAT for an MS to access also depends on the network load. This helps optimize
the network performance in the following aspects:
Tasks of different RATs can be clearly defined, which facilitates the planning of network
capacity.
Service steering can reduce interference between different traffic classes, thus increasing
the network capacity of the WCDMA network.
The flexible distribution of services to the WCDMA and GSM cells can improve the
utilization of system resources, reduce the access congestion rate, and enhance the QoS
of the network.
The service-steering function is initiated after RAB setup. The GBSC/MBSC decides whether
to hand over the MS to the WCDMA network on the basis of the service handover indicator

Page 272 of 341
Public
and the load difference between the GSM cell and the target WCDMA cell. The conditions on
which the decision is based are as follows:
The MS requests the CS service.
The MS supports WCDMA services.
The target WCDMA cell is lightly loaded and is with the lightest load among all
neighboring WCDMA cells of the source GSM cell.
This feature in the present version (GBSS12.0) applies to only the steering of CS services
from a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
WRFD-070007 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g
None
7.6 GSM & LTE Interoperability

7.6.1 GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
Availability
This feature is introduced in GBSS12.0 for test. It is commercially used from GBSS13.0.
Summary
This feature enables the GSM/LTE dual-mode MS in idle mode to perform cell reselection
based on the level of the neighboring cells and setting of the radio access technology (RAT)
priority.

Page 273 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature enables the GSM network and LTE network to work as a complement to
each other. This is profitable for operators who have deployed both the GSM network
and LTE network.
This feature enables the existing GSM network to provide communication services to
LTE subscribers at the initial deployment stage of LTE, thus generating profit for the
LTE operators.
This feature can be used to balance the traffic between the GSM network and LTE
network, thus prolonging the lifecycle of the GSM network.
A GSM/LTE dual-mode MS can be made to camp on the LTE network through the
setting of the RAT priority when the GSM/LTE dual-mode MS is within the coverage
area of the LTE network.
Description
An MS in idle mode periodically measures the level of the serving cell and the cell of the
neighboring cells specified in the system information. The MS determines whether to perform
cell reselection based on the settings of the mode priority parameters and on the cell
reselection algorithm. In this way, the MS can always camp on a cell that can provide quality
services. Thus, the purpose of this feature is to bind the MS to a cell that can provide quality
services.
The cell reselection between GSM and LTE is based on the setting of the RAT priority. The
RAT priority is set on the BSC side, and is sent to the MS through the system information
message SI2quater. Different RAT priorities must be set for the GSM and LTE networks. Thus,
the MS can select to camp on the network of higher service quality based on the RAT
priorities.
The MS obtains the information about the frequencies of the neighboring cells by parsing the
system information message SI2quater. It also measures the downlink level of all neighboring
cells to obtain the candidate cells for reselection. Then, the MS sorts the candidate cells
according to the RAT priority, and selects the best cell for reselection.
This feature supports the cell reselection between GSM and LTE FDD and the cell reselection
between GSM and LTE TDD.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

Page 274 of 341
Public
GBFD-511313 CSFB
The Core network must support both GSM and LTE.
The MS must support both GSM and LTE.
7.6.2 GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based

on Coverage
Availability
This feature is available for beta use from GBSS12.0. It is available for commercial use from
GBSS13.0.
Summary
MSs in PS connection report MRs to the BSC periodically. The BSC obtains the receive level
of the serving cell through MRs. When the receive level of the serving cell remains lower
than the specified PS handover threshold for a period, the BSC triggers the PS handover
between GSM and LTE. In this manner, the MS reselects a neighboring cell with a higher
receive level.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms
theoretically and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially conversational services.
Thus, the operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
This feature provides PS coverage for cells of another RAT to ensure the PS service continuity.
In this manner, the network performance and user experience are improved.
Description
Conversational services have a high requirement for the service delay, which cannot be met
through cell reselection. In view of this, Huawei introduces the PS handover, during which
radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the cell change. In this manner, the
service disruption during cell change is reduced to less than 150 ms.
Based on the MRs reported by the MS, the BSC triggers the coverage-based PS handover
between GSM and LTE when the receive level of the serving cell remains lower than the PS
handover threshold for a period. This ensures that the MS can reselect a neighboring cell with
a higher receive level. As the receive level of the neighboring cell is considered before the
handover, the success rate of the handover, the throughput of the new cell, and the PS QoS
can be guaranteed.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
The Fast PS Handover between GSM and LTE function is introduced.
If GSM cells and LTE cells are co-sited and cover the same areas, blind handovers must be
supported. When a GSM/LTE dual-mode or multi-mode MS is processing PS services in a

Page 275 of 341
Public
GSM cell, a service-based or load-based PS handover can be triggered to hand over the MS to
an LTE cell. In this case, a target LTE cell can be selected according to the default system
setting, without using the measurement reports (MRs).
Dependency
None
GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
GBFD-119502 PS Handover
PS handover priority:
GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover >
GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality >
GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load >
GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage
It is recommended the 4 features working together.
The SGSN must support PS handover between GSM and LTE.

on Quality
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
MSs in PS connection report MRs to the BSC periodically. Based on the MRs, the BSC
triggers a PS handover to a neighboring LTE cell if the UL or DL signal quality in the current
GSM cell on the air interface reaches the specified threshold.

Page 276 of 341
Public
Benefits
theoretically and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially conversational services.
Thus, the operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
In the scenarios with severe signal attenuation, this feature can be used to prevent PS service
disruption due to deterioration of signal quality on the air interface, thus improving network
performance and user experience.
Description
Conversational services have a high requirement for the service delay, which cannot be met
through cell reselection. In view of this, Huawei introduces the PS handover, during which
radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the cell change. In this manner, the
service disruption during cell change is reduced to less than 150 ms.
When the UL or DL air interface quality of the MS in the serving cell is reaches the preset
threshold, the BSC triggers the PS handover between GSM and LTE so that the MS reselects
an LTE neighboring cell with the highest receive level. In this manner, the success rate of the
PS handover, the throughput of the new cell, and the PS QoS are guaranteed.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
Dependency
None

Page 277 of 341
Public


on Cell Load
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
Based on the traffic load and the MRs reported by the MS in PS connection mode, the BSC
may trigger the PS handover from GSM to LTE when the PS load on the GSM cell is high to
achieve load balance and in addition, to fully utilize the transmission resources.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms and
provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service. Thus, the
operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
When the GSM network is congested, this feature can be used to transfer part of the load of
the GSM cell to the neighboring LTE cells, thus increasing the PS service rate and enhancing
the network performance and user experience.
Description
With the construction of the LTE network, the networking with both GSM and LTE is widely
used. Huawei aims to fully utilize the resources of the two networks. The LTE network can
take over part of PS services from the GSM network.
In an area covered with both GSM and LTE networks, if the load difference between the two
networks is great and the current services are supported by both GSM and LTE, the PS
handover between GSM and LTE can be triggered for load balance.
When this feature is enabled, the BSC selects an LTE neighboring cell with the highest
receive level for the handover. In this manner, the success rate of the PS handover, the
throughput of the new cell, and the PS QoS are guaranteed.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0

Page 278 of 341
Public

Conversational services have a high requirement for service interruption duration, which
cannot be met by using cell reselection. The PS handover technique, however, solves this
problem. During a PS handover, radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the MS
camps on the target cell. In this manner, the service interruption duration is reduced to less
than 150 ms.
Dependency
None


on Mode Priority
Availability
GBSS13.0.

Page 279 of 341
Public
Summary
This feature enables operators to set priorities for GSM and LTE networks. In this manner,
during the PS handover, the MS will select a network with the higher priority.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms and
provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service. Thus, the
operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
The operator can use the LTE network to carry PS services preferentially. That is, in the area
with LTE coverage, use the LTE network to provide high-speed data services for GSM/LTE
dual-mode users; in the area without LTE coverage, use the GSM network to carry the
services. In this manner, the operator can make profit quickly from the LET network and the
user experience is enhanced.
Description
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, this feature enables the GSM/LTE dual-mode
MSs to select LTE network preferentially for PS services.
Based on MRs from the MS, the BSC triggers a PS handover when the downlink level of the
serving cell reaches the level threshold for PS handover, when the UL or DL air interface
quality decreases to the handover threshold, or when the PS load of the GSM cell is high. The
BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a network with the highest
priority as the target cell.
Because the receive level, service quality, load, and network mode of the target cell and the
suitable network is considered before the PS handover, the handover success rate and the
throughput of the target cell are guaranteed.
This feature must be used together with the feature GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between
GSM and LTE Based on Coverage, GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE
Based on Quality, or GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell
Load.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Depend on:
GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage or

Page 280 of 341
Public
GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality or

GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
7.6.6 GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover

Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, the BSC hands over services of different
types to the GSM or LTE network based on the service distribution information sent by the
SGSN.
Benefits
and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service. Thus,
the operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
The services of different types are handed over to the GSM or LTE network based on the
service attribute. In this manner, the loads on the two networks are balanced. In addition,
the PS services will not be handed over to an inappropriate network.
The operator can use the LET network to carry the services with high requirement for
rate and delay, thus enhancing user experience and increasing the revenue.
Description
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, the operator can divide the services into
multiple types, and then determine the network (GSM or LTE) for carrying each type of
services. In this manner, the load is balanced between the two networks, and the operator can
make full use of the advantages of both GSM and LTE to provide satisfactory service quality.
For example, the operator can use the LTE network to carry the streaming services with a high
requirement for rate and the conversational services with a high requirement for delay, and
use the GSM network to carry the background services with a low requirement for rate and
delay.
The operator can configure the policy on the core network, and then during the PS handover,
the BSC hands over the services with different types to the corresponding network according
to the service distribution information sent by the core network.
According to 3GPP 48.018, the PS HANDOVER REQUEST message or the CREATE BSS
PFC message from the SGSN contains the IE that indicates the service type. If the IE is
"Network initiated cell change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure
should be performed", the handover to an LTE cell is preferred. In this case, the BSC selects

Page 281 of 341
Public
an LTE neighboring cell with the highest receive level as the target cell, and then informs the
MS to hand over to the target cell through PS handover.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
Conversational services have a high requirement for service interruption duration, which
cannot be met by using cell reselection. The PS handover technique, however, solves this
problem. During a PS handover, radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the MS
camps on the target cell. In this manner, the service interruption duration is reduced to less
than 150 ms.
Dependency
None

Page 282 of 341
Public
7.6.7 GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE

Availability
Summary
In a GSM/LTE hybrid network, when the MS is in a GSM cell, the MS periodically sends
packet measurement reports to the BSC if the serving cell is in NC2 mode and packet
connection state. On receiving the reports from the MS, the BSC triggers a
network-controlled cell reselection based on the receive level, cell load, receive quality,
modulation scheme, and service priority indicated by the message sent from the core network.
If the target cell is a LTE cell, the BSC triggers a procedure of eNC2 between GSM and LTE.
Benefits
Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, eNC2 Between GSM and LTE has the
following benefits:
The following factors are considered at the network so that the MS can be reselected to a cell
with better signal quality: receive level of the serving cell, receive quality over the Um
interface, and packet service load, priority of modulation scheme, and service priority
indicated by the message sent from the core network. This can prevent deterioration of QoS of
the MS. In this manner, the user experience can be improved, for the duration of packet
service disruption is shortened to less than 500 ms.
Description
Four types of cell reselection decision are involved in eNC2 between GSM and LTE:
service-based cell reselection decision, quality-based cell reselection decision, load-based cell
reselection decision, and coverage-based cell.
1) Service-based cell reselection decision
According to 3GPP 48.018, the PS HANDOVER REQUEST message or the CREATE BSS
PFC message from the SGSN contains the IE that indicates the service type. If the IE is
"Network initiated cell change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure
should be performed", the reselection to an LTE cell is preferred. In this case, the BSC selects
an LTE neighboring cell with the highest receive level as the target cell, and then informs the
MS to reselect the target cell through an eNC2 procedure.
2) Quality-based cell reselection decision
The BSC determines whether the radio link quality is good or bad according to the receive
quality or bit error rate, and performs a cell reselection decision based on the receive quality
of the link over the Um interface. When the receive quality of the uplink or downlink radio
link deteriorates to a specified threshold, the BSC triggers the NC2 procedure. The BSC
selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a network with the highest
priority as the target cell.
3) Load-based cell reselection decision
The BSC performs a cell reselection decision based on the packet load of the serving cell.
When the packet load of the serving cell reaches a specified threshold, the BSC triggers the

Page 283 of 341
Public
NC2 procedure. The BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a
network with the highest priority as the target cell.
4) Coverage-based cell reselection decision
The BSC performs a cell reselection decision based on the receive level of the serving cell.
When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than a specified threshold for a period, the
BSC triggers the NC2 procedure. The BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from
the cells in a network with the highest priority as the target cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode
The MS must support both GSM and LTE and NC2 procedure.
7.6.8 GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE

Availability
Summary
This feature supports eNACC from LTE to GSM only.
In packet transfer mode, the UE sends the eNodeB a message, requesting for the system
information of the target GSM cell. Upon receiving the message, the eNodeB sends the
system information of the target GSM cell to the UE. Upon receiving the system information,
the UE accelerates the packet service access to the target GSM cell.
Benefits
The cell reselection of the UE from an LTE cell to a GSM cell is accelerated, the data
transmission disruption becomes shorter, and the duration of the service disruption is
shorter than 500 ms. In this manner, the requirements of services, such as streaming
service, for delay and throughput are met.

Page 284 of 341
Public
The resources of the original cell can be released for new subscribers faster after the cell
reselection. In this manner, the system capacity is increased.
Description
eNACC is a function based on which the UE accesses the target GSM cell quickly after the
cell reselection is completed without receiving the complete system information of the target
cell.
eNACC does not control cell reselection of the UE. Instead, the network is informed of the
message that the UE requires cell reselection, and then the network sends the system
information of target GSM cells to the UE before the cell reselection. In this manner, the cell
reselection is accelerated, and thus the duration of data transmission disruption is reduced
greatly.
As the cell reselection is accelerated, the SGSN can detect faster that a new cell is reselected
for the UE. Thus, the resources of the source LTE cell can be released faster for other
subscribers. In this manner, the system capacity is increased.
Limited by 3GPP 48.018 technical specifications, the system does not support GSM-to-LTE
eNACC. LTE-to-GSM eNACC is supported only when the BSC supports RIM over the Gb
interface.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
The MS must support both GSM and LTE and NACC procedure.
The SGSN must support eNACC procedure.
7.6.9 GBFD-511309 SRVCC

Availability
This feature is introduced in GBSS12.0. This feature is recommended for test purposes rather
than for commercial use.

Page 285 of 341
Public
Summary
With Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC), speech services in the LTE network can
be maintained when it is handed over to a GERAN network or UTRAN network.
Benefits
The speech service can be maintained when it is handed over from the GERAN to the
UTRAN.
Description
At the initial stage of the LTE project, the 3GPP defines that only the packet service is
supported. In the evolution from GERAN to LTE, the 3GPP R8 defines two solutions:
SRVCC and CSFB, to realize the interoperability of speech services between GERAN and
LTE.
To implement the SRVCC solution, the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) must be deployed at
the CN and the speech service must be provided. With the assistance of the VoIP speech
service routing, control, and triggering by the IMS and the handover control by the Mobile
Management Entity (MME), the speech service in the LTE network can be handed over to the
GERAN/UTRAN smoothly.
In SRVCC, speech services are implemented in the LTE packet network, so technically the
SRVCC solution can be regarded as a real LTE VoIP technique. Through circuit switch in
GERAN network or packet switch in LTE network, the UE can access IMS based on which
the speech service is maintained. SRVCC supports handover of speech services from LTE to
GSM only.
SRVCC is available only when GERAN network and LTE network cover the same area.
GBSS12.0 does not support SRVCC in DTM mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
The CN is deployed with IMS and the speech service is available.
Page 286 of 341
Public
The MSC and MGW must support this feature.
7.6.10 GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based

Handover
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the handover between GSM frequency bands and LTE frequency bands.
Benefits
Through this feature, an MS is handed over to a specific GSM or LTE frequency band, and
the resources of the LTE or GSM frequency band occupied by the MS before the handover are
released. This feature improves the Quality of Service (QoS) of end users, thereby increasing
the revenue of operators.
Description
This feature is an enhancement of the inter-RAT handover. It supports handovers between
frequency bands of different RATs based on the priorities of neighboring cells. Through this
feature, an MS is handed over to a frequency band of another RAT to meet the requirements
of users for mobility or to ensure that the capacity restrictions on frequency bands are not
exceeded.
This feature can be applied to the following combinations of RATs and frequency bands:
GSM 900M
GSM 1800M
LTE 800M
LTE 900M
LTE 2.6G
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 287 of 341
Public
GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality

GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
7.6.11 GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

Availability
Summary
After an MS terminates a call in the GSM network, the MS can camp on the LTE network
according to the cell reselection indicator after release information element in the Channel
Release message, without performing a cell reselection procedure.
Benefits
This feature speeds up cell reselection so that an MS can immediately receive services in the
LTE network after terminating its call in the GSM network.
Description
Generally, after an MS terminates a call in a GSM cell, it camps on the GSM cell. If a
neighboring LTE cell meets the requirements for cell reselection, the MS can camp on the
LTE cell through a cell reselection. The MS, however, must receive system information and
perform cell reselection calculations before initiating the cell reselection. This means that the
MS cannot process services in the LTE network immediately.
When this feature is enabled, the BSS selects the best neighboring LTE cell based on the
measurement information on neighboring LTE cells after the MS terminates its call in the
GSM network. Then, the BSS sends the frequency information about the best neighboring
LTE cell to the MS by using a Channel Release message, instructing the MS to camp on the
LTE cell. By doing so, the MS can reselect an LTE cell without performing cell reselection
calculations, thereby speeding up cell reselection.
Enhancement
None
Dependencies
None
Page 288 of 341
Public

GBFD-511309 SRVCC
GBFD-511313 CSFB
7.6.12 GBFD-511313 CSFB

Availability
Summary
The Circuit Switch FallBack (CSFB) feature enables a UE camping on the E-UTRAN
network to access the GERAN/UTRAN network through a PS handover or PS cell reselection
and then process CS services. This feature is available only when the E-UTRAN and
GERAN/UTRAN networks cover the same areas.
Benefits
This feature enables a UE to be handed over from the LTE network to the GERAN network to
process CS services, thereby protecting the investment in the GERAN network.
The GERAN network can be used to provide CS services, and the E-UTRAN network can be
used to provide high-speed PS services.
Compared with the Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) technique, CSFB provides
CS services for UEs in the LTE network with a simpler network structure, without deploying
the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS).
Description
In the LTE startup stage, the 3GPP stipulates that LTE supports only PS services. In the
evolution from GERAN to E-UTRAN, 3GPP Release 8 defines two solutions, SRVCC and
CSFB, to implement the interoperability between GERAN and E-UTRAN.
If a mature GERAN network is available in the initial stage of E-UTRAN deployment, the
operator can use the existing GERAN network to provide CS services whereas use the LTE
network to provide PS services. This saves the investment in the existing GERAN network.
With CSFB, a UE in the LTE network can be handed over to the GERAN network to process
CS services.
To implement CSFB, the SGs interface must be configured between the MSC server and the
Mobile Management Entity (MME) so that dual-mode UEs attached to the LTE network can
process services such as calling, calling response, SMS, and combined location update
between E-UTRAN and GERAN. Technically, CSFB is not a real LTE VoIP technique
because a dual-mode UE has been handed over from E-UTRAN to GERAN before it initiates
CS services.
The CSFB feature is available only when GERAN and E-UTRAN cover the same areas.
CSFB does not need the IMS, thereby simplifying the network architecture. However, every
time the UE makes or receives a call, the UE is handed over from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

Page 289 of 341
Public
This increases the access delay. In addition, the ongoing LTE PS services are affected by the
incoming call.
Enhancement
None
Dependencies
None
GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
The SGs interface must be configured between the MSC server and the MME.
The MS must be a GSM/LTE dual-mode MS and support CSFB.
R9 and later MS is fully controlled by this feature.
7.7 GSM & TD-SCDMA Interoperability

7.7.1 GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
Availability
Introduction
This feature enables dual-mode MSs to be handed over and reselect cells between a GSM
network and a TD-SCDMA network when the MS processes CS or PS services.
Benefits
Dual-mode MSs can roam and be handed over from a TD-SCDMA network to a GSM
network. This lets dual-mode MSs enjoy continuous network coverage in scenarios with
limited TD-SCDMA coverage, for example, in the early stages of network deployment.
A GSM network can smoothly evolve into a TD-SCDMA network. This helps telecom
operators increase return on investment (ROI).

Page 290 of 341
Public
Description
When GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability is enabled, dual-mode MSs can roam and be
handed over between a GSM network and a TD-SCDMA network. Huawei GSM BSS
supports MS handovers and roaming in the following scenarios:
In idle mode, an MS roams from a GSM network to a TD-SCDMA network.
In idle mode, an MS roams from a TD-SCDMA network to a GSM network.
In dedicated mode, an MS is handed over from a GSM network to a TD-SCDMA

network.
In dedicated mode, an MS is handed over from a TD-SCDMA network to a GSM

network.
Currently, Huawei GSM BSS does not support PS domain handovers. Interoperability
between TD-SCDMA networks and GPRS/EDGE networks is implemented by using the
autonomous cell reselection of MSs. The inter-RAT network assisted cell change (NACC)
function can speed up the cell reselection from a TD-SCDMA network to a GPRS/EDGE
network. The network-controlled cell reselection from a GPRS/EDGE network to a
TD-SCDMA network is implemented by using the inter-RAT Network Control Cell
Reselection Mode 2 (NC2) function.
Enhancement
This feature solves the problem of some GSM terminals breaking down or restarting when a
neighboring TD-SCDMA cell is broadcast in a system information message. In addition, this
feature enables dual-mode MSs to be handed over between a GSM network and a
TD-SCDMA network.
Dependency
None
GBFD-511403 Extended BCCH
The MS, MSC, SGSN, HLR, and the NEs in the TD-SCDMA network must support this
feature.
CS handover between GSM and TD-SCDMA should be supported by TD-SCDMA RNC.

Page 291 of 341
Public
7.7.2 GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and

TD-SCDMA
Availability
Summary
The Iur-g interface is used for information exchange between the BSC and the TD-RNC.
Through the information exchage and common measurement procedures, the BSC and
TD-RNC can obtain the capacity and load information of each other.
Benefits
The GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover mechanism is developed into a mechanism
similar to BSC internal handover in GSM900/1800. In this way, the handover procedure is
simplified. This decreases the handover delay and increases the handover success rate, thus
improving the customer experience.
Description
The Iur-g interface is introduced because the existing GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover
does not meet the requirements of telecom operators in terms of the handover delay and the
handover success rate. The Iur-g interface is used for the information exchange between the
BSC and the TD-RNC, thus increasing the GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover success
rate and decreasing the handover delay.
The Iur-g interface supports the information exchange and common measurement procedures.
The information exchange procedure is used for exchanging capacity information between the
BSC and the TD-RNC. The common measurement procedure is used for exchanging load
information between the BSC and the TD-RNC.
1.
Information exchange procedure
Currently, the information exchange procedure can only be initiated by the TD-RNC and
terminated by the BSC. In this procedure, the TD-RNC sends the BSC an information
exchange initialization request message, specifying the measurement objects (CGI of the
GSM cell), information exchange type (Cell Capability Class/NACC Related Data), and
reporting mode (On Demand/On Modification).
The reporting mode is described as follows:
1) On demand: Upon receiving the inforamtion exchange initializaiton request message from
the TD-RNC, the BSC returns the cell capacity information through a response message.
2) On Modification: Upon receiving the initializaiton request message from the TD-RNC, the
BSC returns the cell capacity information through a response message. If the information is
changed later, the BSC notifies the TD-RNC of the change through an Information Report
message.
2.
Common measurement
Currently, the common measurement procedure can only be initiated by the TD-RNC and
terminated by the BSC. In this procedure, the TD-RNC sends the BSC a common
measurement initialization request message, specifying the measurement objects (CGI of the

Page 292 of 341
Public
GSM cell), measurement type (Load/RT Load/NRT Load), and reporting mode (On
Demand/event-triggered/periodic).
The reporting mode is described as follows:
1) On demand: Upon receiving the common measurement initializaiton request message from
the TD-RNC, the BSC returns the cell load information through a response message.
2) Periodic: Upon receiving the common measurement initializtion request message from the
TD-RNC, the BSC returns the common measurement initialization response message.
Subsequently, the BSC periodically reports the common measrement results according to the
specified period.
3) Event-triggered: Upon receiving the common measurement initializtion request message
from the TD-RNC, the BSC returns the common measurement initialization response message.
Subsequently, the BSC reports the common measrement results when the event triggers the
conditions.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
The BSC must be configured with a pair of IP interface boards for the Iur-g interface.
None
None
It should be supported by TD-SCDMA RNC.
7.7.3 GBFD-511402 Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between

GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g
Availability
Summary
Through the information exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and the TD-RNC,
radio resource reservation is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handover procedure. In
this way, the resource reservation procedure is completed without the assistance of the CN.
The original redirecting procedure is maintained for compatibility with the CN.

Page 293 of 341
Public
Benefits
This feature works with GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover to reduce the handover delay
by 80 ms and increase the handover success rate by 0.8% in a co-CN scenario, according to
the theoretical analysis results.
Description
The existing TD-SCDMA/GSM inter-RAT handover mechanism is transformed into a
mechanism similar to BSC internal handover in GSM900/1800. In this way, the handover
procedure is simplified. This decreases the handover delay and increases the handover success
rate, thus improving the customer experience.
This feature complies with the specifications of China Mobile. Through the information
exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and the TD-RNC, radio resource reservation
is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handover procedure. In this way, the resource
reservation procedure is completed without the assistance of the CN.
The TD-RNC selects an optimum target cell to perform handover based on the signal level,
capacity, and load of neighboring GSM cells. In advance of the handover, the TD-RNC
reserves radio resources through the Iur-g interface to reduce the handover delay. This feature
is advantageous especially in scenarios of heavy load, fast fading, and high-speed movement
in GSM.
The radio resource handover procedure is described as follows:
After receiving measurement reports (MRs) from the UE, the TD-RNC selects an optimum
target cell to perform handover based on the capacity and load of neighboring GSM cells. The
TD-RNC requests Iur-g SCCP links for this UE and sends the BSC an Enhanced Relocation
Resource Request message, requesting radio resources for this UE.
Upon receipt of the Enhanced Relocation Resource Request message, the BSC assigns a
D-RNTI to the UE, reserves radio resources according to the requested Speech Version, and
responds to the TD-RNC with an Enhanced Relocation Resource Response message.
Optionally, this message can carry the capacity and load information of the GSM cell.
After receiving the Enhanced Relocation Resource Response message, the TD-RNC sends the
UE the associated radio resources through the Handover From Utran Command message. At
the same time, it sends the CN a Relocation Required message. Upon receipt of the message,
the CN sends the BSC a Handover Request message. After the BSC completes the setup of A
interface resources, the UE is handed over to the target cell according to the traditional
inter-RAT handover procedure.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
The BSC must be configured with a pair of IP interface boards for the Iur-g interface.
None

Page 294 of 341
Public
GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA

It should be supported by TD-SCDMA RNC.
7.7.4 GBFD-511403 Extended BCCH

Introduction
When this feature is enabled, SI2Quater and SI13 messages are broadcast on the extended
BCCH. This speeds up system information message broadcasting and shortens the delay in
inter-RAT cell reselection.
Benefits
This feature shortens the delay in inter-RAT cell reselection between a GSM network and a
TD-SCDMA network.
Description
If SIQuater and SI13 messages are broadcast on a BCCH, they are multiplexed on the same
BCCH as other system information messages. In addition, only one SIQuater or SI13 message
is broadcast in several scheduling periods. This prolongs inter-RAT cell reselection.
If SI2Quater and SI13 messages are specified to be broadcast on an extended BCCH, only
these two types of messages are broadcast on the extended BCCH. In addition, one SIQuater
or SI13 message is broadcast in each scheduling period. This speeds up the scheduling and
broadcasting of SI2Quater and SI13 messages.
As a result, MSs quickly obtain system information messages for inter-RAT cell reselection,
and the delay in cell reselection decreases.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None

Page 295 of 341
Public
Network Security
8.1 Security
8.1.1 GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm
Availability
Summary
This feature is used when the voice, data, and signaling of the user are transmitted over the
Um interface.
Benefits
An evident advantage of the GSM system over the analog system is that the
unauthorized users are prohibited to access the network and the data of the authorized
users is encrypted through sophisticated ciphering algorithm, thus ensuring the
communication security.
The ciphering algorithm is referred to as A5 algorithm, which is a 114-bit ciphering

sequence according to the GSM specifications. The GSM specifications define eight
ciphering algorithms: A5/0A5/7. With this feature, all the voice and signaling
information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This
ensures the network security.
Description
GSM specifications define eight ciphering algorithms: A5/0A5/7. A5/0 indicates "Not
encrypted". With this feature, all the voice and signaling information over the Um interface
are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This ensures the network security.
Ciphering procedure
The MSC uses the Cipher Mode CMD message (including the required ciphering
algorithms and the key Kc) to initiate the ciphering procedure through the BSC. Then,
according to the ciphering algorithm supported by the MS, the ciphering algorithm
required by the MSC, and the ciphering algorithm allowed by the BSC, the BSC decides
Page 296 of 341
Public
the algorithm to be used and notifies the BTS of the decision. The BSC then sends the
Ciphering Mode CMD message to notify the MS of the ciphering algorithm. After
receiving the Ciphering Mode CMD message, the MS initiates the transmission in
ciphering mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
8.1.2 GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm

Availability
Summary
This feature is used when the voice, data, and signaling of the user are transmitted over the
Um interface.
Benefits
An evident advantage of the GSM system over the analog system is that the
unauthorized users are prohibited to access the network and the data of the authorized
users is encrypted through rigorous ciphering algorithm, thus ensuring the
communication security.
The ciphering algorithm is referred to as A5 algorithm, which is a 114-bit ciphering

sequence according to the GSM specifications. The GSM specifications define eight
ciphering algorithms: A5/0A5/7. With this feature, all the voice and signaling
information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/3 ciphering mode. This ensures
the network security.
Description
For details, see the description of the A5/1 and A5/2 ciphering algorithm.

Page 297 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Impact on the BTS hardware
None
8.1.3 GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BTS optimizes the A5/1 ciphering algorithm to improve the network
security.
Benefits
Information security becomes increasingly important as the subscribers use MSs to browse
webpages and do business on the network. This features aims to solve the low security
problem of the A5/1 ciphering algorithm and thus improve the data transmission security by
optimizing the service processing procedure and increasing the complexity of network
wiretapping.
Description
With the technology development, some hacker organizations state that they can attack the
calls encrypted by the A5/1 ciphering algorithm within 30 seconds in ideal conditions.
Huawei studies the manner in which hackers attack, and prepares a scheme to enhance the
A5/1 ciphering algorithm. With this scheme, only the network software needs to be upgraded.
Therefore, hackers can attack the calls with a success rate of a maximum of only 10% within
40 successive days. In this manner, the data transmission security is greatly improved.
The ciphering procedure is optimized from the following aspects:
Fast SDCCH handover is adopted in the MS access procedure. This increases the
difficulty for an intruder to trace the calls of an MS.
The TCH timing handover is introduced to increase the difficulty for an intruder to trace
an MS.

Page 298 of 341
Public
The Hopping Sequence Number (HSN) in the Flex Training Sequence Code (TSC) and
Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) differentiates one TCH from another.
Therefore, the characteristics of TCHs are different and an intruder cannot trace other
TCHs according to the characteristics of a TCH.
After the BTS sends a ciphering command, it stops sending System Information 5, 5bis,
and 5ter over the SACCH on the SDCCH.
The dummy bits are randomized.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
8.1.4 GBFD-113522 Encrypted Network Management

Availability
Summary
The encrypted network management is related to the secure socket layer (SSL). This feature
allows the establishment of a TCP transmission channel between the network management
server and a network element (NE) based on the encrypted SSL.
Benefits
With the rapid development of the radio network, operators have higher requirements for
the OM transmission security. Thus, the encryption of the OM transmission channel
becomes a basic requirement.
The encryption of the OM transmission channel involves the encryption of the data
transmitted between the LMT and the NE and of the data transmitted between the BSC
and the BTS.

Page 299 of 341
Public
This feature ensures the confidentiality of the data transmitted through the OM
transmission channel, thus effectively protecting the privacy of the subscriber data and
reducing the risk that the transmitted plain text is intercepted.
Description
In many scenarios of the communication between the network management system and the
NE, a large amount of data is transmitted in the form of data files, including performance data
file, log file, configuration data file, version file, and patch file. The traditional plain text
transmission in the network is a threat to the secrecy of the transmitted data files.
With the encrypted network management feature, a transmission channel based on the
encrypted SSL is established between the network management server and the NE during the
establishment of the TCP connection. The data is then transmitted over this encrypted
channel.
Application layer
Transmission
before
encryption
Transport layer (TCP)
Application layer
Transmission
after encryption
Secure socket layer

(SSL)
Transport layer (TCP)
The encrypted network management feature supports the transmission of plain text and cipher
text, and thus does not affect the normal communication between the network management
server and the NE that does not support the encrypted SSL.
Network management server
(supporting encrypted SSL)
Cipher
text
Plain
text
New network element
Old network element
(supporting encrypted
SSL)
(not supporting
encrypted SSL)

Page 300 of 341
Public
This feature complies with RFC4217, and supports two SSL protocol versions, namely,
SSL3.0 and TSL1.0.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
WOFD-210100 Encrypted Transmission
8.2 Reliability
8.2.1 GBFD-117801 Ring Topology
Availability
Summary
The ring topology is a special chain topology. Several BTSs form a chain, and the
lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through the transmission link, thus forming a ring.
If there is a breakpoint on the ring, the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remain unchanged in
networking mode whereas the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection
in the reverse direction.
Benefits
Compared with the ordinary chain topology, the advantage of the ring topology is that when a
connection is broken, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In this way, the BTSs that
precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, thus improving the robustness of the
system.

Page 301 of 341
Public
Description
The ring topology supports the following operations:
Automatic switchover
Manual switchover
Querying and dynamically configuring of the switchover parameters
Dynamic data configuration such as adding or deleting a BTS, cell, or TRX.
Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 show the ring topologies of the BTS:
Figure 8-1 Ring topology (1)
Figure 8-2 Ring topology (2)
Numbers 0 and 1 shown in Figure 8-1 refer to port 0 and port 1 of the BTS. In the BTS ring
topology, the link established at port 0 is a forward link and the link established at port 1 is a
reverse link.
The BTS ring topology can be implemented between interface boards but not between
subracks. In other words, the BTS ring topology must be implemented between the GEIUBs
located in the same subrack, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Generally, the BTS ring topology is a chain of BTS0, BTS1, and BTS2 in sequence, known as
a forward direction. In the forward direction as shown in Figure 1, BTS0 is the highest-level

Page 302 of 341
Public
BTS, BTS1 is the second-level BTS, and other BTSs are connected analogically. When the
link A, B, C, or D is broken, the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remains in the same
topology, and the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a chain in a reverse direction.
The BTS ring topology is categorized into two types: Huawei BTS ring topology I and
Huawei BTS ring topology II. In BTS ring topology I, the BTS with a reverse link is
initialized again after transmission disruption, and thus the services of the BTS are disrupted.
In BTS ring topology II, the services of the BTS with a reverse link are not disrupted after
transmission disruption.
Enhancement
Fast Ring Network Switch function is introduced in GBSS8.0.
With this feature, when a transmission link in the ring network is faulty, all the BTSs behind
the breaking point in the ring network perform the switchover in the reverse direction.
The Fast Ring Network Switch feature accelerates the ring network switchover and the BTS
does not need to be initialized in the reverse ring direction. Therefore, the call drops due to
the ring network switchover and the impact of the switchover on the new calls are reduced.
This improves the network reliability and user experience.
Dependency
None
GBFD-113728 OML Backup
"Huawei BTS ring topology II" is mutually exclusive with GBFD-117301 Flex abis
8.2.2 GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation

Availability

Page 303 of 341
Public
Summary
With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the
cell automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected before the
faulty TRX is replaced.
Benefits
The TRX Cooperation feature ensures that the cell provides services continuously. This
feature reduces the probability that the cell is out of service because of the faulty BCCH TRX.
It also reduces the probability that the call quality in the cell is degraded because of the faulty
TRX involved in the baseband FH. Thus, the reliability of the network is greatly improved.
Description
With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the
cell automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected before the
faulty TRX is replaced.
Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX cooperation is classified
into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For the non-baseband FH
cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell, both BCCH TRX
cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur.
BCCH TRX cooperation

In the idle state, the MS needs to obtain information through the broadcast messages sent
on the BCCH. The messages carry information about cell selection, adjacent cell, access
control, dedicated channel control, cell identification code, location, and system
parameters related to the PS services. When a BCCH TRX of a cell is faulty, all the
services in this cell are interrupted. Therefore, when the BCCH TRX is faulty, another
available TRX of the cell is used to substitute the faulty BCCH TRX to ensure that the
cell can continue to provide services. After the fault in the original BCCH TRX is
rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX. This process is called
BCCH TRX cooperation.
Baseband FH TRX cooperation

In the baseband FH cell, if the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, some speech
frames in the call using the FH channel are lost. Thus, the speech quality is degraded. To
ensure the speech quality in the cell, the BSC enables the baseband FH TRX cooperation
and remove the faulty TRX from the FH and continue the FH mode with the fine running
TRX. In this way, the speech quality of the cell is not affected by the faulty TRX. This
process is called baseband FH TRX cooperation.
When the BCCH TRX in a baseband FH cell is faulty, baseband FH TRX cooperation
can also be performed. That is, the cell is changed to the non-FH mode. After all the
faults in the original BCCH TRX and in the TRX involved in FH are rectified, the
baseband FH TRX cooperation can be performed. That is, the BSC changes the non-FH
mode to the FH mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Page 304 of 341
Public
None
None
None
8.2.3 GBFD-117401 MSC Pool

Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers
belonging to one group of BSCs.
Benefits
The MSCs in an MSC pool share the traffic load and resources. Therefore, this feature
provides the following benefits:
This feature increases the network capacity and saves the equipment investment.
This feature realizes the redundancy backup and thus improves the network reliability
because the addition or deletion of an MSC does not affect the services.
This feature automatically adjusts the traffic load on an MSC and reduces the operation
and maintenance cost of operators.
The MSC pool is logically an MSC. Therefore, the number of handovers between MSCs
is reduced and the network performance is improved.
Description
With this feature, a maximum of 32 MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the
subscribers under one group of BSCs. Through the MSC pool, one BSC can be connected to
multiple MSCs simultaneously. In addition, the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the
MSCs in the pool according to the NRI or load balancing principle. The following figure
shows the typical networking of the MSC Pool feature:

Page 305 of 341
Public

MSC 3
MSC 2
MSC 1
MSC 6
MSC 5
MSC 4
MSC 7
CS poolarea 2
CS poolarea 1
RAN
node
RAN
node
Area 1
Area 2
RAN
node
RAN
node
Area 5
Area 6
PS poolarea 1
RAN
node
Area 3
RAN
node
Area 7
RAN
node
Area 4
RAN
node
Area 8
PS poolarea 2
In the preceding figure, MSC 1, MSC 2, and MSC 3 form an MSC pool. All the CS services
or PS services in the BSC service areas (Area 1, Area 2, Area 5, and Area 6) are routed to the
MSC pool for further processing. The routing policies are described as follows:
Routing by network load

For the newly-registered MS, the BSC selects an MSC by using the load balancing
algorithm based on the IMSI carried in the CMP L3 message, the status of MSCs in the
MSC pool, and the available capacity. Then, the BSC directs the traffic of the MS to the
selected MSC for processing.
If the MS without the SIM card initiates an emergency call, the BSC selects the MSC
based on the IMEI, the status of MSCs in the MSC pool, and the available capacity and
then directs the traffic of the MS to the selected MSC for processing.
Routing by the NRI

After the MS is registered, the MSC allocates the TMSI containing the NRI to the MS.
The NRI is used for identifying an MSC in the MSC pool. During the call processing,
the MS sends the TMSI to the network side. On receiving the TMSI, the BSC resolves
the NRI from the TMSI and then directs the traffic to the MSC based on the MSC
signaling point corresponding to the NRI in the configuration data.
With this feature, the BSCs in the pool area share a group of MSCs. If heavy traffic
hours of each BSC are different, less CN resources are required compared with the
network where the MSC Pool feature is disabled. This saves the investment in the CN
equipment.
When an MSC in the MSC pool is faulty, the traffic of the newly accessed MS is
automatically directed to another normal MSC, thus enhancing the network reliability.
When some maintenance operations such as software upgrade are performed on an MSC
in the MSC pool, the traffic on this MSC can be easily directed to other MSCs. After the
operation is complete, the traffic is reallocated to the original MSC. This reduces the
service interruption duration and thus improves the user satisfaction.

Page 306 of 341
Public
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
The MSC Pool feature in case of A over IP is supported.
GBSS9.0
MSC pool measurements supported: The service requests sent to each MSC in the MSC pool
are counted on the basis of the access method (IMSI, IMEI, or TMSI) used by the MSs. This
helps the operators learn the distribution of MSs using various access methods.
Dependency
None
None
The NSS must support this feature.
WOFD-230100 MSC Pool Management
8.2.4 GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool

Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple SGSNs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers
belonging to one group of BSCs.
Benefits
The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share the traffic load and resources. This feature provides the
following benefits:
Increases the network capacity and saves the investment on equipment.
Implements redundancy backup and thus improves the network reliability because the
addition or deletion of an SGSN does not affect the services.
Reduces handovers between the SGSNs because the SGSNs in an SGSN pool are
logically one SGSN and thus improves the network performance.

Page 307 of 341
Public
Description
This feature, which is similar to the MSC Pool feature, enables a maximum of 32 SGSNs to
form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs.
With this feature, one BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs at the same time. In addition,
the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the SGSNs in the pool according to the network
resource identifier (NRI) or load balancing principle.
CS poolarea 2
CS poolarea 1
RAN
node
RAN
node
Area 1
RAN
node
Area 2
RAN
node
Area 3
RAN
node
Area 5
RAN
node
Area 7
PS poolarea 1
Area 8
PS poolarea 2
SGSN 3
SGSN 2
Area 4
RAN
node
Area 6
SGSN 1
RAN
node
SGSN 6
SGSN 4
SGSN 5
The routing policies are described as follows:
Routing by network load

When an MS accesses the network for the first time, it generates a random TLLI and
sends it to the BSC because it does not have a local/foreign TLLI. Then, the BSC uses
the load balancing algorithm to select an SGSN for the MS according to the status and
available capacity of the SGSNs in the pool and routes the MS to the selected SGSN.
Routing by the NRI

After an MS accesses the network for the first time, the SGSN allocates a new local
TLLI that includes the NRI information associated with this SGSN to the MS. When the
MS processes services, it sends the NRI information to the network through the
local/foreign TLLI. Then, the BSC obtains the NRI from the local/foreign TLLI and
routes the services to the SGSN corresponding to the NRI in the configuration data.
Using the SGSN pool, the BSCs in the pool share a group of SGSNs. If peak hours of
traffic on each BSC are different, less CN resources are required in comparison with the
non SGSN pool networking. This saves the investment on the CN equipment.
When an SGSN in the SGSN pool is faulty, the new services are automatically
transferred to another normal SGSN and thus the network reliability is enhanced. When
some maintenance operations such as software upgrade are performed on an SGSN in
the SGSN pool, the traffic on this SGSN can be easily transferred to other SGSNs. After
the operation is complete, the traffic is reallocated to the original SGSN. This reduces the
service interruption duration and thus improves the user satisfaction.

Page 308 of 341
Public
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
The SGSN must support this feature.
WOFD-230700 SGSN Pool Management
8.2.5 GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass

Availability
Summary
In the case of chain topology, when the power supply to a BTS fails, this feature can bypass
this BTS (that is, this BTS is used only as the path) so that the signals of the lower-level BTSs
can be sent to the BSC.
Benefits
Chain topology is the main topology among the current networking modes. In the chain
topology, if the power supply to the upper-level BTS fails, the transmission of the lower-level
BTSs cannot proceed normally. With this feature, the lower-level BTSs can work normally
even if the power supply to the upper-level BTS fails. Thus, this feature provides higher
reliability for the network in the chain topology, especially in the areas where the power
supply fails frequently.
Description
To improve the working capability of the BSS system in the areas where the power supply
fails frequently, Huawei BTS provides the Abis Bypass feature. This feature is applicable in
the case of chain topology. When the power supply to a BTS fails, the BTS automatically
bypasses the Abis interface so that the lower-level BTSs in the chain network can work
normally. When the power supply is recovered, the BTS and the lower-level BTSs are reset
automatically.

Page 309 of 341
Public
Enhancement
In GBSS8.1, this feature is supported from the 3900 series base stations.
Dependency
None
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis(in TDM network, this feature is exclusive only with Ring Topology
is using)
8.2.6 GBFD-113721 Robust Air Interface Signalling

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the FACCH frames and SACCH frames are sent repeatedly when the radio
quality is poor. Thus, this feature enhances the anti-interference capability of the signaling
links on the FACCH and SACCH and increases the possibility that the MS and the BSC
successfully receive the signaling messages. This feature involves repeated sending of
downlink FACCH frames and repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.
Benefits
Repeated sending of FACCH frames improves the FACCH link performance of the
ordinary MS by 2 dB and the FACCH link performance of the MS in R6 version by 4 dB
to 5 dB.

Page 310 of 341
Public
Repeated sending of SACCH frames improves the SACCH link performance of the
ordinary MS by 4 dB to 5 dB.
The improvement in the FACCH and SACCH performance reduces call drops and
increases the accuracy of the handover decision and power control decision of the BSC.
Description
In the network with tight frequency reuse and poor radio transmission performance, the
messages sent through the FACCH frames or the SACCH frames may be lost because of the
high bit error rate on the Um interface. This feature consists of repeated sending of downlink
FACCH frames and repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.
Repeated sending of downlink FACCH frames

When the receive quality in the downlink measurement report is lower than the specified
threshold, the BTS determines whether to resend the FACCH frames. The repeated
sending of downlink FACCH frames can increase the possibility that the MS
successfully receives the signaling messages.
Repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames

If the BTS detects that the SACCH frames are incorrectly decoded, it instructs the MS to
resend the recent SACCH frame. If the MS detects that the SACCH frames are not
correctly decoded, it instructs the BTS to resend the recent SACCH frame.
With this feature, the voice quality is slightly affected because the signaling messages are sent
through frame stealing.
When the radio quality is poor, repeated sending of signaling messages in the downlink can
reduce call drops caused by decoding failure. Repeated sending of signaling messages in the
uplink can increase the accuracy of the handover decision and power control decision of the
BSC by increasing the possibility of correctly decoding the uplink measurement reports.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
The MS and the BTS must support this feature.

Page 311 of 341
Public
8.2.7 GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup

Availability
Summary
When the active SDH transmission link is faulty because of a natural disaster, the GBSS
automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link over the Abis interface to a
backup satellite transmission link, thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. This
feature is applicable in the case of Abis over TDM and not applicable in the case of Abis over
IP.
Benefits
This feature provides backup transmission links over the Abis interface, thus increasing the
reliability of the GSM network.
Description
In the case of natural disaster, the GBSS devices sometimes work normally; however, the
GSM network cannot provide services because of the terrestrial transmission interruption.
With this feature, the backup satellite transmission links can be used for the communication
between the BSC and the BTS so that the GSM devices can provide services in emergency
conditions.
When this feature is enabled, satellite transmission links are backed up for terrestrial
transmission links. When the terrestrial transmission link is faulty, the GBSS automatically
uses the satellite transmission link. When the active terrestrial transmission links are
recovered, the GBSS devices can be triggered by hand to make the transmission link rollback
to use the terrestrial transmission links again.
With this feature, no information is transmitted over the backup satellite transmission links.
Thus, the satellite link bandwidth is saved.
This feature is applicable only in the case of Abis over TDM.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None

Page 312 of 341
Public
GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface

None
8.2.8 GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy

Availability
Summary
The BSC Node Redundancy feature improves the reliability and robustness of the network by
providing the 1+1 backup on the BSC level.
Benefits
The BSC Node Redundancy feature improves the reliability and robustness of the GSM
network, reduces the duration of service interruption caused by a single-point fault, and thus
improves the service quality.
Description
The BSC controls the radio resources of every BTS. Once the BSC is faulty, all the BTSs
controlled by this BSC cannot access the network and the connection cannot be set up in the
coverage area of this BSC. In addition, the fault on the communication link between the BSC
and the BTS will hamper the functioning of the BSC. As a result, the network in this coverage
area of the BTS may break down.
The BSC Node Redundancy feature provides the backup scheme on the BSC level to avoid
the previous problems. The BSC supports the 1+1 backup mode. The principles of 1+1
backup are as follows:
A BTS is configured with two sets of transmission links, which are connected to the main
BSC and sub-BSCs respectively. All the data concerning the BTS, cell, neighboring cell is
backed up on the main BSC and sub-BSCs. The BTSs are generally controlled by the main
BSC. Once the main BSC is faulty, the BTS attempts to connect to the sub-BSC and continues
to provide services.
In this manner, a BTS has two sets of Abis interfaces (including two sets of control plane
links, user plane links, and OM links). In addition, two control BSCs are available to
implement cold backup (calls are not protected). Thus, the system reliability is improved. The
main and sub-BSCs do not work in active/standby mode. Normally, they are both in operation
state, thus the equipment can get maximal efficiency. If one BSC is faulty, the other one can
take over all the BTSs under the faulty BSC to prevent the BTSs from being out of service
and thus avoid single-point faults on the BSC level. When one BSC becomes faulty, the
overall service processing capability (including CS Erlang and PS throughput) of the pair of
BSCs in 1+1 backup mode is decreased.
Enhancement
None
Page 313 of 341
Public
Dependency
A/GB/Abis/Inter-BSC interface must be IP mode, using IP interface Board.
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1
GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points
WOFD-231100 BSC Redundancy ManagementGBSS
8.2.9 GBFD-113726 TC POOL

Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple BSCs share the same TC resources in the TC pool. This increases
the efficiency of the codec hardware.
Benefits
The efficiency of the codec hardware is increased because multiple BSCs share the same
resources in one TC pool. For the small-capacity BSC, 20% to 30% TC codec resources
can be saved.
Saving room is possible. For example, three small-capacity GTCSs require three cabinets.
In TC pool mode, three GTCSs require only one cabinet. In this manner, 40% to 60%
area in the equipment room can be saved.
Description
In general, one GTCS belongs to only one BSC and is used to process the CS services of this
BSC. The GTCSs in different BSCs are not associated with each other. In this kind of network
topology, the TC resources cannot be multiplexed among multiple BSCs. In the scenario
where multiple BSCs with small capacity are grouped into a network, the TC resources are
greatly wasted.
In TC pool mode, multiple BSCs share a TC pool of large capacity. The typical network
topology is shown in the following figure.

Page 314 of 341
Public

Abis
BSC1 (main BSC)
MSC1
Ater
E1/ST
M
BSC3(sub BSC)
TM
-1
E1
/ST
M1
E1
/S
BSC2(sub BSC)
-1
TC(Pool)
MSC2
E1/STM-1
-1
E1/STM
TM
-1
TM
/S
E1
/S
E1
MSC3
BSC4(sub BSC)
The TC pool adapt to the mode that the GTCS is separated from the BSC cabinet and is
connected to the BSC through the Ater interface. The codec resources in the TC pool are
shared by the main BSC and sub-BSCs, which work in load sharing mode. When a voice
processing board is faulty, it will out of service automatically. In this manner, the subsequent
CS services are not affected, which improves the system reliability. The speech versions
supported by the TC pool are FR, EFR, HR, AMR-FR, and AMR-HR.
To synchronize the clock of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC pool
should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one TC pool.
One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
This feature cannot be used together with the following feature:
GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission

Page 315 of 341
Public

None
8.2.10 GBFD-113728 OML Backup

Availability
Summary
This feature supports configuration of the OMLs on two independent E1s. In this case, only
one OML works at one time. When the OML in working mode is faulty, the BTS uses another
OML. In this way, the BTS can work without being out of service.
Benefits
This feature provides better robustness for the BTS. When the OML is broken because the
transmission links are faulty, this feature ensures that the BTS is not reset and the cell is not
out of service.
Compared with the ring topology that requires twice the amount of resources, this feature
requires only a few timeslots. In addition, configuration of the OML on two E1s can ensure
the stable operation of the BTS system with a little consumption of the transmission
resources.
Description
The OML is the operation and maintenance link between the BSC and the BTS. When the
OML is faulty, the entire BTS cannot work. With this feature, two OMLs can be configured
on two independent E1s. When the OML in working mode is faulty, the BTS uses another
OML. Thus, the BTS and cell can continue to work without being out of service due to
transmission fault or port fault.
When this feature is used, the BSC configures one OML on port 0 and another OML on port 1.
After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish links on the two ports in turn. If the BTS
establishes the OML on one port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTS is reset
or the OML is broken. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts to establish an
OML on another port. If the establishment is successful, the BSC triggers the OML
switchover.
After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are not
switched over. That is, for port 0 and port 1, if the transmission link or port where the working
OML is located is faulty, all the TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots
become unavailable. The normal port, however, can continue to provide services. Thus, the
BTS and cell can continue to work without being out of service.
The OM personnel can use the MML command to enable this feature.
This feature is supported by the BTS in TDM and HDLC modes. This feature is not supported
by the BTS in IP mode.
Enhancement
None
Page 316 of 341
Public
Dependency
Impacts on the MBTS hardware:
None
Impacts on the MBSC hardware:
Dependency on other GBSS features:
The BTS must support this feature.
8.2.11 GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC)

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BSC can control the number of MSs accessing the network at a certain
time by allowing only the MSs of a certain ACC class to access the network. In this manner,
the BSS overload or MSC overload caused by numerous MSs' simultaneous access to the
network can be prevented. This feature uses a sliding window mechanism to enable the MSs
of all ACC classes to access the network. Thus, radio services are available for all MSs,
especially in emergency cases.
Benefits
In emergency cases such as natural disasters, the traffic volume in the network sharply
increases. It may increase to an extent that far exceeds the network capacity. In such a case,
users have difficulties in making calls, and the radio network may even be down. The Access
Control Class (ACC) feature controls the number of MSs accessing the network in emergency
cases by allowing only the MSs of a certain ACC class to access the network. It ensures the
normal operation of the radio network.
Description
When a subscriber is registered with the GSM network, it is assigned a common ACC class
and a special ACC class. The MSs of a certain ACC class are informed of being allowed or of

Page 317 of 341
Public
not being allowed to access the network by the GSM system through system information. The
ACC feature uses a window sliding mechanism to allow only the MSs of a certain ACC class
to access the network at a certain time. The size of the sliding window and the speed of
window motion depend on the operator's configuration policy.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
None

Page 318 of 341
Public
O&M Experience
9.1 O&M
9.1.1 GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
Availability
Summary
If the transmission quality of an E1 link over the Abis interface deteriorates, the BSC actively
blocks this E1 link, so that the link no longer carries new services. After the transmission
quality of the E1 link becomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link.
Benefits
This feature ensures the service quality by not allocating calls to E1 links with
undesirable transmission quality.
This feature reduces the costs in network monitoring and maintenance.
Description
The transmission quality, especially the quality of microwave transmission, is vulnerable to
bad weather such as raining. Once an E1 link is faulty, all services carried on the link will be
affected, which leads to degraded service quality and increased call drop rate.
To prevent the preceding problem, the BSC monitors transmission quality in real time. The
BSC automatically blocks an E1 link if the transmission quality is lower than the specified
threshold. After being blocked, the E1 link carries only the ongoing services and no longer
carries new services.
After the transmission quality of the E1 link becomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link.
Enhancement
None

Page 319 of 341
Public
Dependency
None
None
9.1.2 GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection

Availability
Summary
When the semi-permanent connection feature is enabled, some of the idle E1 timeslots in the
existing network can be used to transmit information such as service hall information, alarm
information on the BTS AC power supply, and other maintenance information.
Benefits
Using semi-permanent connection prevents the arrangement of new paths to transmit the
external maintenance information. As a result, the transmission networking is simplified,
the maintenance cost is reduced, and thereby the transmission cost is greatly reduced.
With this feature, the semi-permanent connections on multiple GMPS/GEPS converge

on one E1 through the timeslot switching on the interface boards. Thus, the investment
in the transmission and timeslot switching devices (DXX devices) are saved.
Description
When some data that does not have a high requirement for the transmission bandwidth needs
to be transmitted from one terminal to another terminal, the idle transmission resources in the
GSM network can be used.
Semi-permanent connection refers to the situation that the information collected on the E1
timeslots of the receiver is exchanged to the E1 timeslots of the transmitter through the
intra-BSS timeslot switching function. The collected information is transparently transmitted
within the BSS. The transparent transmission path is retained permanently without change in
the link configuration. The timeslot switching process is shown in the following figure.

Page 320 of 341
Public
Huawei BSS supports the semi-permanent connection at four rates: 8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32
kbit/s, and 64 kbit/s. The access points of all paths carrying the semi-permanent connections
into the BSS are E1 interface timeslots. The BSS switches over multiple semi-permanent
connections to one E1 and then exports the collected maintenance information to the devices
in the external network.
Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connections: common semi-permanent
connection and monitoring timeslot.
Common semi-permanent connection

In the case of common semi-permanent connection, the interface boards in the BSC are
used for input and output, and only the BSC is involved in the timeslot switching
function from the input timeslot to the output timeslot. With common semi-permanent
connection, the external information of the BSC equipment room can be sent to the CN
equipment room using the transmission resources over the A interface. In addition,
simple DXX devices can be used to combine multiple timeslots into one E1 for
transmission. As a result, the transmission cost is reduced and the DXX device
investment is saved.
Monitoring timeslot

Page 321 of 341
Public
With monitoring timeslot, the timeslot switching function is performed by the BTS and
the BSC. One end of the monitoring timeslot path is connected to the BTS port, and the
other end is connected to the interface board in the BSC. The monitoring timeslot is used
for transmitting external data (such as the information about the alarm of the power
supply) on the BTS side. In BTS cascading, the upper-level BTS is also involved in the
timeslot switching function to transparently transmit the monitoring timeslot data for the
lower-level BTS.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
This application enhancement supports configuration of monitoring timeslots at the
transmission optimization site.
Dependency
None
When monitoring timeslots are used at the transmission optimization site, E1 connection
paths should be configured between the GEHUB and the GEIUB/GOIUB.
None
9.1.3 GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

Availability

Page 322 of 341
Public
Summary
This feature enables you to collect the information about the specified MS if required and
then collect the traced faults in a specific network element using only a few system resources.
In this manner, you can rectify the faults effectively.
Benefits
It is difficult to locate the service faults in MSs because the communications network
becomes increasingly complicated. You can detect the section where the fault occurs only
when the information about the whole process of one MS is collected. By using the
end-to-end MS signaling tracing feature, you can completely record the service activities of
an MS and then locate the section where the fault occurs. The recorded information covers all
the network elements involved in the service of the MS. If the traced MS is reasonably
defined, the valid location information can be obtained without using a large amount of
processing and transmission resources of the system in the whole tracing process.
Description
With this feature, you can create or delete a tracing task in the HLR. The HLR sends the
tracing activation message to the MSC/VLR where the MS is located. When the traced MS
initiates services, the MSC notifies the BSC to perform tracing. When the MS is switched
over to a new MSC, location update is initiated. Then the HLR sends a tracing activation
message to the new MSC/VLR and the tracing task of the original MSC is complete.
When receiving the message of starting a tracing task from the MSC, the BSC traces
information about all the interfaces and then saves the information to the BAM. The
information is saved as a .tmf file, which is used for interface tracing on the BSC LMT. The
file can be browsed through the function of interface tracing review on the BSC LMT. When
browsing the information about a traced MS, you can choose a time segment and choose the
message field to be viewed through a message filter window.
The BSC supports a maximum of 64 tracing tasks (including single-MS signaling tracing,
interface signaling tracing, and end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks). There should be at
least 16 end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks. If the number of existing end-to-end MS
signaling tracing tasks reaches or exceeds 16, determine whether the total number of tasks
reaches the upper threshold when creating an end-to-end MS signaling tracing task. If the
total number does not reach the upper threshold, you can create more tasks. If the total
number reaches the upper threshold, task creation fails.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Page 323 of 341
Public

The M2000 and the CN must support this feature.
WOFD-190600 GBSS Enhanced Subscriber Tracing
WOFD-191400 G&U CS Subscriber Tracing
9.1.4 GBFD-510901 GSM/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic

Optimization
Availability
Summary
By using the Nastar, a network optimization tool, you can find out the missing or redundant
neighboring 2G/3G cells of the GSM serving cell.
Benefits
This feature helps optimize the existing network, increase intra-system and inter-system
handover success rate, optimize the GSM network performance, and improve the user
experience.
Description
Assuming that the operator can provide both the 2G network and the 3G network, the 3G
network can be the WCDMA network or the TD-SCDMA network, if the 3G cells are
configured as the neighboring cells of the 2G cells and the neighboring cell relations are
configured properly, the quality of the GSM network can be improved and the user can enjoy
abundant 3G services. If the neighboring cell relations are configured improperly, there are
missing or redundant neighboring cells. The redundant neighboring cells make the MS cannot
quickly search for the useful cells. If the required neighboring cells are not configured, some
areas may not be covered, thus affecting the handover success rate.
This feature should be supported by the MS, BSC, M2000, and Nastar. The M2000 sends the
list of cells whose neighboring cells should be optimized, the list of neighboring 2G/3G cells
that should be measured by the cells, and the related measurement parameters to the BSC.
Then, the BSC regularly sends the information about the neighboring 2G/3G cells to the MS.
After the MS measures a neighboring cell, the information about the neighboring 2G/3G cell
is sent to the BSC through the measurement reports. The BSC records the neighboring cell
information to the traffic statistics and sends the statistics to the M2000. The Nastar obtains
the statistics from the M2000 and analyzes the statistics to obtain the missing and redundant
neighboring cells as shown in the following figure.

Page 324 of 341
Public
Huawei BSS supports two types of neighboring 3G cells: WCDMA neighboring cells (FDD
neighboring cells) and TD-SCDMA neighboring cells (TDD neighboring cells). One serving
cell supports only one type of neighboring cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
This feature should be supported by the M2000 and Nastar, and depends on the following
features:
GNFD-200020 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis
GNFD-200090 GSM Frequency Analysis
WOFD-270100 Data Collection of Neighboring GBSS Cells
This feature can be enabled only when the related features of the GBSS and Nastar are
bought.

Page 325 of 341
Public
9.2 Visualization & Data Collection

9.2.1 GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation
Availability
Summary
After this feature is enabled, the BSC sends radio measurement data to the Vendor Network
Probe (VNP) through a specified interface, and the VNP sends the data to a navigation service
provider, for example, TomTom. Based on analysis of the radio measurement data, the
navigation service provider provides traffic and congestion information for subscribers.
Benefits
With this feature, the BSC can provide radio measurement data to help telecom operators and
navigation service providers jointly deploy navigation services.
Description
Based on TCP/IP, the BSC reports radio measurement data to the VNP through a specified
interface, which is a private interface currently.
The radio measurement data is reported to the VNP upon any of the following events:
A subscriber accesses a cell under the BSC.
The TA changes.
A cell reselection occurs.
A call connection is released.
An incoming or outgoing BSC handover occurs.
The collection unit (CU) of the navigation service provider then collects radio measurement
data from the VNP.
Enhancement
None
Dependencies
None
None

Page 326 of 341
Public
None
To support this feature, the BSC can be connected to Huawei Nastar-TS V100R001C00 or
Ericsson VNP. Ericsson VNPs use a message format of Category3 or later versions. Huawei
VNPs use a message format of Category4 versions.
.

Page 327 of 341
10
Public
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 10-1 Acronyms and abbreviations

Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
3G
3 rd Generation Mobile Communication System
3GPP2
3rd Generation Partnership Project 2
8PSK
8 Phase Shift Keying
AAL
ATM Adaptation Layer
AB
Access Burst
AbisPC
Abis interface Port Control
ACCH
Associated Control Channel
ACS
Active Codec Set
AEC
Acoustic Echo Cancellation
AFC
Automatic Frequency Correction
AGCH
Access Grant Channel
AGT
Agent
AICP
A Interface Common Procedure
ALC
Automatic Level Control
ALM
Alarm
AMR
Adaptive Multi Rate
AMRFS
Adaptive Multi Rate Full Speed
AMRHS
Adaptive Multi Rate Half Speed
ANR
Automatic Noise Restraint
APM
Advanced Power Module

Page 328 of 341
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
APN
Access Point Name
APP
Application
APS
Automatic Protection Switchback
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
ARQ
Automatic Request for retransmission
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATT
Attach-Detach allowed
BA
BCCH Allocation
BAM
Back Administration Module
BBU
Baseband Control Unit
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
BEP
Bit Error Probability
BER
Bit Error Rate
BFD
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
BG
Border Gateway
BIU
Base station Interface Unit
BKP
Backplane Board
BM
Basic Module
BMACT
Basic Module Active Codec Type
BMRC
BM Resource Control
BOM
Bill Of Materials
BQ
Bad Quality
BR
Backward Reporting
BSC
Base Station Controller
BSCOM
BSC O&M
BSIC
Base Station Identity Code
BSSAP
Base Station Subsystem Application Part
BSSAP+
Base Station Subsystem Application Part Plus
BSSGP
Base Station System GPRS Protocol
BTS
Base Transceiver Station

Public
Page 329 of 341
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
BTSCP
BTS Common Processing
BTSOM
BTS O&M
BTSTRC
BTS Transmission Resource Control
BVC
BSSGP Virtual Connection
BVCI
BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier
CACS
Common Active Codec Set
CAPEX
Capital expenditures
CBC
Cell Broadcast Center
CBCH
Cell Broadcast Channel
CBE
Cell Broadcast Entity
CBIP
Cell Broadcast Interface Process
CBSC
CDMA2000 Base Station Controller
CCB
Call Control Block
CCCH
Common Control Channel
CCU
Channel Codec Unit
CDB
Cell Broadcast Database
CDU
Combining and Distribution Unit
CECCM
CEll CCM process
CECHM
CEll Channel Management
CEGPRS
Cell GPRS Processing
CELP
Code-Excited LPC
CESP
Cell Service Process
CGI
Cell Global Identifier
CHR
Call History Record
CI
Cell Identify
CI
Cell Identity
CIC
Circuit Identity Code
CIU
Circuit Interface Unit
CM
Configuration Manage
CMI
Codec Mode Indication

Public
Page 330 of 341
Public
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
CMR
Codec Mode Request
CPRI
Common Protocol Radio Interface
CPUX
xpu CPU eXtended
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRDLC
Call Radio Link Control
CS
Coding Scheme
CSD
Circuit Switched Data
CV
Countdown Value
CW
Call Wait
DACS
Distant Active Codec Set
DBAPI
DataBase API
DBG
Debug
DBMI
DataBase Management Interface
DBUS
Data-BUS
DCS 1800MHz
Digital Cellular System 1800MHz
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Diffserv
Differentiated Services
DOPRA
Distributed Object-oriented Programmable Realtime Architecture
DPU
Data Process Unit
DRFU
Double Radio Filter Unit
DRX
Discontinuous Reception
DSCP
DiffServ Code Point
DSPC
DSP for transCoder
DSPI
DSP for Integrated
DSPOM
DSP O&M
DSPOM_AGT
DSP OM Agent
DSPP
DSP for Pcu
DT
Debug Terminal
DTAP
Direct Transfer Application Part
DTCB
Distance To Cell Board

Page 331 of 341
Public
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
DTM
Dual Transfer Mode
DTM
Dual Transfer Mode
DTMF
Dual-Tone Multi-frequency
DTX
Discontinuous Transmission
ECSD
Enhanced Circuit Switched Data
ECT
Explicit Call Transfer
EDA
Extended Dynamic Allocation
EFR
Enhanced Full Rate
EFR
Enhanced Full Rate
E-GSM
Extended GSM-900 Band (includes Standard GSM-900 band)
EICC
Enhanced Interference Counteract Combining
EML
Extended Operation and Maintenance Link
EM-layer
Element Management-layer
eMLPP
enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service
EMR
Enhanced Measurement Report
ES
Errored Second
ESL
Extend Signaling Link
ESR
Errored Second Ratio
ETHERNET
OAM
ETHERNET OAM
ETRAU
EGPRS TRAU
FACCH
Fast Associated Control Channel
FAI
Final Ack Indicator
FBI
Final Block Indicator
FCS
Frame Check Sequence
FDR
Frequency Domain Reflectometer
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FER
Frame Erase Ratio
FER
Frame Erase Ratio

Page 332 of 341
Public
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
FH
Frequency Hopping
FIR
Finite Input Response
Flex Abis
Flex Abis
FM
Forward Monitoring
FN
Frame Number
FR
Frame Relay
FR
Full Rate
FR AMR
Full Rate AMR
FS
Full Speed
FTP
FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL
FTPS
FTP Over SSL
FUC
Frame Unit Controller
Gb
Gb interface
GBSC
GSM Base Station Controller
GBSS
GSM Base Station Subsystems
GDPUC
GDPU for transCoder
GDPUX
GDPU for eXtensible use
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GEHUB
GSM E1/T1 High level Data Link Control Unit for aBis
GEIUB
GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for aBis
GEPUG
GSM E1/T1 Packet Unit for Gb
GFGUA
GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for A
GFGUB
GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Abis
GFGUG
GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Gb
GGCU
GSM General Clock Unit
GGOUA
GSM GE optical interface Unit for A
GGOUB
GSM GE optical interface Unit for Abis
GMSK
Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (modulation)
GOMU
GSM Operation and Maintenance Unit
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service

Page 333 of 341
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
GPS
Global Position System
GRFU
GSM Radio Frequency Unit
GRLM
GPRS Radio Link Management
GRRM
GPRS Radio Resource management
GSCU
GSM Switching and Control Unit
GSM-R
Railways Global System for Mobile Communication
GSN
Gigabyte System Network
GTMU
GSM Timing and Main control Unit
GTNU
GSM TDM switching Network Unit
GTRAU
GPRS TRAU
GTRAUE
GPRS TRAU Enhancement
GTRAUIP
GPRS TRAU IP transmission
GUI
Graphical User Interface
GXPUM
GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HLR
Home Location Register
HMC
High Multislot Classes
HR
Half Rate
HR AMR
Half Rate AMR
HS
Half Speed
HSCSD
High Speed Circuit Switched Data
HTTP
HyperText Transfer Protocol
HubBTS
Hub Base Transceiver Station
IACS
Immediate Active Codec Set
IBCA
Interference Based Channel Allocation
ICB
Inner Combiner bypass
ICC
Interference Rejection Combining
ICMP
Internet Control Messages Protocol
IDC
Instance Distribution Control
IMEI
International Mobile Equipment Identity

Public
Page 334 of 341
Public
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
IMSI
International Mobile Subscriber Identity
IP
Internet Protocol
IR
Incremental redundancy
ISI
Inter-Symbol Interference
IWF
Interworking Function
KPI
Key Performance Index
L3IF
Layer-3 Interface
LA
Link adaptation
LAC
Location Area Code
LACS
Local Active Codec Set
LAI
Location Area Identity
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPD
Link Access Protocol on D channel
LLC
Logic Link Control
LMT
Local Maintenance Terminal
LRM
Local Resource Management
M3UA
MTP3 User Adaptation Layer
MA
Mobile Allocation
MAC
Medium Access Control
MACS
Maximum number of Codes Modes in the Active Codec Set
MAIO
Mobile Allocation Index Offset
MCS
Modulation and Coding Scheme
MGW
Media Gateway
MML
Man-Machine Language
MNC
Mobile Network Code
MOS
Mean Opinion Scores
MPTY
MultiParty
MR
Measurement Report
MSC
Main Switching Center
MSIC
MS Instance Control

Page 335 of 341
Public
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
MSIP
MS Instance Processing
MSISDN
Mobile Station International ISDN Number
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
MTLS
Mapping and Transfer between LAPD entity and Service entity
MTP2
Message Transfer Part 2
MTP3
Message Transfer Part 3
MTSS
Mapping and Transfer between SCCP entity and Service entity
NACC
Network Assisted Cell Change
NAT
Network Address Translation
NCH
Notification Channel
NLN
Notification List Number
NM
Network Management
NMS
Network Management System
NRI
Network Resource Identifier
NS
Network Service
NSE
Network Service Entity
NSEI
Network Service Entity Identifier
NSS
Network Subsystem
NSVC
Network Service Virtual Connection
OACS
Optimized Active Codec Set
OMC
Operations & Maintenance Centre
OML
Operation and Maintenance Link
OPEX
Operating Expense
PACCH
Packet Associated Control Channel
PAGCH
Packet Access Grant Channel
PARC
Platform of Advanced Radio Controller
Pb
PCU-BSC interface link
PBCCH
Packet Broadcast Control Channel
PBGT
Power Budget Handover
PBIP
Pb Interface Processing

Page 336 of 341
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
PBT
Power Boost Technology
PCCCH
Packet Common Control Channel
PCH
Paging Channel
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCS 1900MHz
Personal Communications Service 1900MHz
PCU
Packet Control Unit
PDCH
Packet Data Channel
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDTCH
Packet Data Traffic Channel
PDU
Power Distribution Unit
PGC
Paging Control
P-GSM
Primary GSM-900 Band
PIU
Packet Interface Unit
PLMN
Public Land Mobile Network
PMU
Power Management Unit
PoC
Push to Talk over Cellular
PPCH
Packet Paging Channel
PQ
Priority Queue
PRACH
Packet Random Access Channel
PS
Packet Switch Domain
PSI
Packet SI Status
PSU
Power Supply Unit
PT
Payload Type
PTCCH
Packet Timing Advanced Control Channel
P-TMSI
Packet-Temporary Mobile Station Identity
PTP
Point-To-Point
PTRAU
Packet Transcoder/Rate Adaptor Unit
PTT
Push-To-Talk
PTU
Packet Transmission Unit
PVC
Permanent Virtual Connection

Public
Page 337 of 341
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
QoS
Quality of Service
QTRU
Quadruple Transmission Receiver Unit
RACH
Random Access Channel
RC
Resource control & Common procedure
RFC
Request for Comments
RFU
Radio Frequency Unit
RIM
Reference Information Manager
RLC
Radio Link Control
RNC
WCDMA Radio Network Controller
RPE-LTP
Regular Pulse Excitation-Long Term Prediction
RQI
Radio Quality Indicator
RR
Radio Resources
RRBP
Relative Reserved Block Period
RSL
Radio Signaling Link
RTCP
Real-time Transport Control Protocol
RTP
Real-time Transport Protocol
RX
Reception
SACCH
Slow Associated Control Channel
SAIC
Single Antenna Interference Cancellation
SAPI
Service Access Point Identifier
SCCP
Signaling Connection Control Part
SCH
Synchronization Channel
SCTP
Stream Control Transmission Protocol
SCU
Switch Control Unit
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SESR
Severely Errored Second Ratio
SGSN
Serving GPRS Support Node
SID
Silence Descriptor
SIGTRAN
Signaling Transport
SMC
Short Message Centre

Public
Page 338 of 341
Public
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
SMLC
Serving Mobile Location Center
SMS
Short Message Service
SMSCB
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
SP
Service Provider
SPHY
Single PHY
SSL
Security Socket Layer
STP
Signaling Transfer Point
TA
Timing Advanced
TBF
Temporary Block Flow
TC
TransCoder
TCEC
The TRAN Circuit Emulation Card
TCH
Traffic Channel
TCHF
Traffic Channel Full rate
TCP/IP
Transfer Control Protocol /Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA
Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access
TEI
Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TFI
Temporary Block Flow Identifier
TFO
Tandem Free Operation
TGPU
TRAN GBTS Package Process Unit
THP
Traffic handle Priority
TLLI
Temporary link level identity
TLS
Transport Layer Security
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
TMSI
Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier
TMU
Timing/transmission and Management Unit
TNU
TDM switching Network Unit
TOP
TDM Over Packet
TPEC
The TRAN Packet over E1/T1 Card
TRAU
Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit

Page 339 of 341
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
TRAUE
TRAU Enhancement
TRAUIP
TRAU IP transmission
TRC
Trace
TrFO
Transcoder Free Operation
TRM
Transport Resource Management
TRU
Transmission Receiver Unit
TRX
Transceiver
TSU
TDM Switching network Unit
TSYN
TRAU Synchronization Unit
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
UOIP
User traffic Data Over IP
UOP
User Traffic Data Over Packet
USCU
Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit
USF
Uplink Status Flag
VAD
Voice Activity Detector
VBS
Voice Broadcast Service
VGCS
Voice Group Call Service
VISP
Versatile IP and Secure Platform
VLAN
Virtual LAN
VLR
Visitor Location Register
VoIP
Voice over IP
VPN
Virtual Private Network
VQI
Voice Quality Index
WAN
Wide Area Network
WBBP
WCDMA Baseband Processing unit
WCDMA
Wideband CDMA
WFQ
Weighted Fair Queuing
WMPT
WCDMA Main Processing Transmission unit
WRED
Weighted Random Early Detection

Public
Page 340 of 341
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Full Name
WRR
Weighted Round Robin
XPUX
XPU eXtended

Public
Page 341 of 341

GBSS13.0 Optional Feature Description 05 (20120606) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS13.0 Optional Feature Description 05 (20120606) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS13.

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential